JP2020037041A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.SOLUTION: On the basis of an entrance of a game ball flowed down through a first flow channel to first ball entrance means, a first privilege is granted by first privilege granting means. On the basis of an entrance of a game ball flowed down through a second flow channel to second ball entrance means, a second privilege different from the first privilege is granted by a second privilege granting means. Ratios of game balls flowed down through a specific flow channel to flow into the first ball entrance means and the second ball entrance means are respectively adjusted by adjusting means. Accordingly, by adjusting the adjusting means, it is possible to arrange a game machine likely to grant the first privilege or to arrange a game machine likely to grant the second privilege. Therefore, even in a same model, by changing an adjustment condition by the adjusting means a different game property can be realized. As a result, an effect in which a game can be prevented from becoming monotonous is achieved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines perform a lottery to determine whether or not a game ball wins based on a winning of a game ball to a specific winning opening. In addition, there are known a plurality of winning ports in which a prize ball is paid out when a ball wins, in addition to a specific winning port. Some of the conventional gaming machines can change the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to the direction in which a player ejects a game ball by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning opening. is there.

JP 2001-129177 A

  The prize ball that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than the prize ball paid out by winning in the winning opening, so the player usually performs a lottery to determine whether or not it is a winning. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening to be executed. That is, it was common for a player to continue to launch a game ball in the same direction until a hit was achieved. Therefore, when a player plays a game on a gaming machine of the same model, as long as the player hits the ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win in the same winning opening, and the number of awarded balls to be paid out changes little. There was a case. That is, there is a risk that the game will be monotonous.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a game from becoming monotonous.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a specific flow path branched at least into a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow, and a game flowing down the first flow path. A first ball entry means provided at a position where a ball can enter, and a first privilege which can be given a first privilege based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means. Based on the privilege granting means, the second ball entry means provided at a position where the game balls flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and the game balls entering the second ball entry means A second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege different from the first privilege, and a game ball having flowed down the specific flow path, wherein the first flow path and the second flow path Adjusting means capable of adjusting the respective ratios of flow into the air.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition, and a lottery result by the lottery means being a specific lottery result. A bonus game providing means for providing a bonus game advantageous to a player, a first lottery state in which a lottery result by the lottery means is likely to be the specific lottery result, and the specific lottery state being higher than the first lottery state. A lottery state setting unit that can be set to a second lottery state having a low probability of being a lottery result, wherein the first privilege granting unit sets the first lottery state as the first privilege by the lottery state setting unit. It is controlled to be set.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the second privilege providing means provides a predetermined amount of game media as the second privilege.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the specific flow path is branched into the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game balls can flow. A first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball, and based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, the first privilege granting means sets the first ball entry means. One privilege is given. A second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and is different from the first privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The second privilege is provided by the second benefit providing means. The ratio at which the game balls flowing down the specific flow path flow into the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is adjusted by the adjustment means.

  By adjusting the adjusting means, a gaming machine to which the first privilege is easily given or a gaming machine to which the second privilege is easily given can be obtained. Therefore, different gaming properties can be realized by changing the adjustment degree by the adjustment means even for the same model. Therefore, there is an effect that a monotonous game can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result, a privilege game advantageous to the player is provided by the privilege game granting means. You. The lottery state setting means sets a first lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result being the specific lottery result is high and a second lottery state in which the probability of the specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. . The first privilege providing means is controlled so that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means as the first privilege.

  This makes it possible to adjust the ease of transition to the first lottery state by the adjusting means. Therefore, the first lottery state is easily set according to the business policy of the hall, and the gaming property is easily set to the privilege gaming state, or the first lottery state is hard to be set, and the gaming property is easily given the second privilege. Can be adjusted. Therefore, there is an effect that a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall can be provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the predetermined amount of game media is provided as the second privilege by the second privilege providing means, the ease with which the predetermined amount of game media is provided can be adjusted by the adjusting means.

  Thereby, it is possible to adjust whether the predetermined amount of game media is easily provided or the first privilege is easily provided according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall can be provided.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a diagram illustrating a display screen on which a right-handed navigation is displayed, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen on which a right-handed warning image is displayed. (A) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen during a big hit, and (b) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen when a ball enters a large value winning opening during a big hit. (A), (b) is the figure which illustrated the display screen on which the warning image was displayed. It is a front view of a storage device. (A) is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball which flowed into the storage device when the storage valve is closed, and (b) which flowed into the storage device when the storage valve was opened. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a traveling direction of a sphere. It is a figure showing the upper stream side among the courses provided on the right side of the game board. It is a figure showing the lower stream side among the courses provided on the right side of the game board. (A) is a diagram showing a state where the first specific winning opening is opened, and (b) is a diagram showing a state where the second specific winning opening is opened. (A) is a figure which shows the path | route of the ball in the state in which the 1st specific winning opening was closed, and (b) is a figure which shows the path | route of the ball in the state where the 1st specific winning opening was opened. (A) is a figure which shows the path | route of the ball in the state in which the 2nd specific winning opening was closed, and (b) is a figure which shows the path | route of the ball in the state where the 2nd specific winning opening was opened. (A) is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball which entered into the 2nd variable prize-winning device in the state where the probability variation entrance was closed, and (b) is a figure which shows the probability variation entrance opening. It is a figure showing the direction of advance of the ball which entered into the 2nd variable winning device in the state where it is in. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of the state of the 2nd special winning opening and the state of the flow path in a 2nd variable winning device in the 12th round of the big hit A, and (b) is 12th of the big hit B. It is a figure which shows the time change of the state of the 2nd specific winning opening and the state of the flow path in a 2nd variable winning device in the round. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter C2 and a big hit type in a special symbol. FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a second hit random number counter C4 and a hit in an ordinary symbol. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an ending process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an abnormality process performed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the winning command setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an error notification process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the hit time alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the normal time alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 6 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display screen in case the storage valve of 2nd Embodiment is closed, (b) is the display screen in case the storage valve of 2nd Embodiment is open. FIG. It is a front view of the storage device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which illustrated the case where the ball which flowed into the storage device in the case where the storage valve in 2nd Embodiment is closed is guide | induced to a high value winning opening, (b) is a figure which showed. It is the figure which illustrated the case where the ball which flowed into the storage device in the case where the storage valve in 2nd Embodiment is closed is guided to a small value winning opening. It is the figure which illustrated the advancing direction of the ball which flowed into the storage device when the storage valve in 2nd Embodiment is open. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of RAM in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. is there. It is a flow chart which shows main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows storage control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the warning process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process at the time of storage performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process at the time of cancellation | release performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the display screen during the big hit in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the downstream in the path | route provided in the right side of the game board in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a top view of a storage device and a 2nd variable winning device in the state where the slide member of the modification of a 1st embodiment projected to the near side in front view, and (b) is a modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a top view of the storage device and the 2nd variable winning device in the state where the slide member of the example was buried in the back side in front view. It is a figure showing the regulation contents of the 1st hit type selection table in the modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning opening closing process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the modification of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit time notification process 2 performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball which flowed into the storage device in the state where the ball stored in the storage device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment was disadvantageous arrangement | positioning with respect to the player. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball which flowed into the storage device in the state where the ball stored in the storage device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment became an advantageous arrangement | positioning for the player. It is a figure showing the suggestion display image displayed on the display screen in the modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the cancellation | indication suggestion display process performed by the MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the storage state command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17) for launching a ball in the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 17) due to the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of ball guide nails (not shown) and a windmill (movable member 310 are illustrated. (Not shown), in addition to the rails 61 and 62, the general winning opening 63, the first entering opening 64, the second entering opening 640, the first variable winning arrangement 65, the second variable winning arrangement 650, the normal entrance opening ( A through-gate 67, a variable display unit 80, a storage device 600, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display unit 80, and the storage device 600 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed in response to a prize winning at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball enters the normal entrance 67. When passing, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is, the jackpot type is also determined. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 is referred to as “the lottery of the special symbol 1”, and the lottery is performed for the entrance to the second entrance 640. The special symbol lottery to be performed is referred to as “special symbol 2 lottery”.

  When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse). Alternatively, the operation of releasing (until 10 balls are won) is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). More specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won), and 12 In the round, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). As a result, a large number of balls win in the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  Also, inside the second variable winning device 650, there are two kinds of entrances for determining the added value after the end of the jackpot given after the end of the special game state (a certain variation entrance 654 and a normal entrance). Port 655) is provided (see FIG. 15). Although the details will be described later, when a ball enters the certain-variable entry ball opening 654 in the special game state, a “special symbol high probability state” is added as an added value after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, in the case where the ball has never entered the certain-variable-entrance entrance 654 during the special game state, a “normal symbol time-saving state” is given as an added value after the end of the big hit. In addition, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided as big hit types of special symbols (see FIG. 18B). Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the ease with which the ball enters the certainty changing opening 654 is varied.

  When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) elapses, the lottery result is displayed. Is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined for each type of entrance. Each of them is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1) or the number of retained balls for the second entrance 640 (special) If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the drawing is started. When both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  On the other hand, in the ordinary symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the ordinary entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ball is a normal symbol. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and a ball enters the second entrance 640. It will be in an easy state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Be started.

  In each of the "big hit A" and the "big hit B", a special game state (15R big hit) of 15 rounds is set. Also, in the special game state, when a ball enters the probability changing ball entrance 654, as a value added after the end of the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol height from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot. Move to probability state (special symbol is being changed). On the other hand, in the special game state, if the ball has never entered the probability change entrance 654, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times During that time, it shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. In addition, when it shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol after the end of the big hit, it also shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. This low probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit. In addition, although the details will be described later, in “big hit B”, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the positive change ball opening 654 during the special game state (during big hit) than in “big hit A”. That is, since the "big hit B" is more likely to shift to the special symbol change state after the big hit is completed, the big hit is likely to occur again at short intervals after the big hit is completed. Therefore, "big hit B" becomes a big hit which is more advantageous to the player than "big hit A".

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, when the so-called probability is changing (probable change), in other words, the special game state is reached. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol (while the special symbol is being changed) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is increased and the ball can easily win the second entrance 640. . On the other hand, the “low probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the special symbol is not being changed, and refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of the special symbol being changed. In addition, the normal symbol time saving state (medium time saving) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and a ball can easily win the second entrance 640. On the other hand, the normal state is a state of the game in which neither the special symbol is changed nor the normal symbol is reduced in time (the jackpot probability or the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is not increased).

  During a special symbol change or a normal symbol during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the normal symbol increase, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state is changed. A longer time is set as compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball wins in the second entrance 640 compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It is easy to do. Therefore, during a certain symbol change or during a normal symbol time reduction, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. That is, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

  It is to be noted that, while the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is shortened, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time. Alternatively, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when a normal symbol is hit may be configured to be greater than in the normal state. In addition, during the probable change of the special symbol or during the shortening of the ordinary symbol, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is not changed, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened, and At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during a certain change of the special symbol or during a shortening of the ordinary symbol, the time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the ordinary symbol ( Only the winning probability of the second symbol) may be increased as compared with the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, when the probable change state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state, the probable change state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot, but is not limited to this. The number of times may be limited. Specifically, for example, after the special game state ends, the special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends ten times, and after the special symbol lottery ends ten times. May be configured to be set to the normal state. In addition, the number of times the special symbol is changed to a certain state is not limited to ten times, and may be arbitrarily determined. Similarly, in the present embodiment, when a ball does not enter the probability changing ball entrance 654 in the special game state, it is configured to be in a normal symbol time-saving state until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times. However, the time reduction period of the normal symbol is not limited to 100 times and may be arbitrarily determined.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a seven-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate in a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning prize) into the first entrance port 64 or the second entrance port 640, is being executed. In this case, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is displayed in a lighting state as a stop symbol after the variation is completed, or a ball inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed yet, is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is performed. The number of balls is retained up to a maximum of four times for each type of entrance, and the number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. However, the number of times may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of a special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates a jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) if the jackpot is a jackpot. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) by using the ball as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large-sized 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 17). Three symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols). These third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17) is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the liquid crystal display.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are provided with an attached symbol imitating a character such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed in front of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit A”, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added are aligned. On the other hand, in the case of “big hit B”, any one of the numbers “0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9” including all odd numbers is added. A fluctuation display in which symbols are aligned is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower portions, and a lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 indicates the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the big hit is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, and sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character may perform a predetermined operation. A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), The number of entered balls is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the retained number of balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. FIG. 4B is an example in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the entry into the first entry opening 64 is four. When a reserved ball corresponding to a ball entering the second entrance 640 is generated, a reserved ball number design different from the reserved ball number design displayed in the small area Ds1 of FIG. 4A is displayed. Is done. Thereby, the player can easily determine the number of the reserved balls corresponding to the entry into the first entrance port 64 and the number of the retained balls corresponding to the entry into the second entrance port 640. You can check.

  In the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be retained up to four times, but the maximum number of retained balls is limited to four. Instead, the number may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of retained balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, referring to FIG. 5A, a display (right-hand navigation) prompting the third symbol display device 81 to launch a ball aiming at the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 is displayed. The display contents in the event of occurrence will be described.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is positively changed or the normal symbol is reduced in time, so that the ball is shifted to the right side of the game board 13. By hitting the ball (right-handed), the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. As will be described later in detail, when a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) is performed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the first entrance 64 It is more likely to be a "big hit B" than in the case of a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol (lottery of the special symbol 1) which is performed based on the ball having entered the ball. Therefore, in the state where the special symbol is given after the jackpot is completed, or in the case where the normal symbol is reduced in time, the right-handed execution is advantageous to the player. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the certain change state or the normal symbol time saving state, the ball cannot enter the second entrance 640 unless the player makes a right hit. The player will not be able to sufficiently receive the benefits of the symbol's probable change state or the normal symbol's time reduction state.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probable change state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, the image (right-hand navigation) illustrated in FIG. It is designed to ensure that the benefits of time saving of ordinary symbols are obtained.

  As illustrated in FIG. 5A, in the right-hand navigation, a character “Aim for the right!” Is displayed in the small area Ds3 in the sub-display area Ds, and rightward and downward characters are displayed above and below the character. Three arrows are displayed. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible for the player to surely obtain the benefit of being in the certain symbol change state and the normal symbol time saving state.

  Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The warning image illustrated in FIG. 5 (b) indicates that the player does not hit the ball on the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 in a period during which the player should hit the ball (right-hand). This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined to be executed. More specifically, this is displayed when it is determined that the player is right-handed in the normal state (the state in which the special symbol is not in the surely changed state and the normal symbol is not in the time saving state).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as not to be easily opened in the normal state (even if the player hits right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640). For this reason, if the player hits the ball in the normal state, the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with the case where the player hits the ball at the first entrance 64 by hitting the ball left. That is, if the player makes a right-handed hit in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to hit the jackpot, which is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting left-handed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) loss of the player.

  As illustrated in FIG. 5B, when it is determined that the player is right-handed in the normal state, a “warning” is issued to the entire small display area Ds (small areas Ds1 to Ds3). Is displayed, and the character "Please play left-handed!" Is displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that right-handing should not be performed (left-handing should be performed). Also, the clerk of the hall also checks the presence or absence of the right-handed warning screen (see FIG. 5B) to determine whether or not there is a player who is performing the irregular right-handed playing method in the normal state. It can be easily determined.

  In addition, as a method of determining whether or not the ball is right-handed, the determination is made based on whether or not the ball has entered the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) into which the ball can flow when right-handed. . More specifically, when a ball enters any of the general winning openings 601 and 602 or the out openings 603a to 603c provided inside the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) When it is determined that the ball has passed the provided ball entry switch), it is determined that the player is right-handed.

  Here, the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) is in a state in which the ball easily flows down to the general winning opening 601 (see FIG. 9A), and in a state where the ball flows down to the general winning opening 602, depending on the game state. The state is set to two types of states, that is, a state where it is easy to make it (see FIG. 9B). Then, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state) (special symbol change state, normal symbol time saving state, normal state), the ball is set to a state where the ball can easily flow down to the general winning opening 601. The general winning opening 601 is a winning opening in which a smaller number of prize balls are paid out (for example, three) than the general winning opening 602 when a ball enters. For this reason, even if right-handed in the normal state, there is little merit of making the ball enter the storage device 600 (the number of balls held cannot be increased). In other words, when right-handing is performed in the normal state, the frequency of receiving a special symbol lottery decreases and the number of balls held decreases, so that the disadvantage is increased for the player. For this reason, a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)) is displayed in order to prevent the player from continuing to perform a disadvantageous game method (a game method of right-handing in a normal state). It is configured as follows.

  In addition, as a determination factor for determining whether or not to display the right-hit warning image (see FIG. 5B), not only a general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 that is easy to win in a normal state, but also a winning. The reason why it is determined whether or not the ball has entered a general winning port (high value winning port) 602 or the like which is difficult to perform is because the possibility of an illegal game is considered. That is, in the normal state, the ball is illegally continued to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 having a large number of awarded balls to be paid out (for example, 15 payouts) without passing through a big hit. There is a possibility that a fraudulent game method for obtaining a large amount of prize balls may be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has won (entered) the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 in the normal state, the player makes a left strike on the player (right A right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) prompting not to perform beating is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the illegal game.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered one of the entrances (general winning openings 601, 602, and out exits 603a to 603c) provided in the storage device 600 in the normal state. Although a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed on the screen, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), when it is detected that a ball has won (enters a ball) to a general winning port (high value winning port) 602 where many prize balls are paid out, an unauthorized game is detected. It may be configured to determine that the operation has been performed and display a right strike warning image. Thus, the clerk of the hall can easily determine whether there is any fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right strike warning image. In addition, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), when it is detected that a ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, the illegality is performed on the hall computer. May be configured to be output. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether there is a possibility that the illegal operation is performed and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 in which the illegal operation is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the player makes a right-handed shot based on detecting a ball entering each of the entrances (general winning openings 601 and 602, and out exits 603a to 603c) provided inside the storage device 600. Although it is determined that the vehicle is performing right-hand driving, the method of determining whether or not right-handing is being performed is not limited to this. For example, when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, it may be configured to determine that the ball is right-handed, or a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 A well-known sensor capable of detecting that a ball has passed may be provided above, and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor, it may be determined that the player is right-handed.

  Next, an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special game state (during the big hit state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third round of the jackpot. As shown in the figure, when a big hit occurs, for example, an image in which the boy character 710 finds a treasure chest 715 filled with treasures is displayed. This treasure suggests a large amount of prize balls that the player obtains in the special game state (big hit state). With this display, the pleasure of acquiring the prize ball can be amplified, and therefore, a feeling of satisfaction of the jackpot can be given. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  A display area 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is provided in the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81. In the example of FIG. 6A, a character “ROUND3” is displayed in the display area 714. By confirming this display, the player can recognize that the present is the third round of the jackpot. Therefore, the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot can be easily recognized by the player.

  Further, in the upper right portion of the third symbol display device 81, a right-handed navigation image is displayed in the same manner as during the special symbol change state or during the normal symbol time reduction state. That is, the character "Aim for the right!" Is displayed in the small area Ds3, and rightward arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying this right-handed navigation image, the player is made to recognize that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the special game state (during the big hit state). be able to. If the player hits left despite the special game state (big hit state), it is provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 and is opened in the special game state (big hit state). The ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, it becomes impossible to acquire a large amount of prize balls, and the player loses. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the special game state (big hit state), the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6A) is displayed to urge the player to perform right-handed. Thereby, it is configured such that the player can obtain a prize ball at the jackpot.

  In addition, in the lower right part of the third symbol display device 81, a winning number display area MA for displaying the number of winning (ball entry) to the general winning opening 602 is formed. In the winning number display area MA, for example, characters “EXTRA BONUS × 10” are displayed as shown in FIG. The character "EXTRA BONUS" means that a prize ball is obtained by a method different from a prize ball obtained by allowing a ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. ing. Specifically, it means that a prize ball is obtained by making the ball enter the general winning opening 602. The character “× 10” indicates the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 at the jackpot. In the example of FIG. 6A, it means that the ball has been made to enter the general winning opening 602 ten times in the first to third rounds.

  In addition, a schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed above the text “EXTRA BONUS × 10”, and a text “EXTRA BONUS gate is being opened” is displayed above the storage device 600. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 604a is set to the open state (released state). In addition, in the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a balloon with the word “Aim!” Is displayed at the position of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. . This balloon allows the player to recognize that it is advantageous (a large amount of prize balls can be obtained) when the ball is put into the general winning opening 602.

  FIG. 6B is a diagram showing display contents when a ball enters the general winning opening 602 in the special game state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 6B, when a ball entering the general winning opening 602 is detected during a jackpot, the word “GET” is displayed in the portion where the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed. At the same time, an image in which a ball enters the place corresponding to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed. Furthermore, in the winning number display area MA, the display content is changed from “EXTRA BONUS × 10” to “EXTRA BONUS × 11”. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that a prize ball has been obtained by the ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602.

  In this way, by displaying the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 during the jackpot, the prize ball is different from entering the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a at the jackpot. Can be recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation of an increase in the number of “EXTRA BONUS” (the number of times of ball entry to the general winning opening 602). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, various warning images will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating an example of a left strike warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a left strike is performed in the special game state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 7A, when it is determined that the player is left-handed, a large display area 716 for displaying a warning is formed in the center of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the large display area, a character "Warning" is displayed in large size, and a character "Right-Right Aim Attacker !!" is displayed below the character "Warning". By displaying these characters in the large display area, the player can be made to recognize that the current game method (left-handed) is an incorrect game method. Therefore, in the special game state (big hit state), the player can be surely obtained a large amount of prize balls.

  The determination as to whether or not the player is making a left hit is made based on whether or not a ball has entered the first entrance 64. That is, by determining that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 in the special game state (during the big hit state), it is determined that the player is making a left-handed hit, and a left-handed warning image ( The control is performed so that FIG. 7A is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, a left strike warning image (see FIG. 7A) is displayed when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected, but the invention is not limited to this. . For example, a pass sensor that detects the passage of a ball is provided on a path (flow path) provided on the left side of the game board 13, and a left strike warning image ( 7 (a) may be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7B, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the storage device 600 is, for example, a case where a ball is detected in the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 despite the special gaming state (big hit state), or a special gaming state (big hit state). When the ball is detected to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 in spite of not being in the (state), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and a warning image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600, the word “warning” is displayed in a large size at the center of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, a character “Please call a gate error clerk” is displayed at the bottom. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and can promptly request a repair or the like to a hall clerk or the like.

  In addition, if the wiring is fixed to a general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 having a large number of awarded balls that are always paid out by improperly changing the wiring or the like, the ball is easily inserted into the hole. The store clerk can determine the possibility of fraud simply by checking the warning image (see FIG. 7B). Therefore, the ball is fixed to a state in which the ball easily enters the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602, and the ball is aimed at the storage device 600 to suppress the illegal act of increasing the ball without going through a big hit. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. The variable display for alternately lighting for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “」 ”), the electric accessory 640 a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to the predetermined symbol. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (variation time) is set to be shorter during a certain symbol change or during a normal symbol time reduction in the game state than in the normal state. As a result, during the special symbol change, and during the normal symbol time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, the chance of hitting the normal symbol increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during a certain change of the special symbol and during a time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, during a certain pattern of a special symbol or during a time reduction of a normal symbol, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than that in the normal state during the special change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per one normal symbol contact may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal entrance 67 is attached to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that, of the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board can pass therethrough. ing. When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol retaining lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. This may be performed by using a part of the device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the normal entrance 67 is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). . In addition, the number of assembled normal entrances 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the mounting position of the normal entrance 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can be won is provided. When a ball wins in the first entrance opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed at 110 (see FIG. 17), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view (below the normal entrance 67), a second entrance 640 from which a ball can be won is provided. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 17), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  Each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 may be different. For example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 is set to three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 is set to five. Is also good.

  The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball is unlikely to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. (Enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher during the special symbol change and during the normal symbol time reduction, and the time required for the normal symbol change display is shorter than during the normal state. In the display, the symbol “○” is easily displayed. Therefore, the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Further, during the special symbol change and the normal symbol time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than in the normal state. Therefore, a state in which a ball can be more easily won in the second entrance 640 than in the normal state can be created during the special symbol change and during the normal symbol time reduction. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have a motorized accessory as provided in the second entrance 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Here, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball has won the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball has won the second entrance 640 is the same regardless of whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state. is there. However, as the type of the jackpot selected in the case of the jackpot, the probability of becoming the jackpot (jackpot B) that allows the ball to easily enter the certain-variable entry ball port 654 during the special game state is the second entry port 640. The case where the ball wins is set higher than the case where the ball wins the first entrance opening 64.

  During normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult for the second entrance 640 to win a prize. The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (a so-called “left hit”). Therefore, it is more advantageous for a player to aim for a jackpot.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is shortened, by passing the ball through the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state. Since it is in a state where it is easy to win the ball entrance 640, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right strike”), and the normal entrance is performed. It is more advantageous for the player to pass the ball opening 67 to open the electric accessory and to aim at the jackpot B by winning the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment plays a game in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbol is being changed, whether the ordinary symbol is being shortened, or the normal state). Can change the way the ball is fired between "left strike" and "right strike". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first entrance 64 (the lower left side of the second entrance 640), and a substantially rectangular first specific winning opening is provided substantially in the center thereof. (Large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when a special symbol lottery performed due to a winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the first specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The first specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 14 times (14 rounds). More specifically, in the first to eleventh rounds and the thirteenth to fifteenth rounds in the special game state, the opening and closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a is executed. The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening / closing front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis ( (Not shown)). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot win or hardly wins. At the time of a big hit, the large open mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the front lower side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state where it is easy to win the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates to alternately repeat the state with the closed state.

  A second variable winning device 650 is provided on the lower left side of the first variable winning device 65, and a horizontally long rectangular second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is provided on an upper portion thereof. . The opening / closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 650a forms a closed state in which the ball projects toward the front side in front view to prevent the ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 14A). ). On the other hand, at the time of the twelfth round, the opening / closing plate covering the second specific winning opening 650a slides toward the back side in front view, and is buried in the back side of the game board 13 at the twelfth round. An open state in which the ball can enter the two-variable winning device 650 is formed (see FIG. 14B).

  As described above, in the special gaming state (during the big hit), the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a enters the certain variable entering ball opening 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650 based on the ball. After the end of the jackpot, the state shifts to the special symbol change state. On the other hand, even if the ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the special game state, or if the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, all the balls enter the normal entrance 655. In this case, after the end of the jackpot, the state shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. In addition to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, another winning opening may be provided as a winning opening opened in the special game state. Conversely, the winning opening may be only the first specific winning opening 65a. The arrangement position is not limited to the arrangement of the present embodiment, and may be arranged at an arbitrary position.

  On the right side of the first variable winning device 65, a storage device 600 is provided. The storage device 600 has a plurality of entrances (general winning openings 601 and 602, and out exits 603a to 603c) provided therein, and allows the entered ball to flow down to one of the entrances. be able to. Further, the storage device 600 can store only one ball that has entered the inside thereof (stop flowing down). Further, the storage device 600 is covered with a transparent cover body on the front side in front view, and into which ball entry hole the ball that the player has flowed (entered) into the storage device 600 enters. Is configured to be easily confirmed. Details of the storage device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an outline of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. 8, the storage device 600 is configured so that a sphere can enter the inside thereof through the guide channel 605. It should be noted that the storage device 600 is configured such that when a player makes a right hit, one out of three hit balls hits. The ball that has not entered the guiding flow path 605 flows down the upper left side of the storage device 600 and flows down in the direction of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, in the special game state, a part of the ball fired toward the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a by the player enters the storage device 600 via the guide channel 605. Is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 8, inside the storage device 600, two types of flow paths branched by the branch member 604 are provided downstream of the guide flow path 605. Specifically, inside the storage device 600, a guide channel 606 is provided on the left side when viewed from the front. Most of the balls flowing down the guide flow path 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is provided with a detection switch 601a (not shown) that can detect that the ball has entered (passed). When the detection switch 601a detects that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small winning opening) 601, three prize balls are paid out. It should be noted that, to the left and right of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, the balls which have not flowed into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 despite flowing down the guiding flow path 606 are discharged. Outlets 603a and 603b are provided. These out ports prevent (suppress) the accumulation of spheres inside the storage device 600, and can reliably discharge the spheres flowing down the guiding flow path 606. Further, similarly to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, these out openings 603a and 603b are provided with detection switches 603a1 and 603b1, respectively, not shown. With these detection switches 603a1 and 603b1, the number of ejected balls can be accurately determined.

  Inside the storage device 600, on the right side when viewed from the front, there is provided an induction flow path 607 through which a ball can flow. Most of the game balls flowing down the guiding flow path 607 enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is provided with a detection switch 602a (not shown) which can detect that the ball has entered (passed). When the detection switch 602a detects that a ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, 15 prize balls are paid out. That is, it is possible to obtain more prize balls when the ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 than when the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. it can. Out ports 603b and 603c are provided on the left and right of the general winning port (high value winning port) 602, respectively. These out ports prevent (suppress) the balls that have not entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 from accumulating inside the storage device 600, and prevent the balls flowing down the guiding flow path 607. It can be discharged reliably. The out port 603c is provided with a detection switch 603c1 (not shown), similarly to the out ports 603a and 603b. The number of ejected balls can be accurately determined by the detection switch 603c1.

  Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special game state (big hit state) is set, the pachinko machine 10 is set so as to be easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. In a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the ball is set to be easily entered into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. That is, in the special game state, in addition to the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained, and the general winning opening (high value winning) in the storage device 600. It is configured such that a prize ball can be obtained by a ball winning to the mouth 602. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the merit of the player due to the big hit can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with more pleasure to be a big hit, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 having a relatively large number of award balls to be paid out is closed by the storage valve 607a, and the number of award balls relatively paid out. Is set in a state in which the ball easily enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number. That is, in a state other than the special game state, there is little merit of making a ball enter the storage device 600. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, a large amount of payout is attempted by always aiming at the storage device 600. An irregular game method can be prevented (suppressed). As described above, the storage device 600 is configured so that one out of every three right-hit balls hits. Then, when the ball enters the general winning opening (small winning opening) 601, the number of award balls to be paid out is 3 balls. In other words, even if right-handed is executed in the normal state, it is difficult to perform a lottery of a special symbol, and it is not possible to increase the number of balls by paying out based on the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Therefore, during the normal state, it is possible to make the player want to make a left-handed hit.

  The induction flow path 607 is provided with a storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a can block the guide channel 607 by protruding toward the near side in front view, and can prevent the sphere that has proceeded to the guide channel 607 from flowing down. That is, the ball can be stopped (stored) at the upper portion of the storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a is configured to be driven by a storage device solenoid 610 (see FIG. 17). More specifically, by driving the storage device solenoid 610, the state in which the storage valve 607a protrudes to the near side in front view (the state in which the induction flow path 607 is closed) and the state in which the storage valve 607a moves to the back side in front view. It is configured to be switchable between a buried state (a state in which a ball can flow down the guide channel 607). The sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a is prevented (suppressed) from flowing out to the guide flow channel 606 side by being surrounded by the inner wall of the guide flow channel 607 and the branch member 604. . That is, the protruding portion 604a provided on the branch member 604 is set to be sufficiently high so that the ball stored above the storage valve 607a does not flow out.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the operation of the ball that has entered the storage device 600 will be described for each of the two possible states of the storage valve 607a described above. FIG. 9A is a diagram illustrating the operation of a ball that has entered the storage device 600 in a state where the storage valve 607a protrudes to the near side, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement of the ball which entered into the storage apparatus 600 in the state buried in.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, at least the lower end of the guide channel 605 overlaps the upper end of the guide channel 607. On the other hand, the upper end portion of the guide flow channel 606 is located on the left side of the center axis 605a of the guide flow channel 605, and hardly overlaps the lower end portion of the guide flow channel 605. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guiding flow path 605 easily advances to the guiding flow path 607.

  The sphere that has proceeded to the guiding flow path 607 is prevented from flowing down by the storage valve 607a, and stops above the storage valve 607a (the sphere is stored). When another sphere newly flows down the guiding flow path 605 while the sphere is stopped at the upper part of the storage valve 607a (the sphere is stored), it flows down the guiding flow path 605 newly. The contacted ball and the ball stored on the storage valve 607a come into contact (interference). Due to this contact (interference), the trajectory (flowing direction) of the sphere newly flowing down the guiding flow path 605 changes.

  Note that the guide flow path 607 is provided slightly to the right of the guide flow path 605 (see FIG. 9A), and the sphere stored on the storage valve 607a is newly added to the guide flow path 605. In most cases, the ball is stopped on the right side of the ball flowing down. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing down the guide flow path 605 collides with the left side of the sphere stored above the storage valve 607a, and repels to the left in front view. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing down the guiding flow path 605 proceeds to the guiding flow path 606 provided on the left side in front view. As described above, most of the balls flowing down the guiding flow path 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 having a relatively small number of awarded balls (three awarded balls). That is, in a state in which the storage valve 607a protrudes toward the near side in front view and the sphere cannot flow down the guiding flow path 607 (a state in which the guiding flow path 607 is closed), most of the spheres that have entered the storage device 600 are generally used. The ball enters the winning opening (small winning opening) 601.

  On the other hand, when the storage valve 607a is buried on the back side in front view (see FIG. 9B), there is nothing to prevent the flow of the sphere that has proceeded to the guiding flow path 607, so that the guiding flow path 607 The ball that has proceeded to the bottom flows down the guiding channel 607 as it is and enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. As described above, the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 has a relatively large number of award balls to be paid out (15).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a ball can flow down the guide channel 607 when a big hit occurs (see FIG. 9B). Therefore, in the special game state, by performing a right-handed operation, a ball is made to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, so that a large amount of prize balls are obtained, and the right-handed injection is performed. When a part of the drawn ball wins the ball to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the storage device 600, a winning ball can be obtained. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the merit of the player due to the big hit can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with more pleasure to be a big hit, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the general prize port (high value prize port) 602 having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out is closed by the storage valve 607a, and the payout rate is relatively high. The ball is set in a state where the ball easily enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 having a small number of winning balls. That is, in a state other than the special game state, there is little merit of making a ball enter the storage device 600. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, a large amount of payout is attempted by always aiming at the storage device 600. The game method can be prevented (suppressed).

  In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the guiding flow path 606 enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, and the ball flowing down the guiding flow path 607 enters the general entrance opening 602. , But is not limited to this. For example, on the downstream side of each guide flow path, a known clune means provided with a plurality of winning ports is provided, and different payout balls are paid out according to the winning ports to enter. Is also good. As a result, even if it flows down the guiding flow path 606, many prize balls can be obtained by entering the prize port having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, the player can be watched with interest until the ball that has entered the storage device 600 enters any of the winning ports. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more enjoyed.

  In the present embodiment, the guide valve 607 is closed by the storage valve 607a, so that the sphere can be stored on the way of the guide flow path 607. The sphere may be stored on the way of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the guide flow path 607, and magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than during the special game state (during the big hit state). Thus, the sphere that first flows into the guiding flow path 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the sphere can be stopped from flowing down (the sphere can be stored at the position of the electromagnet). With this configuration, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one ball is stored above the storage valve 607a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that two or more balls can be stored. Further, when storing a plurality of spheres, the spheres may be stored vertically or may be arranged side by side.

  In the present embodiment, the out port is provided inside the storage device 600, but a winning port for paying out prize balls may be provided instead of the out port. Further, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the winning opening may be made different. More specifically, for example, six winning balls are provided in place of the out mouth 603a, ten winning balls are provided in place of the out mouth 603b, and a winning ball is provided in place of the out mouth 603c. May have twelve winning ports. Accordingly, it is possible to more interestingly observe the case where the ball flows down the guiding flow path 606 or into which winning opening the ball enters the guiding flow path 607. Further, a member such as a nail, which can change the flowing direction of a ball, may be provided downstream of the guide channel 606 or the guide channel 607 so that a winning hole into which any ball enters becomes more random. . Thereby, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the whereabouts of the ball can be more interestingly observed until the ball enters one of the winning openings. In addition, by providing nails or the like, it is possible to set a ball entrance through which a clerk of the hall easily enters a ball. Therefore, the pitching rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hall side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, a path when the player has ejected a ball to the right side of the game board 13 (when hit right) will be described. First, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a part of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the upstream side of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. 10, a normal entrance 67 is provided in the upper part of the flow path (path) on the right side of the game board 13. As described above, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a lottery of a normal symbol is executed. Then, when a normal symbol is hit, the second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol “O” indicating a normal symbol hit after a variable effect for indicating a result of the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. Then, based on the "O" symbol being displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 provided downstream of the normal entrance 67 is activated. It is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds × 1 time or 1 second × 2 times). While the electric accessory 640 is open, a right-hit ball easily enters the second entrance 640. As described above, during the special change of the special symbol or during the reduction of the time of the ordinary symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, and the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and the opening period of the electric accessory is increased. 2 It is in a state where the ball easily enters the ball entrance 640. Therefore, by performing a right-handed hit, a special symbol lottery can be received without reducing the number of balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 downstream of the second entrance 640 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, a storage device 600 is provided downstream of a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. A first variable winning device 65 is provided downstream of the entrance of the storage device 600, and a second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable winning device 65. (See FIG. 11). That is, when the player makes a right hit, among the balls that have flowed downstream in the right path (flow path), the ball that has flowed downstream without flowing (entering) into the storage device 600 is the second ball. 1 It flows down in the direction of the variable winning device 65. Further, the ball that flows down toward the first variable winning device 65 and does not enter the first specific winning opening 65a flows down toward the second variable winning device 650.

  In this manner, the ball can flow down in the direction of the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 only by the player making a right hit. Therefore, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the player can cause the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a only by making a right hit, and a large amount of balls can be obtained. You can get prize balls. In addition, a part of the ball launched aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a enters the storage device 600. As described above, in the special gaming state (big hit state), most of the balls that have entered the storage device 600 enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (see FIG. 9B). ), The player can acquire more prize balls during the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with more pleasure to be a big hit, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, specific operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, the first specific prize port 65a of the first variable prize device 65 is configured to be openable in the frontward direction when viewed from the front. When the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, a game ball flowing down a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter the first specific winning opening 65a. Note that, as described above, the first specific winning opening 65a is used for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls) in rounds 1 to 11 and rounds 13 to 15 in the special game state (big hit state). Open until winning). Then, when a ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a, 15 prize balls are paid out for one entered ball. Therefore, the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the second specific winning opening 650 of the second variable winning device 650 can be buried inside the gaming board 13 by sliding to the back side in front view. It is configured to be possible. As a result, the upper portion of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and a game ball flowing down a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter. As described above, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won) in the 12 rounds of the special gaming state (big hit state). Then, when a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, 15 prize balls are paid out for one entered ball. Therefore, the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the operation of a ball that has flowed down the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 and reached the first specific winning opening 65a by right-handing will be described. First, FIG. 13A is a diagram illustrating a case where the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the first specific winning opening 65a is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the first specific winning opening 65a is closed, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the player falls into a space in front of the first specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 13A). Then, the ball that has fallen to the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a flows down a flow path provided below the first specific winning opening 65a. Since the flow path below the first specific winning opening 65a is inclined toward the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball flows down toward the second specific winning opening 650a.

  On the other hand, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, as shown in FIG. 13B, the ball is placed on the extension of the flow path from which the ball flows down. The opening of one specific winning opening 65a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. As shown in FIG. 13B, a ball discharge port 65c for discharging a ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the first variable winning device 65. When the ball enters the ball discharge port 65c, the winning of the ball is detected, the prize ball is paid out, and the ball that enters the first variable winning device 65 from the first specific winning port 65a. Can be discharged. Since the bottom portion 65b of the first variable winning device 65 is inclined in the direction of the ball outlet 65c, all the balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a enter the ball outlet 65c. Can be ball. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a description will be given of the operation of the ball that has reached the second specific winning opening 650a by flowing down the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 by right-handing. First, FIG. 14A is a diagram illustrating a case where the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, it flows down above the second specific winning opening 650a and falls to the left side of the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 14A). Then, the ball that has dropped to the left of the second specific winning opening 650a flows down to the out opening 66 (see FIG. 2) provided to the left of the second specific winning opening 650.

  On the other hand, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, as shown in FIG. The opening of the 2 specific winning opening 650a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. As shown in FIG. 14B, a ball discharge port 650c for discharging a ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650. By entering the ball discharge port 650c, the winning of the ball is detected and the prize ball is paid out, and the ball entering the second variable winning device 650 from the second specific winning port 650a. Can be discharged. Since the bottom portion 650b of the second variable winning device 650 is inclined in the direction of the ball outlet 650c, all the balls that have entered the second specific winning opening 650a enter the ball outlet 650c. Can be ball. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

  Next, the structure of the second variable winning device 650 downstream of the ball outlet 650c will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the special game state (big hit state), when a ball enters the certain variable ball entrance 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650, After the end of the jackpot, it is configured to shift to a certain symbol change state. This positive change ball inlet 654 is provided in one of the two channels (the guide channel 652 and the guide channel 653) provided downstream of the ball outlet 650c (the guide channel 652). Have been. At the upper ends of the two flow paths, a flow path switching valve 650d for setting a flow path through which the ball flows is provided. The flow path switching valve 650d is provided to close one of the two flow paths so that the ball cannot travel and open the other flow path so that the ball can travel. Have been. The flow path switching valve 650d can rotate the switching shaft 650e as a rotation axis by driving the flow path solenoid 611 (see FIG. 17). To switch the placement.

  FIG. 15A and FIG. 15B are diagrams showing the movement of the sphere for each arrangement of the flow path switching valve 650d. First, FIG. 15A is a diagram illustrating a case where the flow path switching valve 650d is arranged to close the induction flow path 652. In the case of the arrangement in which the guide flow path 652 is closed, the ball that has entered the ball discharge port 650c is unable to proceed to the guide flow path 652 by being blocked by the flow path switching valve 650d. Therefore, the sphere advances to the guiding channel 653 (see FIG. 15A). A normal ball entrance 655 is provided downstream of the guidance channel 653. That is, during the arrangement shown in FIG. 15A, the ball cannot enter the certain-variable-entrance ball opening 654. In this embodiment, by turning off the flow path solenoid 611, the flow path switching valve 650d is configured to have the arrangement shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, FIG. 15B is a diagram illustrating a case where the flow path switching valve 650d is arranged to close the induction flow path 653. This arrangement can be realized by turning on (exciting) the flow path solenoid 611. In the case of the arrangement in which the guiding flow path 653 is closed, the ball that has entered the ball discharge port 650c can proceed to the guiding flow path 652 without being blocked by the flow path switching valve 650d. Therefore, the sphere advances to the guiding flow path 653 and enters the positive change entrance 654 provided downstream thereof.

  When the ball enters the certainty changing ball entrance 654, it is set to shift to the specially changing state of the special symbol at the end of the jackpot (at the start of the ending effect). In addition, when the twelfth round in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened ends, a suggestion effect for indicating to the player the game state after the end of the big hit is performed in the subsequent rounds. In other words, if a ball has entered the probable changing ball entrance 654 in the 12th round, a display effect indicating that a transition to the probable changing state of the special symbol is made in the 13th to 15th rounds is made in the third design display device 81. Executed in On the other hand, if the ball has not entered the probable entry opening 654 in the 12th round, the third symbol display device 81 displays a display effect indicating that the normal symbol shifts to the time saving state in the 13th to 15th rounds. Executed in In this way, by setting the round in which the large 2 specific winning opening 650a is opened to the twelfth round, a sufficient period for executing a suggestive effect indicating the game state after the end of the jackpot in the remaining rounds of the jackpot is secured. be able to.

  As described above, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, since the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream from the entrance of the storage device 600, the ball is transferred to the storage device 600. The easier it is for the ball to flow, the more difficult it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650. If it is difficult for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650, it is difficult for the ball to enter the certain-variable ball entrance 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot B. Conversely, as the ball is less likely to flow into the storage device 600, the ball is more likely to reach the second variable prize device 650, so that the ball is more likely to enter the positively variable ball opening 654 in round 12 of the jackpot B. Become. Therefore, by adjusting the ease with which the ball flows into the storage device 600, the proportion of the ball entering the positive change ball opening 654 can be changed. Here, as a method of adjusting the ease of inflow into the storage device 600, for example, adjusting a nail (see FIG. 11) provided at an entrance portion of the storage device 600 can be mentioned. That is, the more the two nails provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 are adjusted to be closer to each other, the more difficult it is for the ball to pass between the two nails, so that the more difficult it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600. . Therefore, in the twelve rounds of the jackpot B, the ball easily enters the certainty changing ball entrance 654, so that it is easy to shift to the specially changing state of the special symbol. On the other hand, the more the two nails provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 are adjusted to move away from each other, the more easily the ball passes between these two nails, so that the ball easily flows into the storage device 600. . Therefore, in the twelve rounds of the jackpot B, the ball easily flows into the certainty changing ball opening 654, and it is difficult to shift to the certainty changing state of the special symbol. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided at the entrance of the storage device 600, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 (the ratio of the state of the special symbol being changed) can be varied. The specifications of the machine 10 can be changed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the operation of the flow path switching valve 650d has the same pattern regardless of the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is different between the jackpot A and the jackpot B. Thereby, the big hit B is configured to be easier to enter the ball into the certainty changing ball opening 654 in the special game state (big hit state) than the big hit A. The relationship between the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d and the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path switching valve 650d in the twelfth round of the jackpot A. The upper graph of FIG. 16A shows the time change (whether in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and FIG. The lower diagram shows the time change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the left induction flow path 652 downstream of the ball discharge port 650c is open or the right induction flow path 653 is open). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time After a lapse of (for example, 0.2 seconds), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, the closed state is maintained until seven seconds elapse from the start of the twelfth round, and is set to the open state based on elapse of seven seconds. This open state continues until the twelfth round ends. Specifically, ten balls enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, or the opening state is set until 30 seconds elapse from the start of the twelfth round. Is done. When the twelfth round ends, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. This closed state is continued until the special gaming state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits.

  Further, in the twelfth round of the jackpot A, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so as to close the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side thereof and allow the ball to flow down the induction flow path 652 on the left side (FIG. 15). (B)). This state continues for 6.5 seconds after the start of the twelfth round, and based on the lapse of 6.5 seconds, the flow path switching valve 650d switches in the opposite direction. That is, the guide flow path 652 is closed by the flow path switching valve 650d, and a state is set in which a ball can flow down the guide flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15A). Since this switching operation is completed in a period of 0.5 seconds or less, the flow path can be switched before the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened.

  After the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (a state in which a ball can flow down the guide flow path 653) is maintained. The state in which the ball can flow down the guiding flow path 653 is the next big hit, and continues until the eleventh round ends. Then, based on the completion of the eleventh round and the three-second interval, a state is set in which a ball can flow down the guiding flow path 652 (the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on). That is, during most of the period in which the player plays the game, the ball can pass through the guiding flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d, and is provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d. The state in which the ball can pass through the guiding flow path 652 is limited from an interval period (3 seconds) set before the start of the 12th round to 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round. Only the period (9.5 seconds). Therefore, even if a fraudulent act of entering the ball into the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is performed except in the twelfth round of the special game state, the ball enters the certain-variable entering ball opening 654. Since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from hitting, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the illegal acquisition of the specially changed state of the special symbol.

  The timing for switching the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to this. For example, the guide channel 652 may be switched to the open state at the start of the 12th round, or in the middle of an interval period set after the 11th round is completed (for example, after the start of the interval). (When 0.5 seconds have elapsed). As a result, the period during which the guiding flow path 652 is opened can be reduced to a shorter time, so that the ball illegally enters the inside of the second variable winning device 650 while the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. Even if it is performed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the certain-variable entry port 654. That is, fraudulent acts can be prevented.

  As described above, in the twelfth round of the jackpot A, the period in which the guiding flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is open, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open. The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (the second large opening) 650a is set so that the period of the second winning opening (the second large opening) 650a does not substantially overlap with the period of time (only 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the 12th round). Therefore, in many cases when the jackpot A is reached, the ball does not enter the certain-change ball entrance 654 during the special game state (during the big hit), so that it is difficult to set the special symbol to the certain change state after the end of the big hit.

  The reason why the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the 12th round is to make it difficult to understand that it is a jackpot A immediately after the start of the 12th round. It is. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (b), at the jackpot B where the ball easily enters the certain-variable entry port 654, the second specific winning port (the second large opening port) immediately after the start of the 12th round. ) 650a is released. Therefore, by sharing the operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a immediately after the start of the 12th round with the jackpot A and the jackpot B, it is expected that the current jackpot is the jackpot B. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16B, a description will be given of a time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650 a and the flow path switching valve 650 d in the twelfth round of the jackpot B. The upper graph in FIG. 16B shows the time change (whether in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and FIG. 16B. The lower diagram shows the time change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the left induction flow path 652 downstream of the ball discharge port 650c is open or the right induction flow path 653 is open). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set to the open state. The open state is maintained until 5 seconds elapse from the start of the twelfth round, and the closed state is set based on the elapse of 5 seconds. In addition, even if ten balls enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a before the lapse of 5 seconds, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not used. Will be closed. This closed state is continued until the special gaming state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits.

  As described above, the flow path switching valve 650d is set to perform the same operation as the jackpot A in the twelfth round of the jackpot B. That is, based on the start of the interval period set at the end of the eleventh round, the guiding flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d is closed, and the ball can flow down the guiding flow path 652 on the left side. (See FIG. 15B). When 6.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the twelfth round, the flow path switching valve 650d switches in the opposite direction. That is, the guide flow path 652 is closed by the flow path switching valve 650d, and a state is set in which a ball can flow down the guide flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15A). After the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (a state in which a ball can flow down the guide flow path 653) is maintained.

  As described above, in the twelfth round of the jackpot B, the period in which the guiding flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is opened, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened. The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set so that the period for which the opening is performed overlaps at most 5 seconds. Therefore, in many cases when the jackpot B is reached, the ball can be made to enter the certainty changing ball entrance 654 during the special game state (during the big hit), and the special symbol is set to the certainty changing state after the end of the big hit. It will be easier.

  Note that the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to this, and a pattern in which a ball can easily enter the certain-variable entering ball opening 654 and a certain-variable entering ball opening 654 are provided. The pattern may be arbitrarily determined as long as a pattern in which the ball does not easily enter the ball can be set. Further, the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d can be arbitrarily determined without being limited to the embodiment. For example, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so that the sphere can flow down the guiding flow path 653 at the start of the 12th round (see FIG. 15A), and a predetermined time (for example, 6.D) from the start of the 12th round. After 5 seconds have elapsed, the flow path switching valve 650d may be set so that the ball can flow down the guide flow path 652 (see FIG. 15B).

Further, the number of rounds in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened is not limited to the twelfth round, and may be set to an arbitrary round. Further, the second specific winning opening (650a) may be opened in a plurality of rounds. For example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the 15th round. May be set. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the certainty changing ball entrance 654, so that after the end of the jackpot B, the special symbol can be more easily changed to the certainty changing state. Therefore, even though the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, which lowers the motivation of the player for the game. It can be prevented (suppressed).

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first entrance port 64.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 601, 602, and 650a and the out ports 603a to 603c is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box are closed. Cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c are stored. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

  The first random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a large hit determination value of a first random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1. However, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning start is one of the determination values specified in the first random number table 202a. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18 (b)) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the big hit types are stored. , And the type of the entrance that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”. Is associated with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 18B). As described above, in the case of the jackpot A, most of the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the twelfth round is the guidance provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d. The flow path 653 is configured to be open (see FIG. 16A). Therefore, it is difficult to cause the sphere to flow down to the guiding flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d, so that the sphere is transferred to the positive change ball opening 654 provided downstream of the guiding flow path 652. It becomes difficult to enter the ball. That is, when the big hit A is reached, it is difficult to shift to the special symbol change state after the big hit is completed.

  The jackpot B is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 99” (see 202b2 in FIG. 18B). As described above, in the case of the jackpot B, the entire period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the twelfth round is the guidance provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d. It is configured to overlap with the period when the flow path 652 is open (see FIG. 16B). Therefore, while the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open, the ball is simply inserted into the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and the flow path switching valve 650d is provided. Can flow down to the guiding flow path 652 provided on the left side of the sphere. Further, as described above, the positive change ball opening 654 is provided downstream of the guiding flow path 652. Therefore, in the case of the big hit B, it is easy to shift to the special symbol change state after the big hit is completed.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”. The jackpot A is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 18B). The jackpot B is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “20 to 99”. That is, as compared with the case where the special symbol 1 has been hit by a lottery, the number of the judgment values that become the big hit B when the special symbol 2 has been hit by a lottery is larger. Therefore, it is configured such that a large hit is more likely to be a large hit B when the special symbol 2 is selected by the lottery.

  As described above, during the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of the hit of the normal symbol is reduced. It is set to be longer (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the special symbol probable change state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and if the jackpot is obtained, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot B, and the special symbol is changed after the jackpot ends. Since the jackpot B, which tends to be in the state, is likely to be repeated, the player can easily acquire a large amount of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C). In addition, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, referring to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal entrance 67 and the second random number table 202c, It is determined whether it is a hit or not.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to winning in the first entrance opening 64 composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) and a second received ball A special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to a prize at the mouth 640 is provided, and these areas are provided with timings for entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, respectively. In addition, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a ball normally holds a ball. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing when the ball has passed through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once every timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is set by a first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is When it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a higher probability of being a big hit than the low probability. And the number of random hits included in each of them is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. Specifically, when the special symbol is in the probable change state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is any one of “0 to 9”. If it is determined that it is any of “0 to 9”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 of "0 to 399", the judgment value to be a big hit is 10 of "0 to 9". Is 1/40 (10/400). When the special symbol is in the low-probability state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "200". If the value is "200", it is determined that the winning is a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 from "0 to 399", the judgment value to be the big hit is only one of "200". The probability of a jackpot is 1/400.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random number of the jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability are calculated. Therefore, a random number value for each jackpot is set so as not to be a duplicate value. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a big hit is changed depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value which is a special symbol jackpot to be predicted, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a special symbol big hit, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is out of the range, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol big hit, the first symbol display device is used. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at 37 is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, the winning of the special symbol 1 results in a big hit, and in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is any of “0 to 49” is “big hit A”. In addition, a jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol 1, and the jackpot type when the random number value is any of “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”. Furthermore, a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, and the big hit type when the random value is any one of “0 to 19” in the first hit type counter C2 is “big hit A”. In addition, a jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, and the jackpot type when the random number value is any one of “20 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  In the present embodiment, two types of jackpots are used. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and one type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. In addition, a configuration in which the same jackpot type is selected with the same value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case where a large hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1 and in the case where a large jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2 May be. With such a configuration, the data amount of the first hit type selection table 202b can be reduced, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, super reach, and the like. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d that stores a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 as described above. ing.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, “variation (for a long time)”, “variation (for a short time)”, various types of “normal reach”, and various “variance of super reach” are defined as variation patterns for deviation. In addition, various types of “normal reach” and various “super reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns for jackpots. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected in accordance with the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. Are stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that is a hit for the symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. Is equal to the winning random number set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. The second winning random number table 202c is used for the low probability of the ordinary symbol (the period in which the ordinary symbol is in the normal state) (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C). High-probability time period (a period in which the symbol is normally reduced in time and a period in which the special symbol is in a probable change state) (see 202c2 in FIG. 18 (c)). The number of jackpot random numbers is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning at the time of a low probability of a normal symbol (the normal state of the normal symbol) and the high probability of the normal symbol (the time saving state of the ordinary symbol) Is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 18C, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers that are hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28” (202c1 in FIG. 18C). reference). As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 24 out of 240 in the total number of random numbers, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol hits, The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the reduction of the time of the ordinary symbol and during the probable change of the special symbol), there are 200 random numbers which are the big hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5-204". . These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short, such as “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further reduced. Since it is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is "1 second × 2 times" when a normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 34).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 19, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 34), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 33). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Here, details of various flags and counters stored in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability change flag 203g, probability change setting flag 203h, probability change pass counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, probability variable enable flag 203o , A positive change valid timer 203p, a discharge number counter 203q, a medium time counter 203r, and a memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a first entrance port. The respective values of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 acquired based on the winning of 64 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second entrance 640 are stored, respectively. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

  Like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area). Of the vacant areas, the areas are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 202b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prize stored in the other reserved areas is the same as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is a variable display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter that counts the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the three symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the counter value increases to a maximum value of 4. One is added (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 26).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is held) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 26 and S405 in FIG. 28). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 holds the variable display retained by the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of change display reserved balls managed by the special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is increased by the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The sound lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls retained and stored in the second entrance 640 is stored. Only the difference is described, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f sets the maximum number of retained balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the ordinary entrance 67. This is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S704 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 30).

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is increased. The acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (FIG. 31). S703: No).

  The probable change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state of a special symbol (probably changing a special symbol). When the certainty change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the gaming state is a certainty change state of a special symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in a low probability state. In the present embodiment, when the probability change setting flag 203h described later is set to ON at the end of the big hit game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (see S1304 in FIG. 37). Further, the probability change flag 203g is set to be a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to off when the start of the big hit is set. In the initialized state (that is, the state where the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erasing switch 122 pressed down), the probable change flag 203g is reset to off, and a normal power-off occurs. In this case, the state immediately before the power-off occurs is backed up.

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the special symbol probability change state after the end of the big hit. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probable change game state is determined by whether or not a game ball has entered the probable change entrance port 654 during the special game state (big hit state). . When a game ball enters the certainty change ball entrance 654, the incoming ball is detected by a certainty change switch (not shown), and the certainty change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, the probability change setting flag 203h is set off based on the probability change flag 203g being set on (see S1305 in FIG. 37). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probability change setting flag 202h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the power has been passed through the probability change switch before the power is turned off. May be configured to be officially set to ON and return. In this case, whether or not the power has passed through the probability change switch before the power is turned off can be determined based on whether or not a later-described probability variation counter 203i has a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to judge whether or not the power is turned off and the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203h in a state where the power is turned off, thereby reducing damage to the game store. it can.

  The probability change passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability change switch in one round (in the present embodiment, the 12th round of the jackpot) in the jackpot state. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have flowed into the second variable winning device 650 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability-change passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203q described later. The probable variable passage counter 203i is incremented and updated by one each time the probable variable switch is passed (S1411 in FIG. 38). In addition, after executing a process of determining whether or not the number of game balls flowing into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of discharged balls, the number is reset to the initial value “0” (FIG. 39). S1511). It should be noted that the value of the probability change passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, its value is reset to zero.

  In each round in the jackpot game, the winning number counter 203j indicates a first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and a second specific winning opening (second large opening) of the second variable winning device 650. This is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the large opening 650a. Specifically, based on the detection of a ball entering by a winning sensor (not shown) provided in each of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, one is added and updated. Is performed (S1403 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a (the value of the winning number counter 203j) ) And the number of discharged sheets (the total value of the discharged number counter 203q and the probable variable passage counter 203i) are determined, and then reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is reset to zero.

  As described above, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, only the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened. Specifically, the number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is counted. On the other hand, in the twelfth round, only the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened. Therefore, in the twelfth round, the winning number counter 203j is substantially equal to the second specific winning opening (second large opening). The number of balls that have entered the (large open mouth) 650a is counted.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered one of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, a winning is achieved. Although the configuration is such that 1 is added to the value of the number counter 203j, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are respectively entered. A separate counter for counting the number of spheres may be provided.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting the time elapsed since the guide flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d was set to the open state (see FIG. 15B). . That is, the operation counter 203k counts the elapsed time from when the flow path solenoid 611 is set to ON and the ball is set in a state in which the ball can enter the certain-variable entry port 654. In this pachinko machine 10, when the eleventh round of the jackpot is completed, the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on (excited), whereby the flow path switching valve 650d rotates clockwise about the switching shaft 650e as a rotation axis, The guide channel 652 is opened.

  In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to a period during which the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on (excited) is set at the end of the eleventh round. That is, a counter value corresponding to an interval period of 3 seconds before the start of the twelfth round and a total of 9.5 seconds of 6.5 seconds after the start of the twelfth round is set. On the other hand, in the processing of S1409 of the winning processing (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110, it is updated by being subtracted by one. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 611 is turned off. The value of the operation counter 203k is backed up even when the power is shut off. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is reset to 0, which is an initial value, by being initialized.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a have been closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the first round. From the closed state. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203m to ON, the remaining ball timer 203n described later is incremented by one and updated (see S1505 in FIG. 39). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time since the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed, This is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the game balls flowing into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 has elapsed.

  The remaining ball timer 203n determines whether the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed after one preset round is completed (1st to 11th round, 13 to 15th round) or the second round. When the specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed (12 rounds), it is necessary for the game balls flowing into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to be discharged. This is a counter for determining whether time has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 81 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and thus corresponds to 3 seconds (2 seconds + 1 second) with a margin of 1 second added. The counter value is set as the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203n. The value of the remaining ball timer 203n is updated, and when the value reaches the upper limit (3 seconds), the first variable prize device 65 (1 to 11 rounds and 13 to 15 rounds) or the second variable prize device 650. It is determined whether or not the number of winnings in (12 rounds) matches the number of discharged coins (S1507 in FIG. 39). If it is determined that the winning number does not match the number of discharged pieces, an error command is set and the effect is notified. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the ball is clogged inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, the ball is left in the second variable prize winning device 650 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, and an impact is applied at the start timing of the next 12 rounds of the jackpot to cause the ball to enter the probability changing ball opening 654. Fraud can be suppressed.

  If the winning number does not match the discharge number, a special flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, a certain change is set even if the ball enters the certain change ball opening 654. The flag 203h may not be set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improper provision of the certain game state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that either the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a has been switched from the open state to the closed state. When the detection is detected, updating of the counter value by the remaining ball timer 203n is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, separate counters may be provided for the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

  The certainty change valid flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the entering ball is valid when a game ball enters the certainty changing ball opening 654 after the flow path solenoid 611 is set to off. It is. When the probability change enable flag 203o is set to ON, the ball that has flowed into the guiding flow path 652 (see FIG. 15B) is based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 611 is ON. This indicates that the time is shorter than the time required to enter the ball into the mouth 654. In other words, it indicates that the ball entering the certain variation ball entrance 654 is a normal operation.

  The probable change valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time since the above-described probable change valid flag 203o was set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 611 is turned off, the period required for normal entry into the entry port 654 can be determined by the probability change valid timer 203p. In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball that has flowed into the guiding flow path 652 to enter the positively changing ball opening 654 is one second. The upper limit of the probability change valid timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds with a margin of 0.2 seconds added. When the ball enters the certainty changing ball entrance 654 after the elapse of 1.2 seconds, there is a high possibility that some kind of wrongdoing has been performed, so that the certainty setting flag 203h is controlled so as not to be updated. .

  Thus, in a state where the flow path switching valve 650d closes the guiding flow path 652 (a state in which the ball is not guided to the certain-variable entry ball port 654), the sphere is inserted into the certain-variable entry port 654, or the certain-variable entry ball is inserted. From the downstream of the mouth 654, a game ball is pushed up by a piano wire or the like to pass through the certain-variable entry port 654, or a radio wave or the like is erroneously detected as a ball having entered the certain-variable entry port 654. Can be suppressed.

  The discharged number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 in one round. The first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are each provided with a ball discharge port switch (not shown) for detecting the discharge of the ball. Each time the discharge of the ball is detected by the discharge port switch, 1 is added to the discharge number counter 203q (see S1503 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, after it is determined whether or not the number of balls that have entered the first variable prize device 65 or the second variable prize device 650 matches the number of ejected balls, the value of the ejected number counter 203q is set to the initial value. Is reset to 0 (S1511 in FIG. 39).

  The time reduction counter 203r is a counter for counting the remaining time reduction period (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates) in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the probable change setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot, 100 is set in the time reduction counter 203r (see S1307 in FIG. 37). That is, in the present embodiment, when the probability change game state is not set after the big hit game, the time saving state of the normal symbol of 100 times is given.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, and various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation patterns of the types of the variation patterns (completely out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed change pattern based on the change pattern type indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various kinds of change modes while strictly observing rough information such as the change time and the type of the change pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a change start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e are provided. , A probability change state flag 223f, a time reduction state counter 223g, a large hit flag 223h, and an allowable time counter 223i.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the result of the lottery of the reserved ball before the start of the change.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ) Is a counter for counting up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, the main control device 110 adds the number of pending balls of the variable display due to the entry into the first entrance 64 (start winning), or the main controller 110 displays a variable display in a special symbol. Is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1908 in FIG. 43). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball count after the storage. In order to notify the value of the counter 223 b to the display control device 114, a display pending ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball count command, the reserved ball count value indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball count corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is used. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol on the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. However, the detailed description is omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 43), and turned off when fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 43). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 43), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2007 in FIG. 47). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The probable change state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a probable change state of a special symbol. When the probability change state flag 223f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability change state, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. The probability change state flag 223f is updated in accordance with the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). It is determined whether or not the current state is the special symbol probable state according to the state of the probable state flag 223f, and a corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5A) displayed in the special symbol probable change state, or a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B). Or not to be displayed.

  The time reduction state counter 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal symbol time reduction state. When the time reduction state counter 223g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state, and when it is off, it indicates that the normal pattern is in the normal state (low probability state). The time saving state counter 223g is updated in accordance with the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). In accordance with the state of the time reduction state counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the current time is the normal symbol time reduction state, and a corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5A) displayed in a time-saving state of a normal symbol, or a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B). Or not to be displayed.

  The big hit flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a special gaming state (big hit state). If the big hit flag 223h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special game state (big hit state), and if it is off, it is in a state other than the special game state (big hit state) (special change state of special symbol, normal The symbol is in the time reduction state or the normal state). The big hit flag 223h is set to ON when an opening command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1914 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to ON when the special game state (big hit state) is started. On the other hand, the big hit flag 223h is set off when an ending command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to off when the special game state (big hit state) ends. The corresponding effect is set according to the state of the big hit flag 223h. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6A) displayed in the special game state (big hit state), or the left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A). ) Is displayed or not.

  The permissible time counter 223i indicates that the ball that has flowed into the guiding flow path 606 or the guiding flow path 607 immediately before the state of the storage valve 607a is switched to one of the entrances (general winning opening 601 or general winning opening 602). This is a counter for counting the time until the ball enters (ball flush time). By counting the ball ejection periods, when a ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is more accurately determined whether or not the entering is a normal operation. be able to. Each time an opening command or an ending command is received, a counter value corresponding to one second is set in the permissible time counter 233i (see S1914 and S1917 in FIG. 43). Each time the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 42), is decremented by one (see S2015 in FIG. 47).

  As described above, when the storage valve 607a is closed, a ball enters the general winning opening 602 provided downstream of the storage valve 607a, or when the storage valve 607a is opened, the general winning opening 601 is opened. When the ball has entered, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) is displayed. However, if the ball flows into the guide channel 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball enters the general winning opening 602 after the storage valve 607a switches to the closed state. May be. Similarly, when a ball flows into the guide channel 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the closed state to the open state, the ball enters the general winning opening 601 after the storage valve 607a switches to the open state. May ball. In order to treat these as normal entering balls (not to display a warning image), in the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 607a is switched, the allowable time counter 233i is set to a predetermined period (1 second). Set the corresponding counter value. Until the one second set as the counter value elapses, if the ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is determined that the operation is normal (warning image is not displayed). It is configured as follows.

  The winning number counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of times a ball has hit the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 in a jackpot. The value of the winning number counter 223j is reset to 0 at the start of the jackpot, and the value thereof becomes 1 each time a winning information command corresponding to the ball entry to the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 is received at the jackpot. (See S1944 in FIG. 45). As described above, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the special gaming state (big hit state). (See FIG. 6A). The winning number counter 223j is referred to for accurately updating the number of entering balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, displays a variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a notice effect.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as the images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a long time from the address designation to the data output in reading the first page of data, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 49) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S2201 in FIG. 49) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 24) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and generates one of the frames of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  Note that drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  When drawing an image using nonresident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data reside in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance are provided. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays a result of a lottery performed in the main control device 110 by a fluctuation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2103 and S2104 in FIG. 48).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the “X” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp Judging the result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", display "○" symbol for a fixed period after stopping the variable effect, and if "missing special symbol", display "X" symbol after stopping the variable effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user must wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and it is detected that the first entrance ball 64 or the second entrance 640 has entered the ball. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the power-on fluctuation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Are instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed on the screen. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the power is turned on. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and displays, for example, a city, the sea, the sky, and the like. Further, a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5A) and the like are also stored in the back image area 235c as a back image.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, or the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  Note that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Accordingly, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of FIG. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, an opening data transfer flag. 223i, a stored image data determination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demo effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on and the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a which are normally closed will be opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) has been notified to the player.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed with being enlarged from a standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced with respect to the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image in the image are defined as one frame of rendering content defined corresponding to each address. For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, the “sky stage”, and the “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  When it is specified to display any of the backs A to C by this back type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numeral of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the discontinuity of the continuity of the numeral. be able to.

  The “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 22) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, The image list to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident one of the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 23 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 23 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list described later (see FIG. 24) is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. At the same time as setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2105 in FIG. 48). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S3705 in FIG. 59 (b)).

  This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 50B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50B) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 50) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 50 (b) S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3601 in FIG. 59A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 59 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 24) described below, which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d while adding the pointer 233f to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 24) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. ), The pointer update process (see S3305 in FIG. 58) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 24), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by an image controller to draw an image for one frame, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 24, the back image used for the one-frame image, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source top address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination top address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 50 (b) Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3307 in FIG. 56). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3813 in FIG. 60). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3814 in FIG. 60). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information already developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process (see FIG. 50B) is executed, it is performed (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of FIG. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interruption process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 399, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) of the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, a normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol changing process (S106) is performed. A gate passing process is performed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, respectively. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and, on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol changing process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are stored.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is obtained (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the obtained special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is 0 by the processing of S209 (S209: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command is set by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the processing shifts to S213.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S214 that the fluctuating time has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Will be More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be jackpot A or jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on. In the case of the jackpot B, the red LED is turned on, and when it is off, the green LED is turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening a special winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). Note that the opening scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. That is, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening (first opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). The second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set to be opened in a pattern (see FIG. 16) according to the type of big hit in the 12th round. When the process of S218 ends, a notification counter corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S219), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is off (S216: No),
It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203r during time saving is 1 or more (S220). If it is determined that the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S220: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time-saving medium-time counter 203r is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time-saving medium time counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S221), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol change start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol departure” is performed (determination of success or failure), and the first This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of a variable effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, the respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are obtained (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302). If it is on (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the value for the high probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained from the first random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random number values defined in the first per-random number table 202a. As described above, as the random number value of the special symbol which is a big hit, ten “0 to 9” are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these hits. If so, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 share the judgment value of the jackpot, but depending on whether the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the lottery of the special symbol 2 A different random value may be used. With such a configuration, the random number value determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, so that the bias of the big hit can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the determination value of the big hit is set to the same number in the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2, but the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 And the number of judgment values to be a big hit may be changed. With this configuration, the probability of the jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to give expectations to the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S302 that the probability change flag 203g is not on (that is, it is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low-probability game state), Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value of the special symbol jackpot, one of "200" is set. When the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of the special symbol, the special symbol jackpot is obtained. Is determined. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained in the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (S305: Yes) The display mode at the time of the big hit indicating the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots) are compared. A, jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is.

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S308). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S308, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third time until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol is set. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Note that, as described above, the relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in the variation pattern selection table 20d.

  The variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, various types of “variation” for “out (for a long time)”, “off (for a short time)”, “out of normal reach”, Various types of "super-reach" and "special reach" are specified. In addition, various types of variation of “common normal reach”, various types of “common super reach”, and various types of “common special reach” are defined as variation patterns of jackpot A and jackpot B, and various “special reach” variations of jackpot B are defined. Various types of “shared normal reach”, various types of “common super reach”, and various types of “shared special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns of the hit / miss common use.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S305 that the special symbol has been removed (S305: No), a display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, or completely out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the certain state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than departure before and after is set, and "98" , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete departure is set, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than departure is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To determine.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 34). Sent. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing in S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and determines whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters when a winning start occurs, and executing a holding process of the values.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is held) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is 4 If not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing are updated. Then, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first of the available reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in each processing of S407 to S412, the same processing as each processing of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. The processing of S407 to S412 is different from the processing of S401 to S406 only in that the processing of retaining the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 640 is executed. Since they are the same, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the processes of S407 to S412 are completed, a pre-read process is executed (S413), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the prefetch processing (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the prefetch processing (S413). This look-ahead process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 28).

  In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501), and any one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is determined. If there is no new winning (S501: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new prize at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state at the start of the fluctuation is the special symbol change state. It is determined (S502), if the special symbol is in the probable change state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

  In the processing of S502, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the special symbol change state (S502: No), a lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for low probability (S504), and the processing is S505. Move to. In the process of S505, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the results of the jackpot determination, are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the control for opening / closing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display is held on the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S608). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S608: Yes), the current symbol is the special symbol jackpot. It is determined whether it is in the middle (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be hard to win. This is to make it easier for the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state). In other words, if it is easy to hit a normal symbol, a right-hit ball will easily enter the second entrance 640, so that the ball goes to the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. And it becomes difficult for the ball to reach. Therefore, during the special gaming state (during the big hit state), the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is prevented from increasing, and the ball is configured to easily reach the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. I have.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the second random number table 202c for a high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C).

  In the processing of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S608: No), the processing shifts to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 is set to the low value. Based on the probability random second hit random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and when it is determined that the lottery result is the hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S614). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S614: Yes), the special symbol is now being hit. It is determined whether or not it is (S615). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, when hitting the normal symbol, like the low probability state of the normal symbol, The number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not in the special jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with 640 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the processing of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time reduction state (S614: No), the processing shifts to S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set. At 0.2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to one (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the processing of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S619). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is performed. Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the second entrance 640 is very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602). S622). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or S621 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed on the second symbol display device). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is a hit of the ordinary symbol. A determination is made (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and the process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S624: No), the processing of S625 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 25), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the process is to acquire and hold the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times of change display holding M in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is stored in the free reserved area (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the first area (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power of the main control device 110 is turned on. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not, the RAM 203 is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also shifts to S912 in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S912 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S911, S911).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Similarly, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S911, S912) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the closing of the storage valve 607a is set (S913), and the process proceeds to S914.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S904: Yes), S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S914. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S914, a command (state command) for notifying the gaming state at the time of power return to the sound lamp control device 113 is output (S914). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in a probable change state, whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state, the number of times of ordinary symbol saving, and the like. A state command is generated in accordance with the value of the counter 203r during time reduction and the state of the probability change flag 203g, and is output to the sound lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 can match the recognition of the game state. Therefore, despite the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-handed navigator (see FIG. 5A) is displayed, and conversely, the player is in spite of the special symbol change state. Can be prevented (suppressed) from displaying a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) when right-handed. That is, the game state and the effect to be executed can be matched.

  When the process of S914 is completed, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S915). Next, an interrupt is permitted (S916), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 25), and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 is corresponded to the number of acquired balls. Send a prize ball command. In addition, a command for the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 26) and the start winning process (see FIG. 28) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). Big hit control for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a of the second variable winning device 650. The processing is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for each round of the jackpot state in accordance with the opening scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol changing process (see FIG. 26). And set the closure. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30). The opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the ordinary symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) ends, the first symbol display device 37 displays The currently executed variation display is terminated, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27). Display (lit display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. I do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 30). Lights up).

  Next, based on the stored winning detection information, a winning information command setting process for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the winning information is executed (S1008). Based on the winning information command set by the winning information command setting process (S1008), the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a failure in the storage valve 607a. Further, it is also determined whether or not the player is playing an irregular game (left-handed during the big hit state, left-handed in the special symbol surely changed state, and the like).

  When the processing of S1008 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252, the power failure signal SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1010: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). More specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1009, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 32 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the information of the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is not initialized in the initialization process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). The jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects corresponding to the jackpot and a first specific prize are performed. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when a special symbol big hit is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102).

  The opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1102 is completed, next, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 is set to be opened (S1103), and the process ends. As described above, by opening the storage valve 607a, the sphere that has entered the storage device 600 can flow down the guiding flow path 607, and therefore, a general entrance port with a large number of prize balls to be paid out (15). The ball can enter the ball 602 (see FIG. 9B).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the storage device 600, the first variable prize device 65, and the second variable prize device 650 are provided on a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, during the special game state, the target is shot at the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a in order to obtain a prize ball. A part of the hit ball enters the storage device 600. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to the prize ball based on the ball entering the first specific prize port 65a or the second specific prize port 650a, the general prize provided in the storage device 600. A prize ball based on the ball entering the mouth (high value winning port) 602 can be obtained by the player. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained from the start of the jackpot to the end thereof can be increased, so that the player can play the game with more pleasure of becoming the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a special symbol positive change state or a normal symbol time reduction state is given after the end of the big hit. As described above, in these states, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, so that the player attempts to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by right-handing. (We are going to receive lottery of special symbol 2). Thereby, in many cases, the ball can be caused to flow into the storage device 600 before the next big hit is started. Then, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state, so that the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a until the next big hit. Therefore, when the next big hit occurs and the storage valve 607a is opened, the stored balls flow down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. That is, the player can acquire a large number (15) of prize balls immediately after the start of the jackpot. Therefore, in a situation where the jackpot has been won but the possession ball has run out, it is possible to secure a possession ball for performing the jackpot game without newly requesting the lending of the ball.

  In the process of S1101, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1104, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1104: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1104 that a special symbol is being hit (S1104: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the big hit operation for setting the operation of the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, the flow path switching valve 650d, and the like. The setting process is executed (S1105), and this process ends.

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process (S1105) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the jackpot operation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the newly started is the twelfth round of the jackpot (S1201). If it is determined (S1201: No), then the opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the round is the twelfth round (S1201: Yes), the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a according to the jackpot type is read (S1203). Thus, in the case of the big hit A, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16A is executed, and in the case of the big hit B, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16B is controlled. Next, an opening operation of the flow path solenoid 611 is set (S1202). That is, it is set so that the guide channel 652 is closed 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round. Next, the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a read by the processing of S1203 is set (S1205), and the processing shifts to S1206.

  In the processing of S1206 executed after the processing of S1202 or S1205 is completed, a round number command indicating a newly started round is set (S1206), and this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio lamp in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  In this manner, each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power-off occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such defects can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the process of S1105, if it is determined that the timing is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined that the timing is the operation timing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path solenoid 611. It is determined (S1107). If it is determined in the processing of S1107 that it is the operation timing (S1107: Yes), the corresponding solenoid is set to ON (S1108).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1108). More specifically, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed based on the end of the last 15 rounds of the jackpot, and the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. When the standby time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) for discharging the ball that has flowed into the inside has elapsed, it is determined that the ending effect start timing is reached. If it is determined by the processing of S1108 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the ending processing is executed (S1109), and this processing ends.

  Here, the ending process (S1110) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S1110). In the ending process (S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set (S1301). The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects an ending effect display mode based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1301 ends, the storage valve 607a set to the open state at the start of the jackpot is set to the closed state (S1302). As described above, the closed state of the storage valve 607a continues until the next big hit. Thus, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), even if the ball flows into the storage device 600, the ball is blocked by the storage valve 607a, so that the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is reached. The ball cannot flow down. In other words, the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 having a small number of winning balls, so that the merit of entering the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state (normal game state), an irregular game method of increasing the number of balls by paying out the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 by always aiming at the storage device 600 is fundamentally adopted. And in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), a lottery of a special symbol can be performed to expect a big hit to be played.

  As described above, the storage device 600 is configured so that one out of every three right-hit balls hits. Then, when the ball enters the general winning opening (small winning opening) 601, the number of award balls to be paid out is 3 balls. In other words, even if right-handed is executed in the normal state, it is difficult to perform a lottery of a special symbol, and it is not possible to increase the number of balls by paying out based on the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. This eliminates the merit of right-handing in the normal state, and makes it possible for the player to play a game with the aim of achieving a big win by lottery of special symbols.

  Also, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), a part of the right-handed ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, so that the special symbol is in a stable state or a normal symbol. (That is, in a state where the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 provided on the right side path of the game board 13 is easily opened), the ball holding is further improved by right-handing. Can be done. Therefore, despite the fact that the special symbol changed state and the normal symbol became shorter, and the player shifted to an advantageous state, the number of possessed balls decreased rapidly, and it was an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent (suppress) that the player does not feel real. Therefore, the game can be continued without reducing the number of holding balls in the special symbol change state or the normal symbol time saving state.

  Note that the number of prize balls for entering the general prize port (small value prize port) 601 may be reduced (for example, one prize ball may be used). This makes it possible to more reliably prevent the payout from becoming too large and the number of possessed balls from being too large in the special symbol change state or the normal symbol time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall. Further, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the ordinary symbol (that is, a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640), the merit of right-handing can be further reduced.

  When the processing of S1302 ends, it is next determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203h is on (S1303). Since it means that the ball has been entered, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S1304). Thereby, after the end of the big hit, it shifts to the specially changed state of the special symbol. After the processing of S1304, the probable change setting flag 203h is set to off (S1305), a state command including information indicating that the probable change state of the special symbol is set is set (S1306), and the present processing ends. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1303 that the probability change setting flag 203h is OFF (S1303: No), it means that the ball did not enter the probability change entrance 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot. Then, in order to set the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol 100 times after the end of the jackpot, the value of the time reduction counter 203r is set to 100 (S1307). Then, a state command including information indicating that the time saving state has been set is set (S1308), and the process ends. The status command set in the processing of S1306 or S1308 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the state command is received by the sound ramp control device 113, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, an effect can be appropriately executed according to the game state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit game, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203h is on. If it is on, the probable change flag 203g is set on. In other words, the timing at which the probability change flag 203g is turned on can be matched regardless of the timing at which the ball enters the probability variation entrance opening 654. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probable change game state until the big hit game ends. Furthermore, if a ball can be made to enter the certainty changing ball entrance 654 during the special game state (during the big hit state), a special symbol certain change state is given after the big hit is completed. (During the state), it is possible to take an interest in whether or not the ball enters the certain-variable entrance port 654.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1109, if it is determined that the timing is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then, the ball enters (wins) into the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, and the probability changes. A prize-winning process is performed to monitor the entry (winning) of a ball into the entrance 654 (S1111). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning process (S1111).

  In the winning process (S1111), First, It is determined whether or not it is a period in which a round game is set (round valid period) (S1401). That is, First specific winning opening 65a, Or, after the opening of the second specific winning opening 650a is set, It is determined whether or not the interval period (3 seconds) is a period until the end. If it is determined that it is outside the round validity period (S1401: No), This processing ends. on the other hand, If it is determined that it is within the round validity period (S1401: Yes), First specific winning opening 65a, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered one of the second specific winning openings 650a (S1402). In the processing of S1402, Specific winning opening 65a, Alternatively, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: Yes), The winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1403). The process moves to S1404. on the other hand, First specific winning opening 65a, If it is determined that the ball has not entered any of the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: No), Skip the processing of S1403, The process moves to S1404.

  In the processing of S1404, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the closing of the winning port set to the open state among the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a. Is set (S1406). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it is determined that the ball for discharging the ball remaining inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in the elapse time. it can.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1404, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), the round time (30 in the present embodiment) which is a period until each round of the jackpot ends. Second) has elapsed (S1405). If it is determined in step S1405 that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1406. On the other hand, in the process of S1405, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  In the processing of S1408, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408: Yes), The value of the operation counter 203k is updated by subtracting 1 (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the certain-variable-entrance ball opening 654 (whether or not the ball has passed a certain-variable switch (not shown)) (S1410). ). If it is determined that the ball has passed the probability change switch (S1410: Yes), the value of the probability change passage counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1411), the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412), and The process shifts to S1413. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, if it is determined that the ball has not passed the probability change switch (S1410: No), the processes of S1411 and S1412 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1413.

  In the processing of S1413 executed after the processing of S1410 or S1412, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is not 0 (S1413: No), the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1413, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413: Yes), the guide flow path 652 is closed by setting the flow path solenoid 611 to OFF (S1414), and the positive change is enabled. The flag 203o is set to ON (S1415), and the process ends. By setting the probable change valid flag 203o to ON by the processing of S1415, even after the flow path switching valve 650d is switched and the guide flow path 652 is closed, the ball remaining in the guide flow path 652 is switched to the probable change switch. , It is possible to control so that the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (that is, the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the big hit).

  In the processing of S1408, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability change valid flag 203o is on (S1416). If it is determined that the probability change valid flag 203o is not on (that is, it is off) (S1416: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probable change valid flag 203o is ON (S1416: Yes), the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the probable change valid timer 203p (S1417). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probable change valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present embodiment) (S1418). If the value is determined to be the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), The flag 203o is set to off (S1419). As a result, even if the passage of the probability change switch is detected, control is performed so as not to update the value of the probability change setting flag 203h. As described above, when the passage of the probability change switch is detected after the value of the probability change valid timer 203p reaches the upper limit value, it is highly likely that the detection is due to some kind of fraud. Therefore, by turning off the probable change enable flag 203o, the update of the probable change setting flag 203h is prohibited, thereby suppressing improper behavior.

  When the processing in S1419 ends, the value of the probability change valid timer 203p is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1420), and the processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1418, if it is determined that the value of the probable change valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value (less than the upper limit value) (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1410 described above.

  Thus, if the probability change valid timer 203p is not at the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability change state of the special symbol in consideration of the time of ball ejection. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time when it is determined that the passing of the probability change switch is valid, it is possible to prevent a ball from being illegally passed through the probability change switch and the special symbol's probability change state being given.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. When the prize-winning process (S1111) is executed, then, an abnormality process for detecting an abnormality that has occurred during the special game state (big hit state) is executed (S1112), and this process ends. Here, details of the abnormal processing (S1112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this abnormal processing (S1112).

  In the abnormal process (S1112), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is within the round validity period (S1501). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round validity period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the ball has passed the ball outlet switch provided in the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650. It is determined (S1502). If it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball discharge switch (S1502: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is updated by adding 1 to the value (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1504.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504). If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1504: No), this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball is being thrown, so 1 is added to the remaining ball timer 203n that measures the ball throwing period. And update (S1505). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (that is, whether three seconds have elapsed since the closing of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (3 seconds have not elapsed) (S1506: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1505, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of discharged balls (the total value of the positive variable passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203q) is determined. It is determined whether or not the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) matches (S1507).

  In the process of S1507, if it is determined that the number of discharged balls and the number of winnings match (S1507: Yes), the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of discharged balls and the number of winnings do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201 in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is set, and an output of an error signal is set to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from remaining illegally in the first variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of passing the balls through the probability change switch.

  In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1510). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203q, and the probability change counter 203i are reset to the initial values, respectively (S1511), and the process ends.

  Next, the winning information command setting process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The winning information command setting process (S1008) is a process for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the passing status of a ball to various winning ports (ball entrances) as described above.

  In the winning information command setting processing, first, the winning detection information stored in the switch reading processing (S101) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is read (S1601). Then, it is determined whether there is new winning detection information (whether any entrance has a new ball) (S1602), and if there is no new winning detecting information (S1603), This processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1602, when it is determined that new winning detection information is present (S1602: Yes), a winning opening (winning opening) that detects a ball (winning) according to the new winning detection information. Is set (S1603). The winning information command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes, and each winning bit or out port is associated with each bit of the 2 bytes. Then, the bit corresponding to the winning opening (ball entrance) that detects the ball entry (winning) is set to 1, and the bit corresponding to the winning opening (ball entrance) where the ball has not entered is set to 0. After being set, it is output as a winning information command. When the processing in S1603 ends, the stored winning detection information is cleared (S1604), and the processing ends.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether there is a problem in the intellectual storage device 600 and whether or not the player is playing an irregular game in accordance with the winning information command. If a failure or the like has occurred, a display error command corresponding to the type of the failure is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display error command is received by the display control device 114, an error is notified in the third symbol display device 81.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 41, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current start-up processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1816 (see FIG. 42) ) Are determined to be started during execution (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, upon receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S1813 in FIG. 42), audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1816. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1816 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1702: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off processing in S1816 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1703).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1704. On the other hand, this start-up process is started after a momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1516 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the processing is started by the user, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the process proceeds to S1708.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1702: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1816, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1704, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1706). By confirming the keyword of “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S1708, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when executing the power-off process in S1816 (see S1815 in FIG. 42). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1816 is executed, the process of S1708 in the state where the power-off flag is on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1816 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1709), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason that the process of step S1708 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of step S1708 proceeds from step S1704 to step S1706. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), the process skips S1709, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1710, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1710). Next, the probable change state flag 223f and the probable change state counter 223g are updated according to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S1711), interruption permission is set (S1712), and the process proceeds to the main processing. Transition. By updating the probable state flag 223f and the probable state counter 223g based on the state command, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, an effect can be appropriately executed according to the game state.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1709 is skipped is that when the process from S1704 to S1708 is performed via the process of S1706, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1704. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1801 was executed (S1801). If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1811 without performing the processes of S1802 to S1810. In the processing of S1801, whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly determined in S1802 to S1810, which is processing relating to display (effect), whereas editing is not necessary in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , S1811 and the variable display setting process in S1812 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1811 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1812 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1803 to S1812 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1802). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1804). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1805 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1805, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect, and responds when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

  Upon completion of the frame button input monitoring / production process, a lamp editing process is executed (S1808), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1809, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1809 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1811). The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S1812. In the process of S1812, a variable display setting process is executed (S1812). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1813). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1813 (S1813: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1815), and the power-off processing is executed (S1816). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1817), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1813 (S1813: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1814), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1814: No), the process returns to S1801, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1814: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination processing (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1811). This command determination process (S1811) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing for.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S1901). When the variation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1903). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 47) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906). Return to processing. The extracted stop type is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 47) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1907). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of times N1 of the variable display is held in the special symbol) or the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the main control device 110. The value of the number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol is suspended) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). In the process of S1908, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the updated special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set. After the end of the process in S1908, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the audio lamp control device 113 are processed by the processing of S1908. The value of the number counter 223c can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is detected when detecting a winning start or a special symbol lottery. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1908 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. Is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1907, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S1907: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1909). Then, when the status command is received (S1909: Yes), the probable change status flag 203f and the time saving status counter 203g are updated according to the gaming status notified by the status command (S1910), and the process ends. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1909 that no status command has been received (S1909: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1911). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball was a normal one based on the winning information command, and an error is reported if there is a possibility of malfunction or impropriety. An error notification process is performed (S1912), and the process ends.

  on the other hand. In the process of S1911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), then it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S1913), and if the opening command has been received (S1913). (S1913: Yes), the big hit flag 223h is set to ON, and a counter value (1000) corresponding to one second is set to the value of the allowable time counter 223i (S1914). Then, a display opening command is set (S1915), and the process ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When receiving the opening command for display, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1913 that the opening command has not been received (S1913: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1916). When it is determined that the ending command has been received by the processing of S1916 (S1916: Yes), the big hit flag 223h is set to OFF, and the counter value (1000) corresponding to 1 second to the value of the allowable time counter 223i is set. Is set (S1917), an ending command for display is set (S1918), and the process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the ending command for display, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the process of S1916 (S1911: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1919). ), And return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, a processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the error notification process (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. As described above, this error notification process is a process for notifying an error when there is a possibility of malfunction or fraud. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the error notification processing (S1912).

  In the error notification process (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 223h is on (S1931). If it is on (S1931: Yes), the winning information notified by the received winning information command is received. It is determined whether or not winning information to the first entrance 64 is included (S1932). Then, when it is determined that the winning information to the first entrance 64 is included (S1932: Yes), the player makes a left-handed shot despite the big hit, and as a result, the first entrance 64 Means that the ball has entered. In other words, despite the special game state (big hit state), the player is performing a game method (how to hit) in which the ball is unlikely to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. Means that the person is losing. Therefore, in order to cause the player to obtain a prize ball in the special game state (big hit state), a display error command corresponding to the left strike warning image (see FIG. 7A) is set (S1933), and the processing is performed. Is shifted to S1934.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. The display control device 114 displays the left strike warning image (FIG. 7A) on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display back image change command. The left-hitting warning image (FIG. 7A) can prompt a player who has left-handed in the special game state (big hit state) to perform right-handing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing, and to more reliably acquire the prize ball.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1932 that the winning information command does not include the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the first entrance 64 (S1932: No), the processing of S1933 is skipped and the processing is skipped. Is shifted to S1934.

  In the process of S1934, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S1934). If the counter value is 0 (S1934: Yes), a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during the big hit. If so, a hit time notification process for performing notification is executed (S1935), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S1934: No), the ball ejection period (1 second) after the storage valve 607a is set to the open state. Since it has not elapsed, the process of S1935 is skipped, and this process ends. That is, if the ball that has flowed (progressed) into the guiding flow path 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a is opened enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 during the ball ejection period, a problem occurs. Is prevented from being determined.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1931 that the big hit flag 223h is not on (is off) (S1931: No), it is determined whether the value of the allowable time counter 233i is 0 (S1936). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S1936: Yes), it is notified when a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a during normal times (any of the special symbol change state, the normal symbol time saving state, and the normal state). (S1937), and terminates the present process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S1936: No), the ball is thrown after the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state based on the end of the big hit. Since this means that the period (1 second) has not elapsed, the process of S1937 is skipped, and this process ends. That is, if the ball that has flowed (progressed) into the guiding flow path 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a is closed enters the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 during the ball ejection period, a problem occurs. Is prevented from being determined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the hit time notification process (S1935) for notifying when a failure occurs in the storage valve 607a during a big hit will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the hit time notification processing (S1935).

  In the hit time notification processing (S1935), first, the winning information command determined to be received in the processing of S1911 in the command determination processing (see FIG. 43) is added to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is determined whether or not the corresponding winning information is included (S1941). If the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1941: Yes), even during the jackpot that the storage valve 607a should be set to the open state. Regardless, it means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided downstream of the guiding flow path 606. That is, the storage valve 607a cannot be opened due to a failure of the storage valve 607a, and the state in which the sphere is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a can be continued. There is. Therefore, in this case, a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1942), and the process ends.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display error command, the display control device 114 generates a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a failure in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  Note that the ball that has flowed into the guiding flow path 606 may also enter the out port 603a disposed on the left side of the general winning opening 601 in the storage device 600, but may enter the out port 603a. The corresponding prize information is not a target for determining whether or not a failure has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because, among the balls flowing into the guiding flow path 606, a small percentage of the balls flow down to the out port 603a, most of the balls flow into the general winning port (small value winning port) 601 and the large hit. Because a large amount of balls flow into the storage device 600 during monitoring, it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a malfunction has occurred by monitoring the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Further, by determining only winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning port (small value winning port) 601, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining whether or not the ball has entered the out port 603 a. Thus, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the process of S1941, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entry to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1941: No), then the received winning information command includes It is determined whether or not winning information corresponding to the ball entry to the winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1943), and the winning corresponding to the ball entry to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is determined. If the information is included (S1943: Yes), it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the winning number counter 223j (S1944). Then, a display rear image change command is set in order to update the big hit image in accordance with the value of the updated winning number counter 233j (S1945).

  The display back image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. , To the display control device 114. The display control device 114 updates the display content of the winning number display area MA in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display back image change command. More specifically, after an image in which the number of times of ball entry (number of EXTRA BONUS) to the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 shown in FIG. The image shown in FIG. 6A corresponding to the number of subsequent ball entry is displayed. By displaying the number of hits to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the jackpot in the winning count display area MA, the number of hits to the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a in the jackpot is determined. In addition, the player can recognize the number of times the prize ball has been acquired. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation that the number of times of ball entry to the general winning opening (high winning opening) 602 will increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the present embodiment, when the ball entry information corresponding to the ball entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included, it is determined that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 604a. However, the display error command may be set even when the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the out exit 603a. This makes it possible to more quickly and reliably determine that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

  Next, referring to FIG. 46, a notification is made in the event that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 607a during normal times (any of the probable change state of the special symbol, the time reduction state of the normal symbol, and the normal state). The normal time notification process will be described. In the normal time notification process (S1937), first, it is determined whether or not the probable change state flag 223f is on (S1951). If it is determined that the probable change state flag 223f is not on (S1951), the present state is not the probable change state of the special symbol (S1951). This means that the special symbol is in a low probability state), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1952). In the processing of S1952, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 223g is 0 (S1952: No), it is determined that the present time is neither a special change state of the special symbol nor a time reduction state of the ordinary symbol (the normal state). means.

  In this case, in order to determine whether or not the player has made a right strike and whether or not the operation of the storage valve 607a has failed, first, the received prize information command is added to the general prize port (high value). It is determined whether or not winning information corresponding to the ball entry to the winning opening 602 is included (S1953). Then, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entry to the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 is included (S1953: Yes), the ball is not in the special gaming state (big hit state). Flows downstream from the position to be closed by the storage valve 607a. That is, there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, or that the player has thrown a ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by an unauthorized method. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1954), and the process ends.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display error command, the display control device 114 generates a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a failure in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  In the state in which the storage valve 607a is left open due to a problem, the ball that has flowed into the guiding flow path 607 is sent out from the general prize port (high value prize port) 602 to the right and left out ports 603b. , 603c, there is a possibility of entering the ball, but the prize information corresponding to the ball entry into the out ports 603b, 603c is not determined as to whether or not a failure has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because, of the balls that have flowed into the guiding flow path 607, a small percentage of the balls flow down to the out ports 603b and 603c, and most of the balls flow into the general winning port (high value winning port) 602. By monitoring the general winning opening (high winning opening) 602, it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a problem has occurred. Further, by determining only winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning port (high value winning port) 602, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining whether or not the ball has entered the out ports 603b and 603c. As a result, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Further, in the processing of S1953, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entry to the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 is not included in the winning information command (S1953: No), then the general winning is performed. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the ball entry to the mouth (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955). If it is determined that the winning information command is not included, the process ends as it is. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955: Yes), in the normal state (special change state of the special symbol, This means that the player is right-handed despite the normal symbol time reduction state and the normal state. In other words, it means that the player is playing a game by a game method in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 and the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is small. Therefore, in this case, the game is displayed by displaying a right strike warning image (see FIG. 5B) that prompts the player to play the game by aiming at the first entrance 64 by left strike. It is possible to prevent a person from losing and to receive a lottery of the special symbol 1.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1951 that the probable change state flag 223f is ON (S1951: Yes), or if it is determined in the processing of S1952 that the value of the time reduction state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1952: Yes), It is determined whether or not the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to a ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (S1957). Then, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1957: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1957 that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1957: Yes), it is not in the special gaming state (big hit state). Nevertheless, this means that the sphere is flowing downstream of the storage valve 607a. In other words, there is a possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed or the player illegally enters the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in a state where the storage valve 607a is closed. high. Therefore, in this case, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1958), and the process ends.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display error command, the display control device 114 generates a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a failure in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the ball entry information corresponding to the ball entry to the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 is included, it is determined that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 604a. However, the display error command may be set even when the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to the ball entering the out ports 603b and 603c. This makes it possible to more quickly and reliably determine that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1812). The variable display setting process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2001). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2001: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S2006. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the change start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then, in the process of S1903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43), the change pattern is set. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2004). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2005). In the process of S2005, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2006.

  In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S2006). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2006: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that steps S2007 to S2013 are performed. The processing skips the steps up to and proceeds to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2007). The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2008), and the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is used as it is for the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. It is set as a stop type (S2008). Next, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2009). The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  When the process of S2009 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter 223g is greater than 0 (S2010: No). No), the process proceeds to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 203g is larger than 0 (S2010: Yes), first, the value of the time reduction state counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S2011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 203g after the subtraction is 0 (S2012). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S2012), the normal symbol time saving state is changed from the normal symbol normal time state (Probability state), a back image change command for switching to the back image corresponding to the normal state is set (S2013), and the process proceeds to S2014.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2012, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 203g is not 0 (S2012: No), it means that the time reduction state of the normal symbol is continued, and the back corresponding to the time reduction state of the normal symbol is determined. There is no need to change from the image. Therefore, in this case, the process of S2013 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2014.

  Note that the back image displayed during the time saving state is, specifically, a back image on which a right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5A) is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the big hit is completed, the pachinko machine 10 is switched to the back type in which the right-hand navigation is displayed regardless of the big hit type. Then, when the time saving state of the ordinary symbol ends, the display is switched to the normal state rear image in which the right-handed navigation is not displayed. If the special symbol is in the probable change state after the end of the jackpot, the special symbol probable change state continues until the next jackpot is reached, so that the rear view type in which the right-handed navigation is displayed is not changed.

  In the process of S2014, it is determined whether the value of the allowable time counter 223i is greater than 0 (S2014). If the value is determined to be greater than 0 (S2014: Yes), the value of the allowable time counter 223i is set to 1 The value is subtracted and updated (S2015), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S2014: No), the process of S2015 is skipped, and the process ends. By the processing of S2014 and S2015, the value of the allowable time counter 223i can be updated periodically.

  In the present embodiment, the back type set for the probable change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol are common, but different back types may be displayed. Thereby, various effects can be realized. Further, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display the remaining time-saving period according to the value of the time-saving state counter 203g. This allows the player to easily recognize the remaining time reduction period.

  In the present embodiment, the allowable time counter 223h is updated in the variable display setting process (S1812), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the update may be performed in a process (sound editing / output process, liquid crystal effect execution management process, etc.) executed every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 42). Thereby, the permissible time counter 223h can be updated periodically.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting the execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 of the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S2101), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2101) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2201). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2202). Accordingly, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2202, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing in S2202, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data, which have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a, are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2203). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2204), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S2101 in FIG. 48). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power-up initialization process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) (S2205), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S2201) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 49, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1902. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2203 to S2205 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2201 transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2201. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S2202 and S2202, the processing of S2203 to S2205 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2203 to S2205 without performing the processes of S2201 and S2202. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2102). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2103). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2103, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2104). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller responds to this transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2104, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2105). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 59A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 59A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50 (b)), the simple command determination processing (FIG. 50 (b) (see S2408) and simple display setting processing (see S2409 in FIG. 50 (b)).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. Since the player has started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued. If the main controller 110 has received the display variation pattern command via the audio lamp controller 113, that is, if the display variation pattern command has been received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and the simple variation is performed. You can make a production. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S2105, interruption permission is set (S2106), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S2106, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2301), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 50B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S2402) is executed to display on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S2403) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2402), the contents of the command from the sound ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2403), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2402) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S2404). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2403) or the simple display setting process (S2409). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2406). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2404), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S2405) are used. 24, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As the counter updated by the process of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out reach, complete) The stop type table corresponding to (miss, chance) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2401 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2401: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2408) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2409) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2404.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55, details of the above-described command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 51, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2503).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2504). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2504: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2505), and returns to the process of S2501.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2505) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2601).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2601, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2601 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2601 is turned on, and other variation table data is set. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2603). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2603, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2604), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2605). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2606), the variation pattern command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2605, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601 is updated while updating the pointer 233f. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S2602. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2604, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2504, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2506). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2507), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2507) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, complete out, and chance) indicated by the stop type command for display. Is determined (S2701), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S2702).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. Is set (S2703), and this process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2702. In the above-described task processing (S2404), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2702 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S2703, and the specification is performed. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the main control device 110 always determines the start of the change at a distance of several seconds or more, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of step S2701, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S2702.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present embodiment, in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete departure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Referring back to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the process of S2506, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2506: No), then it is determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2508), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S2508: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2509) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S2801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2803). S2804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2805), the opening command processing is completed, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2804, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801 is updated. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. As will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the newly started round number is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting time is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a possibility that time will be generated and the player will feel uneasy as to whether or not the operation has stopped, or give the player a sense of discomfort.

  Also, since the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when all of the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (15 rounds) are completed, If the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, a long waiting time is required between the end of the round effect and the start of the ending effect. This may cause the player to feel uneasy as to whether or not the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that time, and until the change display of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 ends. , The transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is controlled to end. Thus, when the opening effect is completed on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and all of the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds). ) When the game is finished, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not have anxiety as to whether or not the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Referring back to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2508, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2510). If there is a round number command for use (S2510: Yes), a round number command process is executed (S2511), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the round number command processing (S2511) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2905), the round number command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2510, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2512), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S2512: Yes), the ending command processing is executed (S2513), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the ending command processing (S2513) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3003). S3004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3006), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2512, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2514). If there is a change command (S2514: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S2515), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2515) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3603) of the change of the rear image accompanying the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). . Then, among the rear image determination flags provided for each of the rear image types, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and the rear image corresponding to the other rear image type is turned on. The discrimination flag is set to off (S3102), the back image change command processing ends, and the flow returns to the command judgment processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S3101 is turned on, the back image type after the change is identified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S3102. . When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task process, if it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S3102 is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2514, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2516). If it is (S2516: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2517), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3202). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S3201, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S3202 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2516 that there is no error command (S2516: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2518), and the processing returns to S2501.

  In the processing of S2501 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S2502 to S2518 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S2501 to S2518 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S2501 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. The extracted and executed variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 52 (b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, are executed. A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2601. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on which are set and required in this case are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the fluctuation image area at power-on 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S2602, processing of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S2403), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S3302 to S3304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S3302), and then S3303 to S3304. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3304).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3401).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Various parameters are determined.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3304) or in the process of S3303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3303: No), the process proceeds to S3305.

  In S3305, a pointer update process is performed (S3305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3501). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3501, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S3502). As a result, if it is End information (S3502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3503: Yes), the display data table buffer is determined. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3505), and the present processing is terminated and the display is completed. Return to the setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the rendering contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S3506). ), End this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Thus, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the address immediately before the End information is described. Since the drawing content is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3502: No), the process ends and returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3306 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S3309).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3309: Yes), the effect of the confirmed display has not yet been performed, and the effect of the confirmed display has been performed. The setting is made (S3310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3313). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3314), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3315), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2404), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3309, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S3309: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S3316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3316: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and the demonstration display data table is stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S3317), and then write Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3318). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3321), and the process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, if the display variation pattern command or the opening command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S3316: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended. Therefore, the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, the power-on fluctuation image corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that defines display in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2405), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S3602), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3603), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3602).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S3701). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S3701: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3702). In the process of S3702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3702 (S3702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3702: Yes), the process moves to S3703. Also, as a result of the process of S3701, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3701: No), the process proceeds to S3703.

  In the processing of S3703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3703). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3703, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S2408 in FIG. 50 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S2409 in FIG. 50 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are performed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 60) (see S3601: No in FIG. 59A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3603), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3603).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3305) of the previously executed display setting process (S2403). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S3801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3802). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S3802: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. , The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3804), and the flow shifts to the processing of S3805.

  Also, in the process of S3802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3802: No), the process of S3803 and S3804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3805. In the process of S3805, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3805), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been performed (S3805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3806).

  In the process of S3806, after setting a transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3806 (S3806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to S3807. Also, as a result of the processing in S3805, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing has been completed (S3805: No), the processing moves to S3807.

  In the processing of S3807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3807). If the transfer start flag is on (S3807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S3808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various types of information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S3803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S3813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3807: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S3809). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3809: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3810), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image indicated by the back image determination flag, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. The start address is obtained (S3812), and the flow shifts to the process of S3813.

  In the processing of S3813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813). The determination in the process of S3813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3813 (S3813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3813, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3814). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S3814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3815), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, details of the above-described drawing processing (S2406), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2404) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information The drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405) (S3901). That is, in the process of S3901, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2404). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image rendered on one frame buffer is developed, so that the rendering process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 50B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, two types of prize ports (the first specific prize port 65a and the second specific prize port 650a) are set as the prize ports opened in the special game state (big hit state). ), So that either winning opening is opened according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each of these two types of winning ports is configured as a winning port in which a large amount (15) of winning balls are paid out when a ball enters. Further, the two types of winning ports (first specific winning port 65a and second specific winning port 650a) are both provided on the right path (flow path) of the game board 13. Thereby, the ball can be made to enter even if any winning opening is opened only by launching the ball to the right side of the game board 13 during the special game state (big hit state). Therefore, the number of prize balls paid out in the special game state (big hit state) can be made hard to be influenced by the skill of the player, so that the player can enjoy the game with confidence even if he is a beginner.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, two types of winning ports (a first specific winning port 65a and a second specific winning port 650a) are provided on a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. A storage device 600 provided with a plurality of winning ports on the upstream side is provided. This storage device 600 is configured such that when the player makes a right-handed hit, a part of the hit ball is allowed to flow into the inside thereof, and the hit ball is transferred to a different winning opening. A plurality of flow paths for flowing down are provided. Specifically, the number of award balls is compared with the guide channel 606 for letting the ball flow down to a general winning port (small value winning port) 601 having a relatively small number of award balls (three award balls). A guiding flow path 607 for letting a ball flow down to a general winning port (a large value winning port) 602 having many targets (15 prize balls) is provided. The number of award balls that can be obtained can be made different depending on the type of the guiding flow path that flows down. Therefore, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the flow path of the flow path where the ball flows down to the player. The type can be observed interestingly.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the storage that can close the guiding flow path 607 for letting the ball flow down to the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 having a relatively large number of prize balls (the number of prize balls is 15). A valve 607a is provided in the guide channel 607. The storage valve 607a is set to an open state during a special game state (during a big hit state), and is set to a closed state during other game states. In addition, the respective guiding channels are arranged such that the game balls flowing into the inside of the storage device 600 are basically easier to flow into the guiding channel 607 than the guiding channel 606 (FIG. 9 ( b)). Therefore, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to being able to obtain a prize ball by allowing the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, it is provided downstream of the guiding flow path 607. A prize ball can be obtained by allowing the ball to enter the general prize port (high value prize port) 602 that has been set. The storage device 600 is provided on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, and the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, This is because the ball can enter both the storage device 600 and the storage device 600. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the merit of the player due to the big hit can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with more pleasure to be a big hit, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a win is made, and if the lottery result is a winning lottery result, a specific winning opening is opened and the specific winning opening is opened. There is one that gives a large amount of prize balls based on the entry of a ball (for example, JP-A-2001-129177). In this conventional gaming machine, a plurality of prize holes are provided in addition to the specific prize hole, and a specific prize hole is provided by adjoining the specific prize hole with another prize hole. There is a configuration in which a ball hit and aimed can enter both a specific winning opening and another winning opening. Here, as one of the triggers when a specific number of balls enter the specific winning opening, it is common to control so that the specific winning opening is closed. The number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player per hit increases as the ball enters another winning port before the number of prize balls reaches the specific number. Therefore, by placing a specific winning opening adjacent to another winning opening, the number of prize balls per hit can be increased, and the player's expectation of hitting can be further improved.

  However, in conventional gaming machines, even in a state other than winning, an irregular gaming method of acquiring a prize ball by hitting a ball aiming at another prize port adjacent to a specific prize port may be performed. Was.

  On the other hand, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the guide valve 607 is closed by the storage valve 607a. In this state, one ball can be stored in the space defined by the upper part of the storage valve 607a and the upstream part of the guide flow path 607. Therefore, the storage device 600 is first closed after the storage valve 607a is closed. The ball that has flowed into the inside is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. When the ball flows into the storage device 600 in a state where the ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, the ball flows into the guiding flow path 602 by colliding with the stored ball and changing the flowing direction. (See FIG. 9B). Therefore, even if the ball enters the storage device 600 in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with few prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the merit of making the ball enter the storage device 600. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, by constantly aiming at the storage device 600, the irregular game method of increasing the number of balls by paying out only the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 is not fundamentally established. In a state other than the gaming state (big hit state), a game can be played in the expectation of a big hit by performing a special symbol lottery.

  The storage device 600 is configured such that one out of every three right-hit balls hits. Then, when the ball enters the general winning opening (small winning opening) 601, the number of award balls to be paid out is 3 balls. That is, even if a right-handed game is performed in a game state other than the special game state (big hit state), it is difficult to perform a lottery of a special symbol, and the payout based on the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Nor can you increase the sphere. This eliminates the merit of right-handing in the normal state, and makes it possible for the player to play a game with the aim of achieving a big win by lottery of special symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the guiding flow path 606 enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, and the ball flowing down the guiding flow path 607 enters the general entrance opening 602. , But is not limited to this. For example, on the downstream side of each guide flow path, a known clune means provided with a plurality of winning ports is provided, and different payout balls are paid out according to the winning ports to enter. Is also good. As a result, even if it flows down the guiding flow path 606, many prize balls can be obtained by entering the prize port having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, the player can be watched with interest until the ball that has entered the storage device 600 enters any of the winning ports. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more enjoyed.

  In the present embodiment, the guide valve 607 is closed by the storage valve 607a, so that the sphere can be stored on the way of the guide flow path 607. The sphere may be stored on the way of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the guide flow path 607, and magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than during the special game state (during the big hit state). Thus, the sphere that first flows into the guiding flow path 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the sphere can be stopped from flowing down (the sphere can be stored at the position of the electromagnet). With this configuration, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact. In this case, the width of the guide channel 607 is increased (for example, in FIG. 8, the branch member 604 and the storage valve 607a are omitted), and the guide channel 605 of the guide channel 607 is removed. An electromagnet may be embedded only in a portion directly below the electromagnet, and a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 may be provided immediately below the portion in which the electromagnet is embedded. Furthermore, if there is a ball that has been attracted by the electromagnet and has stopped flowing down, the stopped ball and other spheres come into contact with the electromagnet portion and the flowing direction is changed, so that the electromagnet is not embedded. The portion may flow down and flow down in a direction different from the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Then, a general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 may be provided below a portion of the induction flow path 607 where the electromagnet is not embedded. Thereby, since the branching member 604 can be eliminated, the number of components of the storage device 600 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one ball is stored above the storage valve 607a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that two or more balls can be stored. Further, when storing a plurality of spheres, the spheres may be stored vertically or may be arranged side by side.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the sphere can be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be provided at the upper end portion of the guide flow path 607 so that when the storage valve 607a is closed, the sphere cannot flow into the guide flow path 607. With the configuration in which the ball is not stored, the ball can be discharged without remaining in the storage device 600 even if the ball is hit right in a state other than the special game state (big hit state).

  In particular, in the first embodiment, the second entrance 640 is easily opened in the high probability state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot or in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Further, in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the start winning to the second entrance 640), the game is compared with the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the starting winning to the first entrance 64). Jackpot B, which is advantageous to the elderly. Therefore, when the jackpot ends, the player launches a ball in an attempt to make the ball enter the second entrance 640 by right-handing. Therefore, for example, when the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol ends, the ball is stored in the storage device 600 with a high probability. This may cause the player to feel that the ball has been damaged. On the other hand, by providing the storage valve 607a at the upper end of the guide channel 607 and not storing the ball in the storage device 600, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball has been completely used up. . Therefore, the satisfaction can be given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 and 602 and the out openings 603a to 603c are provided inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this structure. For example, the second winning opening 640 may be provided at a position where the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is provided. That is, in the first embodiment, the second entrance 640 provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 is moved to the inside of the storage device 600. You may. Further, in this case, the opening condition of the storage valve 607a is set, for example, such that the storage valve 607a is opened when a special symbol lottery is executed 1000 times without a big hit after the big hit is completed. You may.

  Thereby, when the special symbol lottery is executed 1000 times after the jackpot has been completed, the ball can be made to enter the second entrance 640 by right-handing, so that the special symbol 2 Can be executed. In the first embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second entrance 640 is configured to be five, but in the case of the present modification, the number of payouts is three. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may become. That is, since the number of balls that can enter the storage device 600 when right-handed is one out of three balls, by performing right-handed after the storage valve 607a is opened, One ball per three balls can enter the second entrance 640. In other words, it is possible to receive the lottery of the special symbol 2 while maintaining the holding ball. With such a configuration, even if a lottery of a special symbol is repeated without a big hit (so-called a large spike occurs), a game is expected with the expectation that the storage valve 607a will be opened. Can be performed. Therefore, even if the period during which the jackpot does not become large is increased, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation for the game. In addition, by increasing the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second entrance 640 (for example, to 10), after the storage valve 607a is opened, the ball can be hit only by right-handing. You may comprise so that it may increase. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the merit in a case where the lottery of the special symbol is missed continuously 1000 times or more. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot, we hope that you will win again with a small number of special symbol lotteries, and if you continue to lose the special symbol lottery, continue to miss the special symbol lottery more than 1000 times continuously I can make you wish. Further, after the storage valve 607a is opened, the number of balls increases only by right-handing, so that the ball is increased by paying out for the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 by continuing to depart from the special symbol lottery. It can be hoped that the state of increasing will last for a long time. Therefore, depending on the number of special symbol lotteries, it is possible to make the player want to win a special symbol lottery or to continue to deviate from the special symbol lottery. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, the storage device 600 has a configuration in which only one storage valve 604a is provided, but a plurality of storage valves 604a may be provided. Specifically, the downstream side of the guide channel 606 may be configured to branch in two directions, and one of the channels may be provided with a storage valve that is opened only during the special game state (during the big hit state). That is, the same configuration as the guide channels 606 and 607 and the branch member 604 may be further provided downstream of the guide channel 606. A general winning port with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15) is provided downstream of the flow path on the side where the storage valve is provided, and a small number of prize balls is provided on a flow path without the storage valve (for example, 15). (3) General winning openings may be provided. With this configuration, a larger number of balls can be stored in the storage device 600, so that a special game state (big hit state) is started, and each storage valve is opened to store the balls. The balls that have been played can be simultaneously flowed down to a general winning port having a large number of prize balls (for example, 15). Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit can be increased. Also, instead of providing a plurality of storage valves inside the storage device 600, a plurality of storage devices 600 may be provided in a path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13. Also in the case of such a configuration, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit can be increased as in the case of providing a plurality of storage valves.

  In the present embodiment, a storage device 600 is provided downstream of the second entrance 640 in a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, and a first variable prize device is provided downstream of the storage device 600. Although the second variable prize device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable prize device 65, the arrangement is not limited to this arrangement and may be an arbitrary arrangement. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 may be arranged upstream of the second ball entrance 640. In the arrangement of the first embodiment, in the special game state (big hit state), a ball that has been launched to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650 is first set in the second entrance opening. There is a case where it is difficult to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a when the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. By arranging it on the upstream side, a prize ball can be more smoothly acquired during the special game state (during the big hit state).

  Further, by arranging the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a on the upstream side, and by arranging the first specific winning opening 650a on the upstream side with respect to the storage device 600, the storage device during the special game state (during the big hit state). It can be prevented (suppressed) that the ball enters only at 600 and the ball does not easily reach the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, each round in the special game state (during the big hit state) can be advanced more smoothly.

  In the present embodiment, the first entry port 64 and the second specific entry port 640 are provided as entry ports serving as a chance to win a special symbol lottery, but either one may be omitted. For example, the configuration may be such that the second entrance 640 is eliminated and the motorized accessory 640 is provided for the first entrance 64. Thereby, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the merit of launching the ball on the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 is further reduced. It is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) a natural game method.

  In the present embodiment, in the special game state (big hit state), when a ball flows into the storage device 600 (enters a ball), the ball enters the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 where many prize balls are paid out. In addition, the number of balls that have entered the general entrance 602 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one special game state (big hit state). May be configured. Thereby, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to obtaining a prize ball by making a prize to the first specific prize port 65a or the second specific prize port 650a, how much extra prize ball is obtained. Can be recognized by the player. Therefore, since it is possible to make the general prize port (high value prize port) 602 seem to be made to enter more balls, it is possible to have a target of the number of balls entered. The number of winnings in the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 does not necessarily need to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a dedicated display device may be separately provided. Thereby, in the third symbol display device 81, the effect during the big hit state can be executed in a wider display area.

  In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering (winning) the first specific winning opening 65a, and the ball entering (winning) the second specific winning opening 650a. The number of prize balls paid out based on the same number (15) as the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering (winning) into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is assumed. , But is not limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering (prize) into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is changed to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. May be configured to be smaller (for example, 10) than the number of prize balls paid out based on entering (prize). As a result, even if the ball only flows into the storage device 600 as a result of the ball being deviated in the special game state (big hit state), the disadvantage to the hole can be reduced.

  On the contrary, the number of award balls to be paid out based on the ball entering (general winning) a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is determined by the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 65a. The configuration may be such that the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering (winning) into the winning opening 650a is larger than the number of award balls. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls paid out by entering (winning) the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a is set to 10, and a general winning opening (high value winning opening). The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters (wins) the ball 602 may be set to 15. Thereby, the profit that the player can enjoy by flowing the ball into the storage device 600 in the special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the player's interest in the big hit game can be further improved. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is opened based on the start of the jackpot, and the storage valve 607a is closed based on the end of the jackpot. Is not limited to this. It may be set to be opened only for a shorter period than in the present embodiment, or may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state a plurality of times in a big hit. For example, the storage valve 607a may be opened based on the interval period set between the jackpot rounds, and the storage valve 607a may be closed based on the end of the interval period. By limiting the period during which the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (release state) to the interval period, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of prize balls paid out in one big hit from becoming too large. That is, it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in a single jackpot, so that the sales of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily predicted. Further, by opening the storage valve 607a during the interval period, the storage valve 607a is provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the interval period (that is, the state in which the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are closed). Part of the sphere that has reached the downstream of the path (flow path) can flow into the storage device 600. In other words, even during the interval period, a prize ball can be obtained by making the ball enter the general winning opening 602. Therefore, the ball can be prevented from being wasted even during the interval period.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is configured to be closed at the start of the jackpot ending effect, but may be configured to be closed at the end of the ending effect. This allows a part of the ball remaining on the board at the start of the ending effect to flow into the storage device 600. That is, a prize ball can be obtained by entering a ball into the general winning opening 602 during the ending effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted during the ending effect. Further, the storage valve 607a is kept open until a certain period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the ending effect ends, and the storage valve 607a is closed after a certain period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. It may be configured to switch to the state. This allows a part of the ball remaining on the board at the end of the ending effect to flow into the storage device 600. In other words, a prize ball can be obtained by entering a ball into the general winning opening 602 after the end of the ending effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the ball less likely to be wasted after the ending effect ends.

  Further, the storage valve 607a is opened when a game state different from the special game state (big hit state) is set, and the storage valve 607a is opened when the set game state is changed to another game state. May be closed. For example, the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened during a period in which the special symbol change state is set. Accordingly, in the special symbol change state, the ball is moved to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 having a large number of award balls to be paid out while receiving the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is likely to be a big hit B by right-handing. Can be entered. Therefore, it is possible to make the special symbol sure change state more advantageous for the player. Further, the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened when the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Basically, the time-saving state of a normal symbol is a state in which the player has less merit than the positively changing state of the special symbol, but the storage valve 607a can be configured to be opened during the time-saving state of the normal symbol. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the time is reduced to the normal symbol.

  In addition, instead of switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the game state or the like, or in addition to switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the game state or the like, the storage valve 607a is switched at an arbitrary timing of the player. You may comprise so that a state can be switched. This allows each player to play a game in the state of the storage valve 607a according to his / her taste.

  In the present embodiment, the out port is provided inside the storage device 600, but a winning port for paying out prize balls may be provided instead of the out port. Further, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the winning opening may be made different. More specifically, for example, six winning balls are provided in place of the out mouth 603a, ten winning balls are provided in place of the out mouth 603b, and a winning ball is provided in place of the out mouth 603c. May have twelve winning ports. Accordingly, it is possible to more interestingly observe the case where the ball flows down the guiding flow path 606 or into which winning opening the ball enters the guiding flow path 607. Further, a member such as a nail, which can change the flowing direction of a ball, may be provided downstream of the guide channel 606 or the guide channel 607 so that a winning hole into which any ball enters becomes more random. . Thereby, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the whereabouts of the ball can be more interestingly observed until the ball enters one of the winning openings. In addition, by providing nails or the like, it is possible to set a ball entrance through which a clerk of the hall easily enters a ball. Therefore, the pitching rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hall side.

  In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the storage valve 607a are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. Then, control may be performed such that the storage valve 607a is switched to the open state when the opening command is received from the main controller 110, and the storage valve 607a is switched to the closed state when the ending command is received. Thus, the processing load on MPU 201 of main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute a variable effect selection process, a special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are main processes related to the game, without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (release state) in the special game state (big hit state), and the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state) in a state other than the special game state (big hit state). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 604a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. Further, it may be configured to switch based on a result of a lottery performed regularly or irregularly. For example, the storage 607a is basically configured to be in a closed state (storage state), and a lottery is performed once a minute to determine whether or not to switch to an open state (released state). Is also good. Further, when the lottery is won, for example, the storage valve 607a may be opened for 10 seconds. As a result, if the lottery is won and the ball can flow into the storage device 600 with the storage valve 607a set to the open state (released state), the ball is moved to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Can be made to enter the ball, so that the player can play the game in hope of winning more lotteries. Furthermore, the lottery probability of the lottery for determining whether or not to set the storage valve 607a to the open state (canceled state) may be configured so that a clerk of the hall or the like can adjust the lottery probability. Accordingly, when the player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict a table having a good lottery probability and select a table. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit and the like when setting the lottery probability of the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting the platform before starting the game. .

  In the present embodiment, according to the jackpot type, the jackpot (jackpot B) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at the timing when it is easy to enter the certainty changing ball opening 654 in the twelfth round of the big hit and the certainty changing ball There is provided a big hit (big hit A) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at a timing when it is difficult to enter the mouth 654, and either of the effects is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit. You may be comprised so that it may indicate a jackpot type. For example, in each of the 1st to 11th rounds of the jackpot, an effect in which a friend of justice and a monster fight may be performed. Then, if the ally of justice wins by the 11th round, it is notified that it is the jackpot B, and if the ally of justice is defeated, it is notified that it is the jackpot A. That is, when the ally of justice wins, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a chance to shift to the state of special symbol change. This allows the player to more interestingly observe the result of the effect performed at the jackpot.

  In addition, a variation is provided in the production contents, and the production contents with high expectation that the ally of justice wins (they are easily selected in the case of the jackpot B) and the possibility that the ally of justice will be defeated (in the case of the big hit A) Effect contents that are easily selected). For example, if the ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special attack, or if the ally of the enemy evades the attack of the enemy, the expectation of winning will be increased, and the attack of the justice will fall off, If an enemy attacks with a special technique, the possibility of defeat may be increased. As a result, it is possible to predict not only the result of whether or not the ally of justice wins, but also the result of the production flow up to victory or defeat. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  In addition, the content of the production performed up to the 11th round is not limited to the production in which the ally of justice and the monster fight as described above, but can suggest an advantageous jackpot B and a jackpot A which is more disadvantageous than the jackpot B. Any mode may be used. For example, if the boy character 710 performs an effect of searching for a treasure, and if the treasure can be found by the eleventh round, it may be configured so that the jackpot B is notified. It may be configured such that an effect of eating a large glutton is displayed, and that the jackpot B is notified when the user finishes eating all the provided food.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the storage device 600 having a unique configuration not provided in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 600 is provided. It may be. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and the conditions under which the storage valve 607a is opened, the advantages when the storage valve 607a is opened, and the disadvantages when the ball is right-hit in the closed state. May be configured to display an image (explanatory image) that explains. Thereby, the player can easily understand the gaming properties. Further, the back type on which the explanation image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. Thereby, a player who is accustomed to the game with the pachinko machine 10 and sufficiently understands the game characteristics can change to the back type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, a right strike is performed in the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the ordinary symbol), and when it is detected that the ball has entered the storage device 600, a right strike warning image is displayed. (See FIG. 5 (b)) is displayed, but a right-handed warning image may not be displayed under predetermined conditions. For example, if the player is making a right-handed hit in a state where no ball is stored above the storage valve 607a, a right-handed warning image is displayed until a ball is stored above the storage valve 607a (FIG. 5B). ) May not be displayed. When the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a in the normal state, a special symbol jackpot is thereafter formed, and when the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state), the upper part of the storage valve 607a The ball stored in can be immediately entered into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Therefore, the ball paid out by entering the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 can be used as a ball used in the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the possessed ball runs out despite the jackpot, the jackpot game can be performed without newly borrowing a ball.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650, and is disposed inside the storage device 600 in the special game state (big hit state). A prize ball can be obtained by making the ball enter the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 that has been set. That is, in the special gaming state (big hit state), in addition to the prize ball being paid out by allowing the ball to enter the first specific prize port 65a or the second specific prize port 650a, the ball is transferred to the storage device 600. The prize ball was paid out by entering the ball. Thereby, the payout of more prize balls is performed at the jackpot, and the player's interest in the jackpot game is further improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in a state (normal gaming state) other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the upstream of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is closed by the storage valve 607a, so that the ball is closed. Is configured such that it is difficult to enter the ball into the general winning port (high value winning port) 602, and the ball can be stored above the storage valve 607a. Then, when there is a ball stored inside the storage device 600 in the normal gaming state, the stored ball and another ball newly flowing into the storage device 600 can interfere (contact). Was configured as follows. Then, when interference (contact) with the stored ball occurs, the flowing direction of the ball newly flowing into the storage device 600 is the direction of the general winning port (small value winning port) 601 having a small number of prize balls. (In the direction of the guide channel 606). Thus, in the normal game state, the ball is struck right to aim at the general prize port (high value prize port) 602 of the storage device 600, so that the number of balls to be held is increased without passing through the jackpot. The game method was configured so that it could not be fundamentally established.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600 in the first embodiment. Then, whether or not to store the ball in the storage device 700 can be switched by an operation of the player. Further, when the balls are stored in the storage device 700, two flow paths through which the balls can flow down are provided. The configuration is such that a sphere can flow into both flow paths.

  Further, in the second embodiment, a winning port that easily enters the ball when the ball is not stored (the state where the storage valve 704a is opened), and two flow paths that easily flow in the state where the ball is stored in the storage valve 704a. The two types of winning ports provided respectively downstream of are configured so that the number of award balls to be paid out is different. That is, two types of winning ports that can be won when the ball is stored in the storage valve 704a are winning ports with a large number of award balls to be paid out, and winning ports with a small number of award balls to be paid out. It is configured as follows. In addition, the winning opening where a ball can win when the storage valve 704a is open is configured to be intermediate between the two types of payout numbers. That is, switching between a state in which the ball can enter the winning port with a large number of winning balls and a small winning port, and a state in which the ball can be stably received by flowing the ball into the storage device 700. Can be. Therefore, the game property when the ball flows into the storage device 700 can be switched according to the preference of the player, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that the arrangement of the first variable winning device 65 is below the first entrance 64, 2 The variable variable winning device 650 is eliminated, the storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600, and a release button 800 for changing the state of the storage valve 704a to the open state by the operation of the player is provided. That the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control unit 113 is partially changed, and that the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes A point that a part of processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and a part of processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 A point that has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first entrance 64. In the first embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 provided on the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 is eliminated. The first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is configured to be opened in all rounds of the jackpot. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), the ball can be made to enter the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a by performing a left hit.

  In the second embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided on a path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13. In the storage device 700, the number of nails around the entrance is smaller than that around the entrance of the storage device 600 of the first embodiment, and the ratio of the sphere that flows in when the ball is right-handed is reduced. The number is set to be smaller than 600 (for example, one ball per 10 balls). Details of the storage device 700 according to the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 shows an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a special symbol probable state or a normal symbol time reduction state (a period in which the player does not lose even if the player hits right). FIG. FIG. 63A shows the display contents when the release button 800 is not pressed (the storage valve 704a is not opened), and FIG. 63B shows the display when the release button 800 is pressed. The display contents in a state (a state in which the storage valve 704a is open) are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), when the release button 800 is not pressed (operated) by the player, the boy character 710 (FIG. 5 (1) in the first embodiment is placed in the small area Ds2 in the sub display area Ds. In place of Ds2 of a)), a character string "Gate is open when button is pressed!" is displayed. By displaying these characters, the release button 800 (button) is pressed for the player, whereby the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 can be set to the open state. It can be easily recognized. Since the display contents in the display area other than the small area Ds2 are the same as those in the special symbol positive change state and the normal symbol time saving state in the first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, the words "Gate Opening" are displayed in the small area Ds2. Thereby, it can be easily recognized that the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 is in the open state.

  Next, the details of the storage device 700 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 64 is a front view of the storage device 700 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the storage device 700 is provided with a guide channel 707 that allows the sphere flowing from above to flow down, and three flow channels are provided downstream of the guide channel 707. (The downstream of the guiding flow path 707 branches in three directions). Specifically, the guiding flow path 706 for flowing the flowing sphere downward and to the left in a front view, the guiding flow path 704 for flowing downward in a front view and a lower right direction in a front view. And an induction flow path 708 for the purpose. As shown in FIG. 64, the nail 709a and the nail 709b are provided downstream of the guide flow path 705, so that the sphere is rightward or leftward while flowing down the guide flow path 705. Also, by passing between the nails 709a and 709b, the downward direction of the ball can be corrected toward the center. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guiding flow path 705 easily flows into the guiding flow path 704 provided on the central side downstream of the guiding flow path 705.

  Downstream of the guide channel 706, there is provided a general winning port (high value winning port) 702 from which the number of prize balls to be paid out is relatively large (for example, six). In addition, a general winning port (medium value winning port) 701 having a smaller number of prize balls paid out (for example, three pieces) 701 than the general winning port (high value winning port) 702 is located downstream of the guide channel 704. Is provided. Further, as entrances other than the general winning opening (medium winning opening) 701 and the general winning opening (large winning opening) 702, out openings 703a to 703e from which a prize ball is not paid out even if a ball enters. Is provided. Then, the game ball flowing down the guiding flow path 708 enters the out port (small value winning port) 703d or the out port (small value winning port) 703e. Then, there is no merit for the player. A ball that has flowed down the guide channel 706 but has not entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703a or the out opening 703b. Is done. Also, a ball that has flowed down the guiding flow path 704 but has not entered the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703b or the out opening 703c. Is done. By these out ports 703a to 703c, even if the ball moves irregularly due to vibration or the like, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from accumulating below the storage device 700 and to reliably discharge the ball. Can be.

  The induction flow path 704 is provided with a storage valve 704a. Like the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment, the storage valve 704a closes the guide flow path 704, and stores one ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 after the closing, in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a. be able to. This storage valve 704a is different from the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment in that the closed state can be released (set to the open state) by the player operating the release button 800 (see FIG. 67). Have been. In a state where the spheres are stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704, the downflow direction is changed by an impact caused by interference (contact) of the spheres flowing into the storage device 700 with the stored spheres. This change (switching) in the flowing direction will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating a trajectory (downflow direction) of a sphere when a sphere that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 flows down in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed. First, with reference to FIG. 65 (a), a case will be described in which a ball that has interfered (contacted) with a stored ball repels to the left in front view due to the impact of the interference.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), when a ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 repels leftward in front view due to interference (contact) with the ball stored above the storage valve 704a, The sphere flows into the guide channel 706 and flows down the guide channel 706. Here, since a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the guiding flow path 706, a relatively large amount of balls enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. (For example, six) prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when the ball rebounds to the right, it is advantageous for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65 (b), a case will be described in which a ball that has interfered (contacted) with a stored ball repels to the right in front view due to the impact of the interference. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the sphere that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a and repels to the right in frontal view, The sphere flows into the guide channel 708 and flows down the guide channel 708. Here, since out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guide channel 708, the ball enters one of the out ports. That is, when the ball rebounds to the right in frontal view, no prize ball is paid out, and there is no merit for the player.

  As described above, when the storage valve 704a is closed, the number of prize balls (game value) obtained by the player varies depending on the direction in which the ball flowing (entering) into the storage device 700 repels. Therefore, when a ball flows into (enters) the storage device 700, it is expected that the ball will repel leftward in front view due to interference (contact) with the ball stored above the storage valve 704a. A game can be played. That is, the downward direction (rebound direction) of the ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 can be more interestingly confirmed, so that the interest of the player in playing the game can be improved. In addition, the direction in which the ball tends to repel changes depending on the momentum of the ball, the angle of entry into the storage device 700, and the degree of adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b. It is possible to devise the way of hitting. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when selecting the pachinko machine 10 for playing a game, the pachinko machine 10 in which the ball easily enters the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702 is selected in consideration of the degree of adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b. Can be. Therefore, at the stage of selecting the pachinko machine 10 before starting the game, it is possible to give a pleasure to find the pachinko machine 10 which is likely to be advantageous to oneself.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an operation when a ball flows (enters) into the storage device 700 with the storage valve 704a set to the open state will be described. When the sphere flows into the storage device 700, the sphere first flows down the guiding flow path 705. Since the nail 709a and the nail 709b are provided on the left and right, respectively, on the downstream side of the guide channel 705 (see FIG. 66), the sphere is rightward or leftward while flowing down the guide channel 705. Also, by passing between the nails 709a and 709b, the downward direction of the ball can be corrected toward the center. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guiding flow path 705 flows into the guiding flow path 704 provided at the center downstream of the guiding flow path 705.

  In the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the sphere can flow down the guiding flow path 704, so that the sphere that has flowed into the guiding flow path 704 flows down the guiding flow path 704 to the general winning opening (medium). (Value winning opening) 701. As a result, a smaller number (for example, three) of prize balls than the prize balls for entering the general prize port (high value prize port) 702 is paid out.

  As described above, when the storage valve 704a is open, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. That is, the downflow direction does not change due to the repulsion, and does not flow into the guide channel 706 or the guide channel 708. That is, instead of the ball being able to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 having a large number of obtained award balls, the ball enters the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. It does not mean that the prize ball cannot be obtained. Therefore, when a ball is inserted into the storage device 700, a prize ball can be obtained stably, and a sense of security can be given to the player.

  In this embodiment, when the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67), the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by keeping the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that the ball enters both the general winning opening (large winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small winning opening) 703d and 703e. The state (high gambling state in which there is a possibility that a large number of prize balls can be obtained but there is a possibility that no prize ball can be obtained) can be set. In addition, by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 can enter the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (small but stable). Prize balls can be obtained). Therefore, depending on whether or not the release button 800 (refer to FIG. 67) is operated, the player can switch the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, so that each player can select a game characteristic that matches his / her own taste. You can play games.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67 and FIG. The electrical configuration according to the second embodiment is different from the electrical configuration according to the first embodiment in that the contents of the first random number table 202b of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the configuration of the RAM 203 is one. Parts, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed. They differ in the point. The other electrical configurations are the same as the electrical configurations in the first embodiment, and thus detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205. The release button 800 is provided at a position where the player can arbitrarily press (operate) (for example, around the frame button 22). When the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, a signal (press detection signal) for notifying the MPU 201 that the press is detected is output to the input / output port 205. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 controls the storage device solenoid 610 to open the storage valve 704a based on the press detection signal. That is, the storage device solenoid 610 is turned on.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which determination values for determining the big hit type are stored, like the first hit type selection table 202b in the first embodiment.

  Note that, in the first hit type selection table 202b in the present embodiment, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with only each big hit type. That is, unlike the first embodiment, the same value for the first hit type counter C2 is the same regardless of whether the special symbol 1 is a big hit or the special symbol 2 is a big hit. The jackpot type is associated.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in a range of “0 to 49”, and the jackpot C is defined in association with the value (FIG. 68 (a)). )) 202b1). The big hit C is a big hit in which the special game state (big hit state) continues for 15 rounds. After the end of the jackpot C, a normal symbol time saving state is given as an added value (the state shifts to a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol time saving state). In addition, the time saving state of the ordinary symbol given after the end of the big hit C continues until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times.

  On the other hand, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from “50 to 99” is defined in association with the big hit D (see 202b2 in FIG. 68A). The big hit D is a big hit where the special game state (big hit state) continues for 15 rounds. After the end of the jackpot D, a special symbol probable change state of the special symbol is given as an added value (transition to a special symbol probable change state). In addition, the certain symbol change state given after the end of the jackpot D continues until the next jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is predetermined according to the type of the jackpot that has been won. That is, a more general configuration than the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is employed. Accordingly, in the second embodiment, the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68 (b), a description will be given of the specified contents of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the RAM 203 in the second embodiment includes a probability change setting flag 203h, a probability variation pass counter 203i, a winning number counter 203j, an operation counter 203k, and a remaining ball provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The timer flag 203m, the remaining ball timer 203n, the probability change enable flag 203o, the probability change enable timer 203p, and the discharge number counter 203q are deleted. This is because these configurations are provided in connection with determining whether or not to shift to the special symbol change state after the end of the big hit in the second specific winning device 650. That is, in the present embodiment, a game state to be set at the end of the big hit is determined in advance according to the big hit type, and it is determined whether or not to shift to the special symbol change state during the special game state (during the big hit state). Since no determination is made, there is no need to use each of the above configurations in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 68B, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is provided with a release flag 203s. The release flag 203s indicates whether or not the player presses (operates) the release button 800 and the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (whether or not the state in which the ball can be stored above the storage valve 704a is released). ?). This release flag 203s is set to ON when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the closed state to the open state (see S4008 in FIG. 71). On the other hand, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is set to off (see S4004 in FIG. 71).

  Next, returning to FIG. 67, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the RAM 223 of the present embodiment, the winning number counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 of the first embodiment is abolished, and a storage state flag 223k and a flowing down time counter 223k are added. I have.

  The storage state flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the storage valve 704a is set to the open (released) state. If the storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is closed, and the ball can be stored above the storage valve 704a. On the other hand, if the storage state flag 223k is off, the storage valve 704a is set to the open (released) state, indicating that the ball can flow down the guidance flow path 704. Each time a storage state command is received from main controller 110, storage state flag 223k is updated to a value corresponding to the storage state indicated by the command (see S1922 in FIG. 72). The sound lamp control device 113 determines the setting of the storage valve 704a based on the storage state flag 223k, and determines whether an abnormality has occurred in the storage valve 704a.

  The flow-down time counter 223k detects whether a ball that has flowed into the guiding flow path 704, the guiding flow path 706, or the guiding flow path 708 immediately before switching the state of the storage valve 704a is in any one of the entrances (general winning opening 701, general winning). This is a counter for counting the time (balling time) until the ball enters the mouth 702, the out mouth 703d, or the out mouth 703e). By counting the ball ejection periods, a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, an out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or an out opening (small value winning opening) When a ball enters the (winning opening) 703e, it can be more accurately determined whether or not the entering ball is a normal operation. Each time the storage state command is received from the main controller 110, a counter value corresponding to one second is set in the falling time counter 233k (see S1923 in FIG. 72). Each time the main process (see FIG. 42) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the value is decremented by one.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed, a ball enters a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the storage valve 704a, or the storage valve 704a is opened. When a ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e in the state, a warning image (FIG. 7 ( b) is displayed. However, if the ball flows into the guiding flow path 704 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball will not move to the general winning opening (medium value) after the storage valve 704a switches to the closed state. (Winning opening) 701 in some cases. Similarly, if a sphere flows into the guiding flow path 706 or the guiding flow path 708 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the closed state to the open state, the sphere generally moves after the storage valve 704a switches to the open state. The ball may enter the winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e. In order to treat these as normal entering balls (not to display a warning image), in the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched, the falling time counter 233k is controlled for a predetermined period (1 second). Set the corresponding counter value. Until the one second set as the counter value elapses, the ball is a general winning opening (medium winning opening) 701, a general winning opening (high winning opening) 702, an out opening (small winning opening) 703d, or When the ball enters the out port (small value winning port) 703e, it is determined that the operation is normal (warning image is not displayed).

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the contents of the main processing (see FIG. 69) are changed from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, only various processes executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) will be described, and detailed description of other processes which have not been changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the main processing. As in the first embodiment, main processing of the game is executed in the main processing.

  In the main process (see FIG. 69) in the present embodiment, a jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) is used instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the main process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. Is executed. Another difference is that a storage control process (S1022) for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a is performed after the second symbol display update process (S1007) ends. Further, the difference is that error command processing 2 (S1023) is executed instead of the error command processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1021). This jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 69), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state (jackpot state), execution of various effects according to the jackpot, This is a process for opening or closing the 1 specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a.

  In the big hit control process 2 (S1021), in each of S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109, the big hit control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35) is S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109. The same processing as the above processing is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 2 of the present embodiment, the process of S1103 (the process of setting the opening of the storage valve) in the first embodiment is abolished. In the second embodiment, the storage valve 704a is set to the open state based on the operation of the release button 800 by the player. Is switched.

  In the jackpot control process 2 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the start timing of a new round is determined by the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is opened. Release is set (S1121), a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1122), and the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123). ). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, or the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls have been won after the game is released, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1123, when it is determined that the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set. The process is closed (S1124) and the process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1123: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when 15 rounds in the special game state (big hit state) are completed, it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect.

  In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing (S1109: Yes), first, an ending command is set (S1125). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the sound ramp control in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits an ending command for display to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1125 ends, it is then determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot D (probably variable jackpot) (S1126). No), 100 is set to the value of the counter 203r during time saving (S1127), and this processing ends. By setting 100 in the time reduction counter 203r, it is possible to set the normal symbol time reduction period until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the end of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1126, if it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot D (probable change jackpot), the probable change flag 203g is set to ON in order to give a probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot ( (S1128), this process ends. If it is not the ending start timing in the processing of S1109 (S1109: No), this processing ends. That is, the winning process (S1111, see FIG. 38) and the abnormal process (S1112, see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are not executed in the big hit control process 2 of the present embodiment.

  By making the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) different from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment as described above, only one winning port opened during the jackpot is provided. The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine in which the state after the end of the jackpot is predetermined according to the jackpot type (that is, a more general pachinko machine).

  Next, the storage control process (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the storage control process (S1022). This storage control process (S1022) is a process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a as described above.

  In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether or not the release flag 203s is on (S4001). If it is determined that the release flag 203s is on (S4001: Yes), the storage valve 704a is open (the storage device 700). Means that the state in which the ball can be stored has been released), and then it is determined whether or not the player has pressed (operated) the release button 800 (S4002). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

  In the process of S4002, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 has been detected (that is, the pressing detection signal has been detected) (S4002: Yes), the storage valve 704a is kept open. This processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 has not been detected (ie, the pressing detection signal has not been detected) (S4002: No), the storage device 704a is closed to close the storage valve 704a. The solenoid 610 is turned off (S4003). Then, in order to indicate that the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, the release flag 203s is set to OFF (S4004), and the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the closed state. For this purpose, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4005), and the process ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the closed state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display back image change command for setting the back type corresponding to the closed state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the mode is set such that the character "Press the button to open the gate!" Is displayed for the small area Ds2. Thus, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state by pressing the release button 800.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4001 that the release flag 203s is off (S4001: No), the storage valve 704a is closed (a state where a ball can be stored in the storage device 700 is set). Then, it is determined whether or not the player has pressed (operated) the release button 800 (S4006). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

  In the process of S4006, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S4006: No), the storage valve 704a is kept closed. For this reason, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that pressing (operation) of the release button 800 has been detected (that is, a pressing detection signal has been detected) (S4006: Yes), the storage device solenoid 610 is turned on to open the storage valve 704a. (S4007). Then, in order to indicate that the opening of the storage valve 704a has been set, the release flag 203s is set to ON (S4008), and the audio lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a has been opened. For this purpose, a storage state command corresponding to the open state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4009), and this processing ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output from the audio lamp in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the release state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display back image change command for setting the back type corresponding to the release state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the mode is set such that the character "Gate Opening" is displayed for the small area Ds2. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 704a is in the open state.

  By executing the storage control process, the opening or closing of the storage valve 704a can be set according to the operation state of the release button 800. As a result, the ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a at an arbitrary timing of the player, so that the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. It is possible to switch between a state in which a crab ball enters and a state in which a ball flowing (entering) into the storage device 700 flows down to a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the content of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) is partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. In the following, only the command determination process (see FIG. 72) will be described, and other processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will not be described in detail.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing (1811) in the present embodiment. In this command determination process, in each process of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919, the same processes as the respective processes of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment are respectively performed. Each is executed.

  In the command determination process of this embodiment (see FIG. 72), when it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the process of S1911 (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a failure or the like in the storage valve 704a. Then, a warning process for giving a warning when a problem has occurred is executed (S1921), and this process ends.

  In the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of S1916 (S1916: No), next, it is determined whether or not the storage state command has been received. It is determined (S1922). When it is determined that the storage state command has been received (S1922: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is updated according to the state of the storage valve 704a notified by the storage state command (S1923). Specifically, when the closed state (storage state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a, the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the open state (released state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a. In this case, the storage state flag 223k is set to off. When the storage state flag 223k is updated, a back image (see FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b)) corresponding to the storage state after the update is set, so that the display on the third symbol display device 81 is performed. Update the content.

  When the processing in S1923 is completed, a counter value corresponding to one second is set to the falling time counter 223l (S1924), and this processing ends. By using the ball flushing time set for the falling time counter 223l, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not there is a defect in the storage valve 704a. In the process of S1922, when it is determined that the storage state command has not been received (S1922: No), the process proceeds to S1919.

  As described above, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the release state command or the closed state command from the main control device 110. A command to cause the display control device 114 can be set. This allows the player to easily recognize the state of the storage valve 704a.

  Next, the warning process (S1921) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, this warning process (S1921) is a process for determining the presence or absence of a failure such as a failure in the storage valve 704a and issuing a warning when a failure has occurred.

  In the warning process (S1921), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S4101). If the storage state flag 223k is on (S4101: Yes), then, is the value of the falling time counter 223l zero? It is determined whether or not it is (S4102). When it is determined that the value of the falling time counter 223l is 0 (S4102: Yes), the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state), which means that the ball ejection period has elapsed. Therefore, in the closed state (storage state) of the storage valve 704a, a storage-time notification process for notifying a failure is executed (S4103), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S4102 that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is not 0 (S4102: No), it means that the storage valve 704a is currently set in the closed state, and that the ball is being thrown. Therefore, the process of S4103 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Here, details of the above-described storage notification process (S4103) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the storage notification process (S4103), first, it is determined whether or not the notified prize information command includes prize information corresponding to the ball entering the general prize port (medium value prize port) 701 (S4201). If the winning information corresponding to the ball entry into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is not included (S4201: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the winning information corresponding to the ball entry to the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is included (S4201: Yes), even if the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state). Regardless, it means that the ball flows down the storage valve 704a and enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. In other words, it means that the storage valve 704a is not normally closed even though the storage valve 704a is set to be closed. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 704a is set (S4202). Then, the present process ends.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display error command, the display control device 114 generates a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 704a has a failure in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7B), it is possible to easily make the player or the clerk of the hall aware of the occurrence of the malfunction, and the malfunction can be quickly eliminated.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. In the process of S4101, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S4101: No), it is determined whether the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4104). If it is determined that the value is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S4104: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the falling time counter 223l is 0 (S4104: Yes), the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state), which means that the ball ejection period has elapsed. Therefore, in the open state (released state) of the storage valve 704a, a release notification process for notifying a failure is executed (S4105), and this processing ends. The release notification process (S4105) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the release notification process (S4105). In the release notification process (S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the received prize information command includes prize information corresponding to the ball entering the general prize port (high value prize port) 702 (S4301). If the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (high winning opening) 702 is included (S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to S4303.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4301 that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702 is not included (S4301: No), then the outgoing information command is output. It is determined whether or not winning information corresponding to the ball entry into the mouths (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e is included (S4302), and it corresponds to the ball entry into the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e. If the winning information is not included (S4302: No), this processing is terminated.

  In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entry to the out exit (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e is included (S4302: Yes), the process proceeds to S4303. When the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to a ball entering the general winning opening (high winning opening) 702 (S4301: Yes), or to the out opening (small winning opening) 703d, 703e. In the processing of S4303 executed when the winning information corresponding to the entry of the ball is included (S4302: Yes), a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 704a is set (S4303), and this processing is performed. finish. When the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state), the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 flows down the guiding flow path 704, so that the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or the out The balls enter the ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e because there is a high possibility that the storage valve 704a is not normally opened.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display error command, the display control device 114 generates a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 704a has a failure in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7B), it is possible to easily make the player or the clerk of the hall aware of the occurrence of the malfunction, and the malfunction can be quickly eliminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the storage device 700 that can store the ball therein is provided. The storage device 700 is provided with a plurality of flow paths (induction flow paths 704, 706, and 708) inside thereof, and is configured so that a sphere can flow down to different entrances. In addition, a storage valve 704a capable of closing the flow path is provided in the induction flow path 704. When the guide flow path 704 is closed by the storage valve 704a, one ball can be stored (held) at the upper portion thereof.

  When the storage valve 704a is open, the sphere flowing into the storage device 700 flows down the guide channel 704 (compared to the guide channel 706 and the guide channel 708, Since the ball is made to flow easily), the ball can enter a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the guiding flow path 704. Therefore, by letting the ball flow into the storage device 700, the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entering the general winning port (medium value winning port) 701 can be stably received.

  On the other hand, in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed and the sphere is stored in the upper portion thereof, the sphere flowing into the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the stored sphere, so that the guiding flow path 706, Or, it repels in any direction of the guide channel 708. That is, when the flowing direction changes due to the rebound, either the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702 having a large number of award balls to be paid out or the out-opening (small-value winning opening) 703d or 703e having no award balls paid out. Enter the crab. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a holding device for temporarily holding a ball hitting a game board. Some of the conventional gaming machines can release a held ball to a game board by a player's operation and allow the ball to enter a predetermined winning opening provided in the traveling direction thereof ( For example, JP-A-2003-190443.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player by merely causing the ball released by using the holding device to enter the predetermined winning opening.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67), the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by keeping the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that the ball enters both the general winning opening (large winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small winning opening) 703d and 703e. The state (high gambling state in which there is a possibility that a large number of prize balls can be obtained but there is a possibility that no prize ball can be obtained) can be set. In addition, by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 can enter the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (small but stable). Prize balls can be obtained). Therefore, depending on whether or not the release button 800 (refer to FIG. 67) is operated, the player can switch the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, so that each player can select a game characteristic that matches his / her own taste. You can play games. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a can be switched at an arbitrary timing by the player using the release button 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. This allows each player to start a game during a period in which the storage valve 704a is in a state that suits his / her taste. Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of a lottery that is performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is basically configured to be in a closed state (storage state), and is configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not to switch to an open state (released state) once a minute. You may.

  Further, when the lottery is won, for example, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds. By this, if the balls are easy to enter the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed due to the adjustment condition of the nails 709a and 709b, the ball is stored by lottery. The game can be played in expectation of the valve 704a being opened. On the other hand, if the ball becomes easy to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702 in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed due to the degree of adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, the ball continues to be removed by lottery. A game can be played with the expectation that the storage valve 704a will continue to be closed. Furthermore, the lottery probability of the lottery for determining whether or not to set the storage valve 607a to the open state (canceled state) may be configured so that a clerk of the hall or the like can adjust the lottery probability. Accordingly, when the player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict a table having a good lottery probability and select a table. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit and the like when setting the lottery probability of the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting the platform before starting the game. .

  In the present embodiment, the flow path through which the sphere can flow when the storage valve 704a is closed is two types, the guide flow path 706 and the guide flow path 708. However, the present invention is not limited to this. More channels and winning ports may be provided. Further, more variations may be given to the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters each winning port. Thereby, when the storage valve 704a is closed, the randomness of the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be increased, so that the player can observe the flowing direction of the ball that has entered the storage device 700 more interestingly. Can be done.

  Further, a plurality of flow paths through which the spheres can flow when the storage valve 704a is open may be provided. Then, a different number of winning balls may be paid out when the ball flows down each channel. Thereby, even if the storage valve 704a is in an open state, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be made random, so that the downward flow direction of the ball that has entered the storage device 700 for the player. Can be observed more interestingly.

  In the present embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the second entrance 640, but the arrangement may be reversed. With the configuration in which the storage device 700 is provided upstream, it is possible to make it easier for the sphere to flow into the storage device 700.

  In the present embodiment, only the first specific winning opening 65a is provided as a winning opening opened in the special game state (big hit state). However, a plurality of winning openings may be provided as in the first embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the storage valve 704a is opened only while the release button 800 is being pressed (operated), but the invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be received during the predetermined period during which the storage valve 704a is open. This eliminates the need to keep pressing the release button 800 to keep the storage valve 704a open. Further, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), it may be configured to switch between the closed state (reserved state) and the open state (released state). With such a configuration, the release button 800 may be operated only when the state is to be switched, so that the number of times of operation by the player can be reduced. Further, an operation means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating the release button 800 may be provided opposite to the release button 800. Even with such a configuration, similarly to the present embodiment, it is possible for each player to select a game characteristic that suits his / her taste.

  In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed in characters on the small area Ds2 in the sub display area Ds, but the state of notifying the player of the state of the storage valve 704a is limited to this. Not something. For example, according to the state of the storage valve 704a, the storage valve 704a may be configured to display either a real image in an open state or a real image in a closed state. The display indicating the state of the storage valve 704a may be displayed in a display area other than the small area Ds2. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display indicating the state of the storage valve 704a is configured to be displayed as a rear image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that it may display on the near side rather than a 3rd symbol. Further, the mode of the third symbol may be changed according to the state of the storage valve 704a, and the state of the storage valve 704a may be recognized according to the mode of the third symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 704a may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. Then, control may be performed such that the storage valve 704a is switched to the open state when the release state command is received from the main control device 110, and the storage valve 704a is switched to the closed state when the closed state command is received. Thus, the processing load on MPU 201 of main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute a variable effect selection process, a special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are main processes related to the game, without delay.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the storage device 700 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 700 is provided. May be. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 700 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (explanatory image) that describes conditions under which the storage valve 704a is opened, and advantages and disadvantages when the storage valve 704a is opened is displayed. It may be configured as follows. Thereby, the player can easily understand the gaming properties. Further, the back type on which the explanation image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. Thereby, a player who is accustomed to the game with the pachinko machine 10 and sufficiently understands the game characteristics can change to the back type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a is provided below the first entrance opening 64 so that the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a by left-handing. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. It is not something that can be done. For example, similarly to the first embodiment, a first specific winning opening 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700. This allows the ball to flow into the first specific winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 simply by right-handing in the special game state (big hit state), so that the prize ball in the special game state (big hit state) can be obtained. You can do more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, when the sphere stored above the storage valve 704a and the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 interfere (contact), the flow path through which the newly flown sphere flows down is formed. It was configured to be random. That is, in a state where the sphere is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, the ratio of the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 to the guiding channel 706 and the guiding channel 708 is substantially the same. Although it constituted, it is not limited to this. For example, by increasing the width of the storage valve 704a (for example, assuming a width 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere), the sphere stored at the top of the storage valve 704a is positioned rightward in front view or leftward in front view. It may be configured to obtain. When the ball is disposed above the storage valve 704a on the left side when viewed from the front, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to collide with the right side surface of the stored ball. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to be repelled to the right side in front view, so that the sphere easily flows down the guiding flow path 708. As described above, since the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guide flow path 708, the player cannot obtain the prize ball (it is disadvantageous for the player). . On the other hand, when the ball is disposed on the right side of the storage valve 704a in front view, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to collide with the left side surface of the stored ball. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to be repelled to the left side when viewed from the front, so that the sphere easily flows down the guiding flow path 706. As described above, since the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the guiding flow path 708, the player can obtain a relatively large amount of prize balls (advantageous for the player). Becomes). As described above, the arrangement of the balls stored above the storage valve 704a can form an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state for the player, and thus the storage valve 704a can be formed in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed. You can be conscious of the arrangement of the spheres stored at the top of the. Therefore, if the arrangement of the spheres is disadvantageous (that is, if the spheres are stored to the left in front view), the storage valve 704a can be opened (released) by pressing (operating) the release button 800. it can. Further, if the arrangement of the balls is an advantageous arrangement (that is, if the balls are stored rightward in front view), it is possible to make the player want to continue the game while maintaining the arrangement of the balls. . Therefore, it is possible to give a pleasure of determining whether or not to press the release button 800 according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, the state of the second specific winning opening 650a (open state or closed state) and the state of the storage valve 607a provided in the storage device 600 (open state or closed state) are independent of each other. In the bonus game state (big hit state), the storage valve 607a is always controlled to be in the open state, while the second specific winning opening 650a is set for a predetermined period in 12 rounds (FIG. 16). The open state is set only during the open period specified for each jackpot type. In addition, two types of flow paths (a guide flow path 652 and a guide flow path 653) are provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and only when a ball flows down the guide flow path 652, the guiding is performed. It was configured to be able to enter the ball into the positive change entrance port 654 provided downstream of the flow path 652. In other words, even if a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot, the ball does not flow down the guiding flow path 652 so that it does not shift to the certain state of the special symbol after the jackpot. Was.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, the second specific winning opening 650a and the storage by using the slide member 900 instead of the member for opening and closing the second specific winning opening 650a of the first embodiment and the storage valve 607a. The state of the device 600 can be switched. That is, the opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening 650a and the opening / closing control of the guide channel 607 in the storage device 600 can be performed by one member, and the state is switched in conjunction with each other. That is, when the second specific winning opening 650a is in the open state, the guiding flow path 607 (general winning opening 602) is also in the open state, and when the second specific winning opening 650a is in the closed state, the guiding flow path 607 (general winning opening 602). ) Is also configured to be closed. In the case of such a configuration, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening 602 (that is, the winning opening opened during the jackpot by the slide member 900) are both winning openings for obtaining a prize ball during the jackpot. Can be treated as

  Further, inside the second variable prize device 650, only the guide flow path 652 leading to the positive change ball entrance 654 is provided, and the flow path switching valve 650d, the guide flow path 653, and the normal ball entrance 655 are provided. Has been abolished. That is, if a ball can be made to enter the second specific winning opening 650a, the state is shifted to the specially changed state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. Further, the winning opening opened in the twelfth round is changed in accordance with the type of the jackpot. In other words, in the twelfth round, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 are set in the open state, and the first specific win is performed in all rounds of the big win (V route open big win). A jackpot (V route closing jackpot) in which the winning port 65a is set to an open state (the second specific winning port 650a and the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 are not opened during the jackpot) is provided. Have been.

  With these changes from the first embodiment, the end condition of each round of the jackpot is also changed. Specifically, in rounds 1 to 11 and rounds 13 to 15 of the jackpot, the balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Is changed to 10 in total, or when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round, the round game ends (the first specific winning opening 65a is closed). In the 12 rounds, the total number of the balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 becomes 10 in total, or Is changed so that the round game ends (the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening 602 are closed) when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the game.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the first embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that a member for switching the state of the second specific winning opening 650a and a (close portion 910) And the member (ball storage unit 920) for switching the state of the guide channel 607 is formed as one member (slide member 900), and is paid out when the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. The number of prize balls to be changed to three (15 in the first embodiment), the point that the contents of the ROM 202 are partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 Is changed from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed from the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. 0 is a point that has been changed from. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 76, an example of an image (effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the twelfth round of the V-route opening big hit (big hit F) in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example. explain. As shown in FIG. 76, when there are 12 rounds of the V route opening big hit (big hit F), the character "ROUND12" is displayed in the display area 714 for displaying the number of rounds. In addition, a display area 717 for notifying that the second specific winning opening 650a has been opened is formed at the upper center in the front view of the third symbol display device 81. In this display area 717, the characters "CHANCE !!" and the characters "Opening the probable change route !!" are displayed. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the ball is inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a and the state is shifted to the certain state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. The other display contents of the boy character 710 and the like are the same as the display contents displayed on the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6A), and therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a configuration of a downstream side of a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 77, on the downstream side of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second A variable winning device 650 is provided. In addition, a member (closing portion 910) for opening or closing the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 (a ball storing portion 920) for opening or closing the flow path of the storage device 600. Are arranged in a straight line. Although details will be described later, this is because the closing part 910 and the ball storage part 920 are both part of the slide member.

  Further, a nail 921a and a nail 921b are provided at the entrance of the storage device 600. The clerk of the hall can adjust the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600 by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b before the opening of the hall, for example. By changing the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600, the number of balls entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the storage device 600 in the twelfth round of the jackpot can be changed. it can. Therefore, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b to adjust the ball hit by right-handing so as to easily flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to increase the prize balls that can be obtained by the player at the jackpot. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot game can be further improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Conversely, when the ball is made difficult to flow into the storage device 600 by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, the first specific winning opening 65a provided downstream of the storage device 600, and the second The number of balls reaching the specific winning opening 650a can be increased. Therefore, the jackpot can be digested more quickly. Further, in the twelfth round, it is easy to enter the second specific winning opening 650a, so that in the case of the jackpot F, it is possible to easily shift to the special symbol change state. Therefore, the possibility that the jackpot is continuous for a short period of time is increased, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The configuration for adjusting the ease with which the ball flows into the storage device 600 (the ease with which the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a) is not limited to nails. For example, a windmill may be provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 to make it easy to rotate.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a description will be given of the slide member 900 including the above-described closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 in the configuration. FIGS. 78 (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views when the game board 13 is cut along the line LXXVIIb-LXXVIIb in FIG. 77, respectively. Here, the slide member 900 is configured to be slidable toward the back side or the front side with respect to the game board 13 in a front view, and is slid toward the front side in a front view to perform the second specification. The winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 can be closed. On the other hand, the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 can be respectively opened by sliding the slide member 900 to the back side in the front view with respect to the game board 13.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a view when the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 are closed by the slide member 900 when viewed from above the gaming board 13. On the other hand, FIG. 78 (b) is a diagram when the game board 13 is viewed from above when the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 are open.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the slide member 900 has a shape in which a substantially rectangular closing part 910 and a ball storage part 920 protrude from a right end part and a left end part of a substantially rectangular base part 930 (substantially “ U-shape). The closing part 910 and the ball storage part 920 are protruded toward the near side of the game board 13 or buried in the back side of the game board 13 via the opening parts 940a and 940b opened in the base plate 60, respectively. can do.

  In the state where the slide member 900 is slid to the front side in the front view, the upper portion of the second specific winning opening 650a is closed by the closing portion 910 as shown in FIG. The ball cannot enter the winning device 650. Similarly, since the guiding flow path 607 is closed by the ball storage section 920, the ball can enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided downstream of the guiding flow path 607. become unable.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the slide member 900 is slid toward the back of the game board 13, the upper part of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and the guide channel 607 is also opened. Therefore, by hitting the ball to the right, the ball is directed to a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided downstream of the guiding channel 607 or to a second specific winning opening 650a provided downstream of the storage device 600. Can be entered.

  As described above, in the present modification, the switching of the state of the second specific winning opening 650a and the switching of the state of the guide channel 607 can be realized only by the slide member 900. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the second specific winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are separately controlled as in the first embodiment. That is, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes an important process in a game, such as a lottery of a special symbol and a determination of a fluctuating time, if the processing speed decreases due to an increase in the processing load, The effect on the game will increase. On the other hand, in the present modification, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, so that main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a first hit type selection table 202b in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the present modification, when a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball always enters the certain-variable entering opening 654. As the jackpot type, a jackpot in which the second specific winning opening 650 is opened in the twelfth round and a jackpot in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in the twelfth round are provided.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 79, the big hit E (V route closing big hit) is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of 0 to 49 (see 202b1 in FIG. 79). The jackpot E (V route closing jackpot) is a jackpot in which a special game state of 15 rounds is given, and in each round of the jackpot, the first specific winning opening 65a is set for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse, or the ball is played). It is a jackpot that is released (until 10 balls enter). In other words, in the special game state (big hit state), the ball cannot be put into the certain variable hitting ball opening 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650, so that the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is 100 after the big hit end. Granted times.

  On the other hand, the jackpot F (V route opening jackpot) is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of 50 to 99 (see 202b2 in FIG. 79). The jackpot F is a jackpot in which a special game state of 15 rounds is given, and in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 elapse a predetermined time (30 seconds elapse). Or until the ball has entered 10 balls), and in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 650a has a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have elapsed, or 10 balls have entered). It is a jackpot that is released (until the ball hits). At the jackpot F, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the twelfth round. Therefore, if the ball can be made to enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the twelfth round, the state of the special symbol after the jackpot is changed. Is given. On the other hand, in the twelfth round, as a result of the ball being thrown into the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 despite not performing a right-handed or right-handed, the ball is moved to the second specific winning opening 650a. If 12 rounds are completed without entering the ball, after the end of the jackpot F, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the contents of the main processing (see FIG. 34) are changed from the first embodiment. Specifically, the difference is that a big hit control process 3 (see FIG. 80) is executed instead of the big hit control process (see FIG. 35) executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) of the first embodiment. ing. Hereinafter, only the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) will be described, and other processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will not be described in detail.

  First, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 3 (S1031). The jackpot control process 3 is a process for setting the opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a for each round of the jackpot state.

  In each of the jackpot control processes 3, S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112 are executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment (S1101, S1102, S1104). , S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112 are executed. In the big hit control process 3 (S1031), the processes of S1103, S1107, and S1108, which were executed in the big hit control process (FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, are eliminated.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), when it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36). Instead, the big hit operation setting process 2 is executed (S1121), and this process is ended. Details of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the above-described jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121). The jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) is a process for setting the state (open state or closed state) of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

In the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121), the processes of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 are the same as the processes of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 in the jackpot operation setting process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 36), respectively. Is performed.
In the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) according to the present modification, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the round is the twelfth round (S1201: Yes), then the current jackpot type is the jackpot F (V route open). It is determined whether it is a big hit or not (S1211).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1211 that the hit is not the jackpot F (S1211: No), it means that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is the jackpot E that is opened in all rounds of the jackpot. Then, the opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1211 that the jackpot is the jackpot F (S1211: Yes), only the twelfth round is the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened. The opening of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set (S1203). As described above, the closing part 910 that has closed the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is the same member as the ball storage part 920 that has closed the guiding flow path 607 of the lottery device 600. (A part of the slide member 900), and the closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 slide and displace in conjunction with each other. Therefore, by setting the opening of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a by the processing of S1203, the guiding flow path 607 inside the storage device 600 is also opened (that is, the general winning opening 602 is also opened). ).

  After setting the opening of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by the processing of S1203, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. , And a storage state command corresponding to the open state (released state) is set to notify the sound lamp control device 114 that the guide flow path 607 has been set to the open state (released state) (S1212). The process proceeds to S1206. The storage state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output from the audio lamp in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage status command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage status command. When the display back image change command is received by the display control device 114, a display area 717 is generated in the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "CHANCE !!" Is displayed (see FIG. 76). By displaying these characters, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that it is a chance to make a transition to the special symbol change state.

  If the state shifts to the special symbol change state, the jackpot is likely to become the jackpot again in a short period of time after the jackpot is completed, which is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, in the twelfth round of the jackpot F, the player can more seriously aim the second specific winning opening 650a and launch the ball. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming a mere operation for obtaining a prize ball, and to enjoy a game in the special game state (during the jackpot state).

  As described above, of the right-hit balls, the ratio of the balls reaching the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is determined by the nails 921a and 921b ( It can be varied by adjusting (see FIG. 77). For example, by adjusting the nail 921a to open to the right in front view, or by adjusting the nail 921b to open to the left in front view (opening the nail), the right-handed ball flows into the storage device 600 more. Easier to do. Therefore, the ratio of the ball reaching the second specific winning opening 650a is relatively low. That is, the more the nails 921a and 921b are opened, the more difficult it is for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the twelfth round of the jackpot F. In addition, if ten balls enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 while the ball cannot enter the second specific winning opening 650, the 12 rounds will end. . Therefore, it is difficult to make a transition to the special symbol change state. Note that, when the ball easily flows into the storage device 600, the ball easily enters the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 having a larger number of award balls to be paid out compared to the second specific winning opening 650a. (See FIG. 9B). As a result, the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls, so that the player's interest in the jackpot can be improved.

  Here, in many cases, in the first to eleventh rounds, the player makes a right-handed shot aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a, so that the player is disposed downstream of a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. The sphere also flows into the storage device 600 provided. Therefore, one ball is stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 before the twelfth round starts. Therefore, when the 12th round starts and the upper part of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is opened by the slide member 900 being slid and displaced, the balls stored in the upper part of the ball storing section 920 are moved to the general winning opening. (Large value winning opening) flows down to 602. As a result, of the balls that have been right-handed in the twelfth round, substantially nine balls are moved to the second specific winning opening 650a before entering the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602. If the ball cannot be entered, the twelfth round will end.

  On the other hand, by adjusting the nail 921a and the nail 921b so as to approach each other (closing the nail), it becomes difficult for the right-hit ball to flow into the storage device 600. Therefore, since the ratio of the ball reaching the second specific winning opening 650 is relatively high, the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the twelfth round of the jackpot F. Therefore, it becomes easy to shift to the special symbol change state after the big hit. This makes it easier for the player to win again in a short period of time after the end of the jackpot F, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  As described above, by changing the ease of entry of the ball into the storage device 600 when right-handed, the ball is moved to the second entrance 650a provided downstream from the entrance of the storage device 600. Can be changed easily. Therefore, only by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b by the clerk of the hall, it is possible to change the playability in the case of the jackpot F. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602, and it is easy to shift to a certain symbol change state, and it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602. It is possible to switch between game characteristics in which many prize balls can be easily obtained in the round, but in which it is difficult to shift to a certain symbol change state. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall.

  Returning to FIG. 80, the description is continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1109 of the jackpot control process 3 that the timing is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then the winning process (S1111) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. ), The winning process 2 is executed (S1122), and the process proceeds to S1112. Details of the winning process 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the prize-winning process 2 (S1122) executed by the MPU 201 in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) in this modification. In the winning process 2 (S1122), the processes of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 are the same as the processes of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 in the winning process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38), respectively. Is performed.

  In the winning process 3 (S1122) according to the present modification, the value of the winning counter 203j becomes 10 or more in the process of S1404 (that is, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, the second specifying opening). When it is determined that the total number of balls entered into the winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 becomes 10 or more (S1404: Yes), or round time If it is determined that (30 seconds from the start of the round) has elapsed (S1405: Yes), any of the open winning openings (first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or second specific opening). A winning opening closing process for setting closing of the winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602) is executed (S1431), and the process proceeds to S1408. The winning opening closing process (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the winning opening closing process (S1431). The winning opening closing process (S1431) is a process of setting the closing of the winning opening when a winning opening closing condition is satisfied in each round of the jackpot.

  In the winning opening closing process (S1431), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the twelfth round (S4401). If it is not the twelfth round (S4401: No), it means that the currently opened winning opening is the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. The closing of the (large opening port) 65a is set (S4402), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the current round is the twelfth round (S4401), the winning jackpot that is opened according to the jackpot type is different, so that the current jackpot is the jackpot F (V route It is determined whether it is an open jackpot (S4403). If it is determined that the jackpot is not the jackpot F (V route opening jackpot) (that is, it is the jackpot E (V route closing jackpot)) (S4403: No), the winning opening currently opened is the first specific winning opening ( This means that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed by shifting the processing to S4402 (S4402), and this processing is executed. finish.

  In the process of S4403, if it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot F (V route opening jackpot) (S4403: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened only in the twelfth round. This means that the second special winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are currently opened. Therefore, in this case, the closing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is set (S4404), and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is set. The storage state command corresponding to the closed state (storage state) is set in order to notify the sound lamp control device 113 that the mouth 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 have been closed ( S4405), this process ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output from the audio lamp in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage status command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage status command. When the display back image change command is received by the display control device 114, the display area 717 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is deleted. This allows the player to easily recognize that the chance to shift to the special symbol probable change state has ended.

  By executing the winning opening closing process (S1431), the winning opening that has been opened can be accurately closed.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification Example of First Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the processing content of the command determination processing is partially changed from the command determination processing (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. More specifically, in order to execute a process for receiving a storage state command output from main controller 110 in a jackpot, each of S1921 to S1923 in the command determination process (see FIG. 69) of the second embodiment is performed. Execute the process. The processing itself is the same as the command determination processing in the second embodiment (see FIG. 69), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the command determination process according to the present modification, an error notification process 2 (S1971) is executed instead of the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. The error notification process 2 (S1971) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the above-described error notification process 2 (S1971). In the error notification processing 2 (S1971), in each of steps S1931 to S1934, S1936, and S1937, the same processing as the error notification processing (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment is executed. In the error notification process 2 (S1971) according to the present modification, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 in the process of S1934 (S1981), the hit notification process (FIG. 45) in the first embodiment is performed. Instead, the hit time notification process 2 is executed (S1981), and this process ends. The hit time notification process 2 (S1981) is a process for notifying when a failure occurs in the storage valve 607a during a big hit, similarly to the hit time notification process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment. It is.

  Next, the hit time notification process 2 (S1981) described above will be described with reference to FIG. In the hit time notification process 2 (S1981), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991). If it is determined in the processing of S1991 that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S1991: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the falling time counter 223l is 0 (S1992). If not (S1992), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1992, when it is determined that the value of the falling time counter 223l is 0 (S1992: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state), and the ball ejection period has elapsed. Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information command includes the ball entry information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 (S1993).

  If it is determined that the ball entry information corresponding to the ball entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1993: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball entry information corresponding to the ball entry to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1993: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state). Despite this, it means that the sphere is flowing downstream of the storage valve 607a. Therefore, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1994), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1991 that the storage state flag 223k is not on (is off) (S1991: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the falling time counter 223l is 0 (S1995). ). Then, when it is determined that the value of the falling time counter 223l is not 0 (S1995: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1995 that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S1995: Yes), then the received winning information command is entered into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is determined whether or not winning information corresponding to the ball is included (S1996). If the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1996: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  In the processing of S1996, when winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small winning opening) 601 is included (S1996: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state). This means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 even though the ball evacuation period has elapsed. That is, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a has not been opened normally, the process proceeds to S1994 in order to notify a malfunction of the storage valve 607a.

  According to the hit time notification process 2 (S1981), when a malfunction occurs in the operation of the storage valve 607a, the malfunction can be promptly notified, and the malfunction can be quickly resolved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the first embodiment, the opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650 a using the slide member 900 and the guiding flow path in the storage device 600. The opening and closing operation of the 607 can be performed simultaneously. In other words, the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is configured as one of the winning openings for obtaining a prize ball during a big hit.

  Since the switching of the state of the second specific winning opening 650a and the switching of the state of the guide channel 607 can be realized only by sliding the slide member 900, the second specification as in the first embodiment. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are separately controlled. That is, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes an important process in a game, such as a lottery of a special symbol and a determination of a fluctuating time, if the processing speed decreases due to an increase in the processing load, The effect on the game will increase. On the other hand, in the present modification, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, so that main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

  Further, in the present modification, only the positive variable ball entrance 654 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 650 always enters the positive variable ball opening 654. It is configured to be spherical. Thereby, if a ball can be made to enter the second specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to realize a simple playability of shifting to a state in which a special symbol is changed after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, it is easier for the player to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol change state, so that it is possible to provide a playability that even a beginner can enjoy. Further, since the flow path switching valve 650d, the guiding flow path 653, and the normal entrance 655 provided inside the second variable winning device 650 in the first embodiment are eliminated, the second variable winning device 650 is provided. Can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In this modification, the ratio of the ball that flows into the storage device 600 among the right-hit balls is adjusted by adjusting nails 921a and 921b (see FIG. 77) provided at the entrance of the storage device 600. It is configured to be variable.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is determined whether or not a hit is made based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening, and it is separately determined whether or not to shift to a probability variation state during the winning. There are things to draw. As a result, it is possible to prevent the hit from being a mere work for obtaining a large number of hit balls, to allow the player to play the game with a sense of expectation for shifting to the probability fluctuation state, and to enhance the interest of the player in the game. Is being planned.

  Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are provided with a predetermined area in which a game ball can enter only during a hit, and the probability fluctuation state after the hit by hitting the game ball into the predetermined area is provided. (For example, JP-A-2003-180999).

  However, in conventional game machines, the rate at which game balls enter a predetermined area during a hit is set in advance for each model. There was no choice but to introduce a different model. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, there is no flexibility in the ratio of shifting to the probability fluctuation state, and it has been difficult to flexibly cope with a different sales policy for each hall. Therefore, a more versatile gaming machine has been demanded.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example, the ease of entry of the ball into the storage device 600 when right-handed is performed can be easily changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. It is composed. Thereby, it is possible to change the ease of entering the second entrance 650 a provided downstream of the entrance of the storage device 600. Therefore, only by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b by the clerk of the hall, it is possible to change the playability in the case of the jackpot F. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602, it is easy to shift to the state of the special symbol change, and it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602. It is possible to switch between game characteristics in which it is difficult to shift to the symbol change state. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall, and the versatility can be improved.

  In the present modification, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is configured to be opened for a maximum of 5 seconds in 12 rounds of the jackpot F, but the opening time may be arbitrarily determined. For example, by setting the opening time to 10 seconds, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, it is easy to shift to the certain state of the special symbol, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Further, the opening time may be, for example, 2 seconds. By shortening the opening time, the pachinko machine 10 in which a variety of hitting methods are performed or the nails 921a and 921b are more closed to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a in a limited time. You can choose. Therefore, the user can be absorbed in the game by the pachinko machine 10.

  In this modification, the entrance of the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the second specific winning opening 650a, and the ease of entering the storage device 600 can be changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. However, the configuration for changing the ratio of the ball reaching the second specific winning opening 650a is not limited to this. For example, instead of the storage device 600, a prize port for simply paying out a prize ball when a ball enters the ball may be provided. Then, the second specific winning opening 650a may be configured such that the open / close state is switched by a single member. Even with this configuration, the ratio of balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a can be changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b to change the ease of entering the out opening or the winning opening. Can be done. In addition, by replacing the storage device 600 with an out port or a winning port, the structure can be simplified, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Further, the ease of flowing into the storage device 600 does not necessarily need to be adjustable. That is, instead of the nails 921a and 921b, a columnar member fixed to the board surface may be provided. This makes it impossible for the hall to adjust whether the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a in the twelfth round of the jackpot F, and the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Even if the ball is not balled, it is possible to suppress that discouraged person from going to the hole. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having a distrust of the hall.

  In the present modification, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are configured to be opened in the twelfth round of the jackpot F, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be opened in the first round. As a result, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not to shift to the special symbol change state, so that it is possible to play the game in the subsequent special game state (big hit state) with confidence. Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in the fifteenth round. As a result, since whether or not to shift to the special symbol probable change state is not determined until the final round of the fifteenth round, the player's expectation of the special symbol probable change state can be maintained for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the jackpot game. In addition, for example, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 may be continuously opened in a plurality of rounds when the jackpot F is reached. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to be opened on the twelfth round and the thirteenth round. As a result, the balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 by the end of the eleventh round enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the twelfth round, and in the thirteenth round, the ball storing unit. A state in which no sphere exists at the top of 920 can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance of the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a.

  In the present modified example, as in the first embodiment, only one sphere can be stored inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of spheres can be stored. For example, the configuration may be such that four balls can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920. In this case, the end condition of the 12 rounds is changed, and for example, the 12 rounds are ended when a total of five balls enter the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening 602. May be configured. In the first to eleventh rounds of the jackpot, a game is performed in such a manner that a ball is hit into the first specific winning opening 65a by right-handing, and therefore, in many cases, a ball is placed above the storage unit 920 before the start of the 12th round. The upper limit number (4) is stored. That is, when the 12 rounds are started and the ball storage unit 920 is opened, the stored 4 balls simultaneously flow into the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602, so immediately after the start of the 12 round. Then, four balls enter the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening 65a, second specific winning opening 650a, and general winning opening 602). Therefore, the remaining one ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, thereby completing the 12 rounds (a total of five balls are the second specific winning opening). 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602), so that the opportunity to enter the second specific winning opening 650a can be limited to one ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a twelve round game with a sense of tension. In addition, in the first to eleventh rounds of the jackpot, it is hoped that the balls do not flow into the storage device 600 as much as possible (that is, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 becomes 12 instead of the upper limit number of 4). You can play a jackpot game (hoping for the round). Therefore, the game can be performed while giving a sense of tension even during the jackpot, so that the jackpot is prevented from being simply performed as a work for obtaining a prize ball (suppression), and the player's jackpot game Can be improved.

  Note that the number of balls entering the specific winning opening and the upper limit number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920, which are conditions for ending the 12 rounds, may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the end condition of the 12 rounds may be equal to or less than the number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920. Thereby, it is possible to make the player play the game by strongly requesting that the ball is not stored in the storage device 600 by the start of the 12th round. Conversely, the upper limit number of balls that can be stored in the ball storage unit 920 may be reduced. Thereby, even if the upper limit number of balls are stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 by the start of the 12th round, the opportunity to make the ball enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round is provided a plurality of times. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to shift to the special symbol change state, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In this modification, in the twelfth round of the jackpot F, the effect image shown in FIG. 76 is displayed when the ball storage unit 920 is opened, but the effect during the jackpot is limited to this. is not. For example, it may be configured to notify whether it is the jackpot E or the jackpot F based on the result of the effect performed up to the eleventh round of the jackpot. More specifically, for example, in each of the first to eleventh rounds, an effect may be performed in which the ally of justice and the monster fight. Then, if the ally of justice wins by 11 rounds, it is notified that the victory is the jackpot F, and if the ally of justice is defeated, it may be notified that the ally is the jackpot E. That is, when the ally of justice wins, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round, so that the player can be made aware that it is a chance to shift to the state in which the special symbol is definitely changed. This allows the player to more interestingly observe the result of the effect performed at the jackpot.

  It is to be noted that there is a variation in the production contents, and the production contents in which the ally of justice has a high degree of expectation of winning (easy to be selected in the case of the jackpot F) and the suspicion that the ally of justice is likely to lose (in the case of the big hit E Effect content that is easily selected). For example, if the ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special attack, or if the ally of the enemy evades the attack of the enemy, the expectation of winning will be increased, and the attack of the justice will fall off, If an enemy attacks with a special technique, the possibility of defeat may be increased. As a result, it is possible to predict not only the result of whether or not the ally of justice wins, but also the result of the production flow up to victory or defeat. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  The content of the production performed up to the eleventh round is not limited to the production in which the ally of justice and the monster fight as described above, but can suggest an advantageous jackpot F and a jackpot E which is more disadvantageous than the jackpot F. Any mode may be used. For example, if the boy character 710 performs an effect of searching for a treasure and can find the treasure by the eleventh round, it may be configured so that the jackpot F is notified. It may be configured to display an effect of eating a large gluttony, and to notify the user of the jackpot F if the user finishes eating all the provided food.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the storage device 600 having a unique configuration not provided in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 600 is provided. It may be. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and the conditions under which the storage valve 607a is opened, the advantages when the storage valve 607a is opened, and the disadvantages when the ball is right-hit in the closed state. May be configured to display an image (explanatory image) that explains. Thereby, the player can easily understand the gaming properties. Further, the back type on which the explanation image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. Thereby, a player who is accustomed to the game with the pachinko machine 10 and sufficiently understands the game characteristics can change to the back type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In this modification, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 are both treated as winning openings for obtaining a jackpot prize ball. The winning opening 602 may be treated as a normal winning opening. That is, as a termination condition of each round of the jackpot, each of the rounds of the jackpot ends when ten or more balls enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. (The number of balls entering the winning opening 602 is not involved). Thereby, the more the ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the twelve rounds of the jackpot, the more profitable to the player, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the present modification, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball can easily flow into the storage device 600, the ball is hardly inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a, and the storage device 600 is moved to the storage device 600. By adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball is less likely to flow, the ball is configured to easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, the ratio of shifting to the specially-changed state of the special symbol can be changed after the end of the jackpot, but the ratio of shifting to the certainly-changed state of the special symbol is changed. The method is not limited to this. For example, instead of keeping the ratio of the ball flowing into the storage device 600 constant, the positive variable ball opening 654 and the normal ball opening 655 are provided inside the second variable winning device 650 as in the first embodiment. It may be configured. Then, the configuration may be such that the clerk of the hall can adjust the ratio of the ball that has flowed into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 to the positive changing ball opening 654 and the normal ball opening 655. More specifically, for example, the second variable prize device 650 in the present modification is replaced with the second variable prize device 650 (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment, The shaft 650e is eliminated. Then, for example, a nail may be hammered at a branch position between the guide flow path 652 and the guide flow path 653 (that is, above a position where the switching shaft 650e is provided in the first embodiment). In addition, the nailing position may be, for example, a distance about the radius of a sphere from the place where the switching shaft 650e was provided in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15). In other words, the position may be a position where the sphere flowing down the guiding flow path 651 can contact (collide), and a position where the sphere can flow down to the guiding flow path 652 and the guiding flow path 653. With such a configuration, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the right, the game ball flowing down the guiding flow path 651 can easily contact (collide) with the left side surface of the nail. Therefore, the ball is likely to be repelled leftward in front view. Therefore, the ball easily flows into the guiding flow path 652 provided on the left side in the front view in the downstream of the second variable winning device 650, so that the ball easily enters the surely changing ball opening 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right side, the special symbol can be easily changed to a certain state after the big hit. Conversely, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the left, the game ball flowing down the guiding flow path 651 can easily contact (collide) with the right side surface of the nail, so that the ball faces forward. It is easy to be repelled rightward. Therefore, the ball easily flows into the guiding flow path 653 provided on the left side in the front view in the downstream of the second variable winning device 650, so that the ball easily enters the certain-variable ball entrance 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right side, it is possible to make it difficult for the special symbol to be in a certain change state after the end of the big hit. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the ease of entering the probability changing entrance port 654 can be adjusted, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game corresponding to the business policy of each hall.

  Further, as another specific example in which the ratio of shifting to the special symbol change state after the end of the jackpot can be changed, the entrance portion of the storage device 600 is opened instead of the nails 921a and 921b in the present modification. A variable member that switches between the closed state and the closed state may be provided. Then, the variable member may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state while the power is on. In this case, the length of one cycle composed of the open state and the closed state is fixed (for example, 3 seconds), and the period between the open state and the closed state is determined. The ratio may be adjusted so that the hole can be adjusted. More specifically, for example, an operation means such as a dip switch that can be set in a plurality of states is provided. Then, for example, if the state of the switch indicates (00000000B), the configuration is such that the entrance of the storage device 600 is not set to the closed state. That is, since the entrance is always open, the game ball is set to be in a state in which it is most likely to flow into the storage device 600. Then, if the state of the switch indicates (11111111B), the entrance of the storage device 600 is always set to the closed state. That is, the state is set such that no ball flows into the storage device 600 at the jackpot, and the ball easily flows into the second specific winning opening 650a. When the dip switch is in another state (00000001B to 11111110B), the period in which the dip switch is in the closed state from (00000000B) to (11111111B) may be configured to be longer. In other words, the configuration may be such that the ball is more likely to enter the second specific winning opening 650a as heading toward (11111111B), and the probability of the special symbol being changed after the big hit is more easily set. With such a configuration, a hall where the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be used as a gaming machine having a special characteristic that is unlikely to be in a special symbol changing state is, for example, a closed state where the variable member is 0.5 seconds and a state where the variable member is 2.5 seconds. What is necessary is just to adjust the setting of the dip switch so as to repeat the open state. Conversely, in a hall where the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be used as a gaming machine having a special characteristic in which the special symbol is likely to change, for example, the variable member repeats a closed state of 2.5 seconds and an open state of 0.5 seconds. The dip switch settings can be adjusted as needed. Thereby, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the business policy of the hall, so that a highly versatile game corresponding to the business policy of each hall can be provided.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the guiding flow path 704 provided inside the storage device 700 is configured to be able to be closed by the storage valve 704a, and one ball can be stored above the storage valve 704a in the closed state. Was configured. Then, in a state where the balls are stored, the balls can easily enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702 or the out-opening (small-value winning opening) 703d, 703e having a lot of award balls to be paid out. When the storage valve 704a is opened, the ball is configured to easily enter the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 where the number of awarded balls to be paid out is small. The storage valve 704a is basically set to a closed state, and is configured to be opened when the player operates the release button 800. In other words, when the storage valve 704a is in the closed state, the ball may enter the general winning port (high value winning port) 702 and the out ports (small value winning port) 703d and 703e (prize). There is a possibility that a large number of balls can be obtained, but there is a possibility that a prize ball may not be obtained. However, if the storage valve 704a is in an open state, the ball flowing into the storage device 700 will be a general prize. A state where the ball can enter the mouth (medium value winning opening) 701 (a state in which a small amount of the prize ball can be stably obtained, though small) is obtained. Therefore, depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, the player can switch the gameplay of the pachinko machine 10, and each player selects a gameplay that suits his / her taste. It was configured to be able to play games.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, the configuration is such that up to two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. Further, when the storage valve 704a is closed, depending on the arrangement of the stored balls, the ball can easily enter the ball entrance opening (the ball can easily enter the general winning opening 702 or enter the outgoing opening). The ball is configured to change easily. That is, in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, by confirming the arrangement of the stored balls, it is easy to recognize whether or not the ball is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. It is configured to be able to.

  The only difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is that the internal structure of the storage device 700 is different. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the second embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this modification. As shown in FIG. 86, also in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the path provided on the right side of the game board 13. As described above, in this modification, up to two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. Details of the storage device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example in which the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 is closed and two balls are stored. As shown in FIG. 87, in the present modified example, the storage valve 704a is inclined so as to descend to the lower right in front view. For this reason, most of the spheres that first flow into the guide flow path 704 with the storage valve 704a closed are stationary with the inclination of the storage valve 704a biased to the right of the guide flow path 704. In addition, as shown in FIG. 87, the portion of the induction flow path 704 above the storage valve 704a is longer than in the second embodiment. In addition, the guide channel 704 does not have a width enough to arrange two balls horizontally. For this reason, when another ball flows into the guiding flow path 704 while one ball is stored on the right side inside the guiding flow path 704, in many cases, a new ball is added to the upper left side of the previously stored sphere. (A new ball is stored between the previously stored ball and the inner wall portion on the left side of the guide channel 704).

  In the storage state shown in FIG. 87 (a state in which the first stored ball is rightward and the second stored ball is leftwardly stored), the ball that subsequently flows into the storage device 700 is The second ball is likely to collide with the right side of the stored ball. Therefore, the traveling direction of the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 changes rightward due to the impact of the collision (contact) with the stored ball. That is, the ball flows into the guiding flow path 708 and enters one of the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e.

  As described above, in the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 87, even if the ball can flow into the storage device 700, the ball enters the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e. The player cannot get a prize ball because the ball is hit. That is, the storage state shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous for the player.

  Note that a ball entry sensor 704b that detects a ball when a ball is present on the near side in front view is provided on the upper left side of the storage valve 704a in the guide channel 704. The arrangement of the ball can be determined by the ball entry sensor 704b. More specifically, when the ball is continuously detected by the ball input sensor 704b for a predetermined period (for example, one minute), it is determined that the arrangement is as shown in FIG. By determining whether or not the arrangement is as shown in FIG. 87, an image prompting the player to press the release button 800 when a certain period of time has elapsed after the arrangement as shown in FIG. 87 (see FIG. 89) ) Can be displayed. As a result, an unfavorable arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 is likely to enter the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e continues for a long time, which is disadvantageous for the player. Can be suppressed.

  Next, another example in which two balls are stored will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In the example shown in FIG. 88, a game ball that first flows into the guiding flow path 704 with the storage valve 704a closed is stored leftward with respect to the guiding flow path 704, and a second guiding flow path is provided. The ball that has flowed into 704 is stored on the right side with respect to the guiding flow path 704. In the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 88, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 after that tends to collide (contact) with the left side surface of the second stored ball. Therefore, the falling direction of the sphere that collides (contacts) with the stored sphere is likely to change to the left, so that the sphere that flows down the guiding flow path 706 and has a large number of prize balls to be paid out (six out). It becomes easy to enter the winning opening (high value winning opening) 702.

  As described above, in the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 88, by causing the ball to flow into the storage device 700, the ball easily enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. This is an advantageous state for a player who can expect to obtain a prize ball every time a ball flows in.

  Note that the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is more difficult to realize than the storage state shown in FIG. 87 because the storage valve 704a is tilted downward and to the lower right. For example, when two spheres flow into the guiding flow path 704 almost simultaneously after the storage valve 704a is closed, or when the sphere first reaches the storage valve 704a, the sphere of the storage valve 704a or the guiding flow path 704 This can be realized, for example, when the second ball flows into the guide channel 704 while colliding with the inner wall portion and repelling in the upper left direction.

  Most of the cases where the storage valve 704a is closed are in the storage state shown in FIG. 87, but also in this modification, the storage valve 704a can be opened by operating the release button 800 as in the second embodiment. . That is, it is possible to reset the storage state and cause the storage device 700 to store the sphere in expectation of the storage state shown in FIG. 88 again. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with the goal of being in the storage state shown in FIG. 88, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, when the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is realized, a sense of accomplishment can be given to the player, and the prize is kept by continuing to enter the ball into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. It can give a sense of expectation that many balls can be obtained.

  In addition, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement is shifted from the ball-in sensor 704b (the ball does not block the front side of the ball-in sensor 704b). Therefore, even if the arrangement shown in FIG. In addition, it is possible to prevent (suppress) display of an image (see FIG. 89) that prompts the player to press the release button 800. Therefore, an advantageous state in which the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702 can be continued for a longer time.

  Next, an image (prompt display image) for urging the user to press the release button 800 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating an image (suggestion display image) that prompts the user to press the release button 800. The suggestion display image shown in FIG. 87 is an image displayed when it is determined that the unfavorable arrangement for the player has continued for a certain period of time (one minute). More specifically, when the ball is continuously detected by the ball input sensor 704b for one minute, it is determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is stable, and a suggestion display image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 89, when the display of the suggestion display image is set, the characters “disadvantaged” are displayed in the small area Ds2. By displaying these characters, the arrangement shown in FIG. 89 for the player is an unfavorable arrangement for the player (an arrangement in which the ball flowing into the storage device 700 is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e). Can be recognized. In addition, below the text “Unfavorable placement”, a text “Press button to reset placement !!” is displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to make the player recognize that pressing the release button 800 (operation) will eliminate the disadvantageous state.

  As described above, in the present modified example, the disadvantageous arrangement is notified to the player by the suggestion display image, and the disadvantageous arrangement is promoted by pressing (operation) of the release button 800, and the advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88). (The arrangement in which the ball shown is guided to the general winning opening 702) as shown in FIG. Therefore, the player can be more actively participated in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is configured to be displayed when a long time (1 minute) elapses in a state disadvantageous to the player (see FIG. 87). Alternatively, the storage valve 704a may be configured to switch to the open state (released state). That is, when the ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time (for example, one minute) by the ball input sensor 704b, it is determined that the ball is stable in an unfavorable state, and the arrangement of the ball stored in the storage device 700 is reset. For this purpose, the storage valve 704a may be configured to be opened. Thereby, even a beginner who does not fully understand the mechanism of the storage device 700 can be prevented from playing a game for a long time without noticing the disadvantageous state.

  In the present modification, the storage valve 704a is opened when the ball is continuously detected by the ball input sensor 704b for one minute. However, the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is reset (the storage valve 704a is opened). The time until) is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined. By shortening the time (for example, 30 seconds), the period during which the player is disadvantaged can be shortened. By increasing the time (for example, 5 minutes), the frequency at which the suggestion display image is displayed can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. The electrical configuration of the modification of the second embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the second embodiment in that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and that the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 is different. The difference is that the input ball sensor 228 is electrically connected to the input / output port 225. Other electrical configurations are the same as the electrical configurations in the second embodiment, and thus detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  The RAM 223 according to the modification of the second embodiment has at least a disadvantageous time counter 223 m and a suggestion display flag 223 n in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the second embodiment.

  The unfavorable time counter 223m is a counter used to determine the elapsed time since the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous to the player (the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e). The value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is incremented by one every time a ball is detected by the ball entry sensor 228 (S4503 in FIG. 92). In addition, in a state where the counter value is added (a state of a value larger than 0), if a ball is not detected by the ball input sensor 228, it is reset to 0 (S4508 in FIG. 92). In the present modification, when it is determined based on the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous for the player (the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e), Control is performed so that the suggestion display image described above (see FIG. 89) is displayed.

  The suggestion display flag 223n is a flag indicating whether or not the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is being displayed. If the suggestion display flag 223n is on, it indicates that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is being displayed, and if it is off, it indicates that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not being displayed. Is shown. The suggestion display flag 223n is turned on when the display of the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is set (see S4506 in FIG. 92). On the other hand, when a storage state command indicating that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state) is received, the storage valve is set to off (see S4607 in FIG. 94).

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification Example of Second Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to a modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the main processing (see FIG. 92) in this modified example, in each processing of S1801 to S1817, the same processing as each processing of S1801 to S1817 in the second embodiment is executed. Further, in the main process (see FIG. 92) in the present modification, when the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1810) ends, next, a release suggestion display process for displaying a suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is executed ( (S1821), the process proceeds to S1811. Details of the release suggestion display processing (S1821) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the release suggestion display processing (S1821). In this release suggestion display processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball entry sensor 228 is on (S4501). It is determined whether or not there is (S4502). If the suggestion display flag 223n is on (S4502: Yes), the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is already being displayed, and it is not necessary to determine whether to display the suggestion display image. This processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4502, when it is determined that the suggestion display flag 223n is off (S4502: No), the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m (S4503), and the updated disadvantageous time is updated. It is determined whether the value of the counter 223m is larger than 60000 (S4504). Here, the disadvantageous time counter 223m is updated by one (every 1 ms) each time the main processing (see FIG. 91) is performed, and therefore, the counter value 60000 corresponds to one minute.

  In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is equal to or less than 60000 (S4504: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is greater than 60000 (S4504: Yes), a suggestion for notifying the player that a long time (1 minute) has elapsed since the disadvantageous arrangement was performed. A display rear image change command for displaying a display is set (S4505), a suggestion display flag 223n is set to ON (S4506), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4501, if it is determined that the ball sensor 228 has not detected a ball (the ball sensor is off) (S4501: No), there is no disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87). Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S4507). When it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is greater than 0 as a result of the determination in S4507 (S4507: Yes), the counter value is initialized to 0 (S4508), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is 0 (S4507: No), the processing of S4508 is skipped because the disadvantageous time counter 223m has already been initialized and it is not necessary to initialize it again. Then, the present process ends.

  By executing the release suggestion display process (S1821), the player plays a game for a long time while the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 remains unfavorable to the player (see FIG. 87). Can be prevented.

  Next, a command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device according to the modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. In this command determination processing, in each processing of S1901 to S1919 and S1921, the same processing as each processing of S1901 to S1919 and S1921 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment is respectively executed. . Further, in the command determination process of this modification, in the process of S1921, if it is determined that the storage status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1921: Yes), an image corresponding to the received storage status command is displayed. Is executed (S1929), and this processing is ended.

  Details of the storage state command processing (S1929) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this storage state command processing (S1929). In the storage state command processing (S1929), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state command has notified that the storage valve 704a has been switched to the closed state (storage state) (S4601). If it is determined that the switching to the closed state (storage state) has been notified (S4601: Yes), the image corresponding to the closed state (see FIG. 63A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A display rear image change command for display is set (S4602), and the storage state flag 223k is set to ON to indicate that the storage valve 704a is closed (S4603), and the process proceeds to S4604. And migrate.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, if it is determined that the notification from the storage state command is not the closed state (storage state) (it has been notified that the state has been switched to the open state (released state)) (S4601: No) Next, a display back image change command for displaying an image (see FIG. 63 (b)) corresponding to the open state (released state) on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S4605), and the storage valve is set. The storage state flag 223k is set to off to indicate that the current state of 704a is the open state (released state) (S4606). Then, to indicate that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed, the suggestion display flag 223n is set to off (S4607), and the process shifts to S4604.

  In the processing of S4604 executed after the processing of S4603 or S4607, the flow-down time counter 223l is used to determine whether or not it is a ball ejection period from when the storage valve 704a is switched to when the ball is released. The counter value corresponding to one second is set (S4604), and the process ends. By executing the storage state command processing (S1931), the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be appropriately updated in association with the state of the storage valve 704a notified from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the second embodiment is configured so that two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. In addition, as the storage state when the ball is stored inside, at least the storage state shown in FIG. 87 and the storage state shown in FIG. 88 can be taken. These storage states differ from each other in the entrances into which the balls flowing into the storage device 700 are likely to enter. Further, since the inside of the storage device 700 is configured to be visible to the player, the storage state can be easily determined visually. Therefore, the player can be made to select whether or not it is better to reset the storage state by once setting the storage valve 704a to the open state.

  Further, an advantageous storage state (a storage state in which the ball easily enters the general winning opening 701 shown in FIG. 88) and an unfavorable storage state (a storage state in which the ball easily enters the out opening shown in FIG. 87) By providing the above, a game can be played in the expectation of an advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88). Then, even in the case of an unfavorable storage state (see FIG. 87), the storage state is reset by opening the storage valve 704a, and the game is aimed at the advantageous storage state again (see FIG. 88). Can be performed. In addition, the advantageous storage state can give the player a sense of accomplishment, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained by continuing to enter the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. You can have a sense of expectation for what you can do.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the configuration is such that two spheres can be stored inside the storage device 700, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an internal structure that can store three or more spheres may be used. . In this case, if the ball entry sensor 228 is provided near the upper end of the guide flow path 704 on the left side, it can be easily determined whether or not there is a disadvantageous arrangement in which the ball is guided to the outlet.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, by providing the incoming ball sensor 228 near the upper end of the guide channel 704 on the left side, is the arrangement of the balls stored inside the storage device 700 disadvantageous to the player? Although it was configured to be able to determine whether or not the ball was inserted, the mounting position of the ball entry sensor 228 is not limited thereto. For example, it may be disposed near the upper end of the guide channel 704 on the right side. That is, when the balls stored in the storage device 700 have the arrangement shown in FIG. 87, the stored balls are not detected by the ball input sensor 228, but when the arrangement shown in FIG. The ball entry sensor 228 may be arranged so that the upper ball among the stored balls is detected by the ball entry sensor 228. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball is arranged so as to easily enter the general winning opening 702 (see FIG. 88). Therefore, based on the detection result of the ball entry sensor 228, for example, when the ball is continuously detected by the ball entry sensor 228 for 5 seconds or more, it can be determined that the ball is stationary in the arrangement shown in FIG. . Therefore, based on the fact that the stored ball has the advantageous arrangement shown in FIG. 88, the fact that the arrangement is advantageous for the player is notified that the current state is advantageous for the player. Can be. As a notification method, for example, in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81, a character “Advantaged placement” and a character “Right-handed with a great chance!” Are displayed. May be. This allows the player to easily recognize that the present state is in an advantageous state, so that the release button 800 is erroneously pressed (operated), and the ball stored in the storage device 700 is caused to flow down. (Resetting the advantageous arrangement) can be suppressed.

  Further, the number of the incoming ball sensors 228 is not limited to one, and a plurality of them may be provided. More specifically, for example, a ball entry sensor 228 may be provided near the upper end of the guide flow path 704 on the right side and on the left side. Accordingly, when the sensor provided on the left side continuously detects a sphere for 5 seconds, for example, it can be determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is stable. In addition, when the sensor provided on the right side continuously detects a sphere for 5 seconds, for example, it can be determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 is stable. Therefore, in the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 (disadvantageous arrangement for the player whose ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e), the above-described suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed to play the game. This can encourage the user to reset the disadvantageous arrangement. In the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 (an arrangement advantageous for a player whose ball is guided to the general winning opening 702), an image indicating that the arrangement is advantageous for the player (for example, “Advantage”) An image in which the character “arranged” and the character “right-handed and have a great chance!” Are displayed in the small area Ds2) to recognize that the current state is advantageous, and Motivation can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example, the storage valve 704a is configured to be inclined downward in the lower right direction, but the inclination may be reversed. This facilitates the realization of a storage state (see FIG. 88) that is advantageous to the player, so that the player can more actively aim at the storage device 700 and launch a ball. Further, the inclination formed by the storage valve 704a may be eliminated. Thereby, it is possible to completely determine whether the storage state is an advantageous storage state or an unfavorable storage state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, the trigger for opening the storage valve 704a is only pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but another trigger may be provided. For example, the storage state may be reset periodically, such as a configuration in which the storage valve 704a is set to an open state during a big hit. If the opportunity to reset the storage state is completely left to the player, once the advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88) is reached, the game is continued while maintaining the storage state, and the player is not allowed to enter the hall. It may be profitable. On the other hand, if the storage state is periodically reset, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the advantageous storage state from continuing for a long time, and it is possible to prevent a disadvantage to the hole.

  In the present modification, the state of the storage valve 704a is switched based on pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. This allows each player to start a game during a period in which the storage valve 704a is in a state that suits his / her taste.

  Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of a lottery that is performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is basically configured to be in a closed state (storage state), and is configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not to switch to an open state (released state) once a minute. You may. Further, when the lottery is won, for example, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds. Thereby, when the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is an unfavorable arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the balls are easily guided to the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e, the lottery is won. This allows the player to play the game in the hope that the storage valve 704a is opened. On the other hand, when the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is an advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88) in which the balls are easily guided to the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702, the storage valve 704a is opened. The game can be performed in the hope that the game will not be lost in the lottery. Therefore, since different lottery results can be expected according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, novel gaming properties can be provided. Furthermore, the lottery probability of the lottery for determining whether to set the storage valve 704a to the open state (canceled state) or not may be configured so that a clerk of the hall or the like can adjust the lottery probability. Accordingly, when the player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict a table having a good lottery probability and select a table. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit and the like when setting the lottery probability of the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting the platform before starting the game. .

  In the present modification, since the storage device 700 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general game machine is provided, an effect explaining the playability of the storage device 700 may be provided. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (explanation image) for explaining the conditions under which the storage valve 704a is opened, the advantages and disadvantages when the storage valve 704a is opened, and the like. May be configured. Thereby, the player can easily understand the gaming properties. Further, the back type on which the explanation image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. Thereby, a player who is accustomed to the game with the pachinko machine 10 and sufficiently understands the game characteristics can change to the back type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only during the period in which the release button 800 is pressed (operated). However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, when the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be received during the predetermined period during which the storage valve 704a is open. This eliminates the need to keep pressing the release button 800 to keep the storage valve 704a open. Further, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), it may be configured to switch between the closed state (reserved state) and the open state (released state). With such a configuration, the release button 800 may be operated only when the state is to be switched, so that the number of times of operation by the player can be reduced. Further, an operation means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating the release button 800 may be provided opposite to the release button 800. Even with such a configuration, similarly to the present embodiment, it is possible for each player to select a game characteristic that suits his / her taste.

  In this modification, when a certain period of time (one minute) has elapsed since the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous to the player, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed to release the suggestion to the player. Although the configuration is such that the pressing (operation) of the button 800 is prompted, the method of pressing (operating) the release button 800 is not limited to this. For example, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 may be integrally configured (that is, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 are collectively formed as one operation button, and the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 May be electrically connected to each other). If it is determined that the ball has been continuously detected by the ball input sensor 704b for a certain period (one minute) or more (that is, the ball has been disadvantageously arranged for the player shown in FIG. 87), the frame button 22 is pressed. May be configured to make it easier to select a variation type in which the effect develops. Thus, when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) to develop the effect, the storage valve 704a can be simultaneously set to the open state (released state). In general, the player observes the result of the variable effect that informs whether or not a jackpot is most interesting. Therefore, when the variable effect in which the effect develops by pressing the frame button 22 is executed, the pressing of the frame button 22 is surely performed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the user is being prompted. Therefore, the disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87) can be more reliably reset.

  In the present modified example, the first specific winning opening 65a is provided below the first entrance opening 64 so that the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a by left-handing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, similarly to the first embodiment, a first specific winning opening 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700. This allows the ball to flow into the first specific winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 simply by right-handing in the special game state (big hit state), so that the prize ball in the special game state (big hit state) can be obtained. You can do more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  In each of the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 and the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 are provided with respective storage valves by sliding to the front side in front view and the back side in front view. Although the channel is closed and the sphere can be stored in the upper portion thereof, the operation of the storage valve is not limited to this. For example, in the closed state, the storage valve is configured to close the flow path by standing upright with respect to the inner wall portion of the flow path, and in the open state, the storage valve falls in the downstream direction of the flow path, The flow path may be configured to allow passage of a sphere. Further, the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a do not need to completely close the induction flow path 607 and the induction flow path 704, respectively. For example, when the width of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is reduced and the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a protrudes toward the near side in a front view, the state in which the induction flow path 607 or the induction flow path 704 is partially opened You may comprise so that it may become. Also, the width of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be set so that the width of the open portion is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. Thereby, the price of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. In addition, when the guiding flow path 607 or the guiding flow path 704 is set to the open state (release state) by the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a, it is not necessary to completely open the guiding flow path 607 or the guiding flow path 704. . That is, a part of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may protrude into the induction flow path 607 or the induction flow path 704. Further, the width of the open portion in the guide channel 607 or the guide channel 704 may be configured to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. Thereby, in the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a, the operation range between the open state and the closed state can be narrowed, so that the power consumed for switching the state of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. it can. In addition, if the width of the open portion is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the ball, the inflowing ball may come into contact with the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a, and the downward momentum may be shaved. (It can be hardly stored (held) at the position of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a). Therefore, even with this configuration, the same operation as the above embodiments can be realized. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the sphere can be stored on the guiding flow path 607 and the guiding flow path 704 and a state in which the sphere flowing into the guiding flow path 607 and the guiding flow path 704 flows down. .

  In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, both ends of the ball entrances provided in each storage device are set as out ports, but the out ports at both ends may be omitted. Even if the out port is abolished and the inner wall is used, the ball can be made to enter another entrance port. Also, by eliminating the out ports at both ends, the storage device can be made more compact.

  In each of the above embodiments, the plurality of out ports are provided inside the storage device, but instead of the out ports provided inside the storage device, the out ports 66 provided below the game board 13 in a front view are provided. (See FIG. 2). As a result, the number of the outgoing ports can be reduced to one, so that it is sufficient to detect only the number of the balls entering the out port 66 in order to grasp the number of the ejected balls. Therefore, the number of detection switches for detecting the entry of a ball can be reduced, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the number of the balls stored in the upper portion of the storage valve is one (first embodiment, a modification of the first embodiment, and the second embodiment), or two balls (a modification of the second embodiment). ), But is not limited to this, and may be configured to store three or more spheres. Further, when storing a plurality of spheres, the spheres may be stored vertically or may be arranged side by side. In this case, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve may be configured to be countable. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, five balls may be stored above the storage valve 607a, and the storage valve 607a may be opened when the fifth ball is stored. . As a result, immediately after the storage valve 607a is opened, five balls simultaneously flow down to the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602, so that a large amount (5 × 15) of the winning balls is paid out in a short time. Can receive. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball is to be stored in the storage device 600, so that the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  In the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be configured to be closed while the power is off. That is, when the cutoff of the power supply is detected, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, and when the power is turned on, the state of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a at the time of the power cutoff is returned. You may. Thus, it is possible to suppress the illegality of causing the sphere to enter the storage device 600 or the storage device 700 while the power is cut off, and immediately acquiring the prize ball when the power is restored.

  In each of the above embodiments, the entrance (the winning opening) into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device enters is fixed by the guiding flow path through which the ball has flowed (that is, the arrangement of each entrance) Is fixed), but is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the position of the entrance is changed periodically or randomly. More specifically, a well-known clune or the like may be provided on the bottom surface of the storage device, and each winning port (ball entry port) may be provided in an annular shape on the clune. Then, by rotating the clune, a winning port (ball entry port) into which the ball flowing down each guide channel flows may have randomness. Thereby, it is possible for the player to watch interestingly the entrance where the ball that has flowed into the storage device enters. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the inside of the storage device is configured to be visible, but may be configured so that the inside of the storage device is difficult to visually recognize from the front.

  In the above embodiments, the opening and closing of the storage valve are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. Thus, the processing load on MPU 201 of main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute a variable effect selection process, a special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are main processes related to the game, without delay.

  In each of the above embodiments, when a ball enters the entrance (winning opening), a number of prize balls according to the type of the entrance (winning opening) are paid out. , But is not limited to this. For example, the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine of a type in which a prize ball is not given as a game value, such as an enclosed pachinko machine, and for example, a prepaid card used for a game according to a type of a ball entrance (prize opening) into which a ball enters. You may comprise so that a balance may be increased.

  All or some of the embodiments described above may be combined.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group> (Award balls are given to the balls that enter the holding device at the time of the big hit)
A specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which game balls can flow, and ball entry means provided at a position where game balls flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball; Based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means, based on the game ball, flowing down the second flow path, a specific privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the game ball flows down, A first distribution state in which game balls flowing into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which game balls are more easily distributed to the second flow path as compared to the first distribution state. It is provided with a flow distribution means which can be changed to a distribution state, and a setting means which can set the state of the flow distribution means to at least the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to a game state. A gaming machine A1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a winning is achieved based on a gaming ball winning a specific winning opening. In addition, there are known a plurality of winning ports in which a prize ball is paid out when a ball wins, in addition to a specific winning port. Some of the conventional gaming machines can change the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to a direction in which a player ejects a game ball by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning opening. (For example, JP-A-2001-129177).

  However, since the prize balls that can be obtained by winning are generally larger than the prize balls that are paid out by winning in the winning opening, the player usually determines whether or not the prize balls are to be won. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. That is, it was common for a player to continue to launch a game ball in the same direction until a hit was achieved. Therefore, when the player launches a ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win in the same winning opening, and the number of awarded balls to be paid out may be little changed. That is, there is a risk that the game will be monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the specific flow path branches into the first flow path and the second flow path. A case where a ball is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and a game ball flows down the second flow path based on a game ball entering the ball entry means. The specific privilege which is advantageous to the player as compared with the above is provided by the predetermined privilege providing means. A first distribution state in which game balls flowing into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which game balls are more easily distributed to the second flow path as compared to the first distribution state. At this time, the flow channel distribution means is changed. The state of the flow path distribution means is changed by the setting means to at least a first distribution state and a second distribution state according to the game state.

  Thereby, in the game state in which the channel distribution means is set to the first distribution state, a specific privilege is easily given by the game balls flowing into the specific channel, and the game is set to the second distribution state. In the state, it is difficult to give a specific privilege. Therefore, even if the player launches the game ball toward the specific flow path, the privilege given according to the game state can be made different, so that the game can be prevented from being monotonous. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine A1, a predetermined ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and a predetermined ball entry based on the game ball entering the normal ball entry means A gaming machine A2, comprising: a game value providing means for providing a game value, wherein the specific privilege providing means provides a game value greater than the predetermined game value as the specific privilege.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, the normal ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and the predetermined value is given by the game value providing means based on the game ball entering the normal ball entry means. A game value is given. A game value greater than a predetermined game value is provided as a specific benefit by the specific privilege provision means.

  Thereby, in the gaming state in which the channel distribution means is set to the first distribution state, more games are played when the game balls flow into the specific flow path than in the game state in which the channel distribution means is set to the second distribution state. It's easier to get value. Therefore, the game value given according to the game state can be made different, so that there is an effect that the game can be prevented from being monotonous.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and the gaming state is changed to a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. Game state setting means for setting the state of the flow path distribution means to the first distribution state based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means. Gaming machine A3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the gaming state is changed to the specific lottery result by the lottery means, and the gaming state is set to the gaming state setting means. Is set to Based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the state of the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means.

  Thereby, when the gaming state is set to the privilege gaming state, in addition to the advantage being provided to the player by the privilege gaming state, more gaming value is given by flowing the gaming ball into the specific flow path. It is easy to be. Therefore, the privilege gaming state can be set to a more advantageous state for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's sense of expectation for the privilege game state can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A3, variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first ball entry state in which game balls can enter and a second ball entry state in which game balls are less likely to enter than in the first ball entry state. And a specific value providing means for providing a specific game value based on a game ball entering the variable ball input means, and based on the bonus game state being set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine A4 comprising: variable control means for changing the variable ball-in means to the first ball-in state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3. That is, the variable ball entry means is changed between a first ball entry state in which game balls can enter and a second ball entry state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first ball entry state. A specific game value is provided by the specific value providing means based on a game ball entering the ball entering means. Based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the variable control means changes the variable ball entry means to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  This allows the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means in the privilege game state, so that a specific game value can be obtained by launching a ball aiming at the variable ball entry means. Therefore, in the privilege game state, the player can acquire more game value, so that there is an effect that the player's expectation of the privilege game state can be further increased.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, when the game ball enters the normal ball entry means, the game value assigning means assigns a predetermined amount of game media as the predetermined game value, The gaming machine A5, wherein, when a game ball enters the ball entry means, the specific privilege provision means provides a greater amount of game media than the predetermined amount as the specific privilege.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4. That is, when a game ball enters the normal ball entry means, a predetermined amount of game media is provided as a predetermined game value by the game value provision means. When the game ball enters the ball entry means by the specific privilege provision means, a larger amount of game media than a predetermined amount is provided as a specific benefit.

  This allows the player to play the game with the provided game medium, and thus allows the player to play the game for a longer time. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the variable control means changes the variable ball-in means from the second ball-in state to the first ball-in state based on the bonus state being set by the game state setting section. The game state setting means sets the game state different from the privilege game state based on the variable control means changing the variable ball-in means by the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5. That is, based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the variable ball-in means is changed from the second ball-in state to the first ball-in state by the variable control means a predetermined number of times. A game state different from the privilege game state is set by the game state setting means based on the variable control means changing the variable ball-in means a predetermined number of times.

  In this way, in one privilege gaming state, the player is given a predetermined number of opportunities to enter the ball into the variable ball entry means, so that the player can acquire more specific game value. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's sense of expectation for the privilege game state can be further increased.

  The gaming machine A7 according to any one of the gaming machines A4 to A6, wherein the specific value assigning means assigns a specific amount of game media as the specific game value.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A4 to A6, a specific amount of game media is provided as a specific game value by the specific value providing means, so that the player is provided by the provided game medium. Can play the game. Therefore, since the player can play the game for a longer time, the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the game machine may include a guiding flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the specific flow path, and the variable ball-in means may include the specific flow A gaming machine A8 characterized by being provided at a position where a game ball that has not flowed into a road can enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the game ball is guided to the specific channel by the guide channel, and the game ball flows to the specific channel among the game balls flowing into the guide channel. Since the variable ball entry means is provided at a position where game balls that have not flowed in can enter the ball, the player simply launches the game ball into the guide channel in the privilege game state, and the specific channel and the variable ball A ball can be flowed into the means. Therefore, in the privilege game state, a specific privilege and a specific game value can be acquired, so that the merit of the player in the privilege game state can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's sense of expectation for the privilege game state can be further increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, the game machine further includes a counting means for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball-in means, and the variable control means includes a predetermined number of balls counted by the counting means. The variable ball entry means is changed to the second ball entry state based on the fact that the bonus game state has been established when a specific condition is satisfied in the bonus game state. Setting the gaming state different from the state, wherein the setting means sets the flow path allocating means in the at least a predetermined period from when the privilege gaming state is set to when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being set to one distribution state.

  According to the gaming machine A9, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A4 to A8. That is, the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means is counted by the counting means. The variable ball entry means is changed to the second ball entry state by the variable control means based on the fact that at least the number counted by the counting means has reached the predetermined number. When the specific condition is satisfied in the bonus gaming state, a gaming state different from the bonus gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. At least for a predetermined period from when the privilege gaming state is set to when the specific condition is satisfied, the setting means sets the flow path distributing means to the first distribution state.

  As a result, the opportunity for the player to acquire a specific game value can be limited to the time when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. Therefore, before the predetermined number is reached, more game balls flow into the specific channel, and a game can be performed during the privilege game state in the hope that the specific privilege will be given more times. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the privilege game state of the player can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A9, the ball entry detecting means for detecting that a game ball has entered the normal ball entry means, and the ball entry detection means causes the normal ball entry means to enter the normal ball entry state during the privilege game state. And a notifying unit for executing a predetermined notification when it is detected that a game ball has entered the game machine A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A3 to A9, it is detected by the ball entry detecting means that a game ball has entered the normal ball entry means, and the bonus game is provided by the ball entry detecting means. When it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal ball entry means during the state, a predetermined notification is executed by the notification means, so that the flow path distribution means is set despite the bonus game state being set. When a failure that is not set to the first distribution state occurs, the failure can be recognized by a player or a store clerk by a predetermined notification. Therefore, there is an effect that the malfunction can be quickly eliminated.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the first flow path is provided at a position where a game ball flowing into the specific flow path is more likely to flow than the second flow path, The flow path distributing means opens the first flow path in the first distribution state, and closes the first flow path in the second distribution state. The gaming machine A11, wherein the gaming machine A11 is provided at a position where a game ball flowing into the specific channel is easily guided in a state where the channel is closed.

  According to the gaming machine A11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10. That is, the first flow path is provided at a position where game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path are more likely to flow than the second flow path. The first flow path is opened in the first distribution state by the flow path distribution means, and the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state. The second flow path is provided at a position where game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path while the first flow path is closed are easily guided.

  This makes it possible to change the flow path through which the game balls flowing into the specific flow path flow, depending on whether or not the first flow path is closed. Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously launched toward the specific flow path, a specific privilege is given or not given, so that it is possible to suppress the game from being monotonous. .

  In the gaming machine A11, when the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state, the flow path distribution means can hold up to a predetermined upper limit number of game balls upstream of the closed position. In the second flow path, when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the held game balls contact the game balls flowing into the specific flow path. The gaming machine A12 is provided at a position where it easily flows in based on a change in the downflow direction.

  According to the gaming machine A12, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A11. That is, when the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state, the flow path distribution means holds the game balls up to a predetermined upper limit number upstream of the closed position. In a state in which a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the held game balls and the game balls flowing into the specific flow path come into contact with each other and the flowing direction changes. The second flow path is provided at a position where it can easily flow.

  As a result, even if the game ball is continuously launched toward the specific flow path, a specific privilege is given or not given, so that the effect that the game becomes monotonous can be suppressed. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, a display unit that displays an image, and a display control unit that controls the display unit to display an image according to a state of the flow path distribution unit is provided. A gaming machine A13 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the display is controlled by the display control means so that an image corresponding to the state of the flow path distributing means is displayed on the display means. In addition, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the state of the flow path distribution unit.

  In the gaming machine A13, the display control means is configured to set the specific flow path when the game ball flows into the specific flow path based on the setting of the flow path distribution means in the first distribution state by the setting means. A gaming machine A14 for displaying an image indicating that a privilege is easily given.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A13, when the game ball flows into the specific flow path, it is specified based on the setting of the flow path distribution means by the setting means to the first distribution state. An image suggesting that the privilege is easily given is displayed by the display control means. Thereby, even if the player is a beginner, there is an effect that the merits when the game ball flows into the specific flow path can be easily understood.

<Characteristic B group> (Switch the flow path of another ball with the ball held in the holding device)
A specific flow path branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow, and a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball. First ball entry means, a first provision means for providing a first game value based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and a game flowing down the second flow path A second ball entry means provided at a position where a ball can enter, and the first game provided by the first provision means based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means A second assigning means for assigning a second game value different from the value, a first position at which at least one game ball flowing into the first channel can be held on the first channel, and a first position thereof. The game ball that has flowed into the first flow path as compared to the position is variable to a second position where it is difficult for the game ball to be held on the first flow path. A step, and switching means for switching the variable means from the first position to the second position based on establishment of a predetermined condition, wherein the variable means holds a game ball by holding the game ball. A gaming machine B1 for facilitating a game ball to be guided to the second flow path by a ball.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a winning is achieved based on a gaming ball winning a specific winning opening. In addition, there are known a plurality of winning ports in which a prize ball is paid out when a ball wins, in addition to a specific winning port. Some of the conventional gaming machines can change the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to a direction in which a player ejects a game ball by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning opening. (For example, JP-A-2001-129177).

  However, since the prize balls that can be obtained by winning are generally larger than the prize balls that are paid out by winning in the winning opening, the player usually determines whether or not the prize balls are to be won. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. That is, it was common for a player to continue to launch a game ball in the same direction until a hit was achieved. Therefore, when the player launches a ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win in the same winning opening, and the number of awarded balls to be paid out may be little changed. That is, there is a risk that the game will be monotonous.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the specific flow path is branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least the first flow path and the second flow path. A first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball, and the first imparting means sets the first ball entry means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. Game value. Further, a second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, the first providing means A second game value different from the first game value to be provided is provided by the second providing means. A first position at which at least one game ball flowing into the first flow path can be held on the first flow path; and a game ball flowing into the first flow path as compared to the first position on the first flow path. The variable means is changed to the second position which is difficult to be held. The switching means switches the variable means from the first position to the second position based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. Here, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball is easily guided to the second flow path by the held game ball.

  Thereby, even if the player keeps firing the game ball toward the specific flow path, the ball entry means in which the game ball flowing into the specific flow path enters depending on whether the predetermined condition is satisfied or not. Can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be changed between the first game value and the second game value depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that a monotonous game can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first game value provided by the first providing means has a larger game value than the second game value provided by the second providing means. Gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, the first game value provided by the first provision means is configured to be larger than the second game value provided by the second provision means. In a state where the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to make the player feel that the game ball is desired to flow into the specific flow path. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from being monotonous.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and setting a bonus gaming state advantageous to a player based on a lottery result by the lottery means being a specific lottery result. Game state setting means, a variable ball entry state that can be changed to a first entry state in which game balls can enter, and a second entry state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first entry state. Means, a specific value providing means for providing a specific game value based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball input means, and based on the privilege state being set by the game state setting means. A variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, wherein the switching means is set to the privilege game state by the game state setting means. Based on the variable Gaming machine B3, characterized in that the stage from the first position in which switching to the second position.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the gaming state is changed to the specific lottery result by the lottery means, and the gaming state is set to the gaming state setting means. Is set to The variable ball entry means is changed between a first ball entry state in which game balls can enter and a second ball entry state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first ball entry state, and the variable ball entry is made. A specific game value is provided by the specific value providing means based on the game ball entering the means. Based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the variable ball-in means is changed to the first ball-in state until the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable control means.

  Thereby, in addition to the fact that a player can acquire a specific game value by entering a game ball into the variable ball entry means in the privilege game state, a game ball enters the first ball entry means. The player can acquire the first game value. Therefore, since the merit of the player in the privilege game state can be increased, there is an effect that the player's expectation of the privilege game state can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine B3, the game ball is provided with a guiding flow path capable of guiding the game ball to the specific flow path, and the variable ball-in means means that a game ball that has flowed down the guiding flow path without flowing into the specific flow path. A gaming machine B4 provided at a position where a ball can enter.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3. That is, the game ball is guided to the specific channel by the guide channel. A variable ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the guide channel without flowing into the specific channel can enter.

  Thus, the player can cause the ball to flow into the specific channel and the variable ball entry means only by launching the game ball into the guide channel in the privilege game state. Therefore, in the privilege game state, the first game value and the specific game value can be acquired, so that the merit of the player in the privilege game state can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's sense of expectation for the privilege game state can be further increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a third flow path which is one of the plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path, and a position where a game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter the ball. A third ball entry means provided and a third game value different from the second game value given by the second giving means based on a game ball entering the third ball entry means. A third granting means for granting a game value, wherein the variable means holds a game ball and places the game ball on the second flow path and the third flow path by the game ball held by the holding means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by facilitating guidance.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4. A third flow path is provided as one of a plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path. A third ball entry means is provided at a position where game balls flowing down the third flow path can enter the ball. A third game value different from the second game value provided by the second providing means is provided by the third providing means based on the game ball entering the third ball input means. When the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball is guided to the second channel and the third channel by the held game ball.

  Thereby, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the state in which the game ball flowing into the specific flow path can enter both the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means Become. In other words, since the player can acquire one of the second game value and the third game value having different game values, the game value acquired by the player can have randomness. . On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the second position, the first providing value is provided by the first providing means by the game balls flowing into the specific flow path entering the first ball input means. Therefore, the game value obtained by the player can be stabilized. Therefore, different playability can be realized depending on whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5, the third game value provided by the third providing means has a larger game value than the first game value provided by the first providing means. Gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B5, the third gaming value provided by the third providing means has a larger gaming value than the first gaming value provided by the first providing means. Since the game ball is held by the variable means, it can be expected that the game ball flows down the third flow path. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interestingly observe the traveling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5 or B6, when the game ball is held on the first flow path, the variable means may be configured such that the game ball that has flowed into at least the specific flow path as an arrangement of the held game ball is the second ball. The first arrangement that can be easily guided to the flow path and the second arrangement that can be easily guided to the third flow path as compared to the first arrangement can be held. Gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines B5 or B6. That is, when a game ball is held on the first flow path by the variable means, at least the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided to the second flow path as an arrangement of the held game ball. 1 and the second arrangement, which is easier to be guided to the third flow path than the first arrangement.

  As a result, there is an effect that the player can determine the flow path into which the game balls easily flow by merely checking the arrangement of the game balls.

  In the gaming machine B7, a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first disposition, and an effect for executing a specific effect indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means. A gaming machine B8 comprising an execution unit.

  According to the gaming machine B8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B7. That is, the determination means determines whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement, and a specific effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination means is executed by the effect execution means. This has the effect that the player can more easily determine the flow path into which the game ball easily flows.

  In any one of the gaming machines B5 to B8, an adjusting means capable of adjusting a ratio of a game ball flowing into the specific flow path to the second flow path and the third flow path is provided. Gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, the ratio of the game balls flowing into the specific flow path flowing into the second flow path and the third flow path is adjusted by the adjusting means. Since the adjustment is performed, a gaming machine to which the second privilege is easily given or a gaming machine to which the third privilege is easily given according to the business policy of the hall can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily adjusted according to the business policy of each hall.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the game machine includes operation means operable by a player, and detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means, and the switching means controls the operation on the operation means by the detection means. A gaming machine B10 wherein the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position based on the detection.

  According to the gaming machine B10, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects obtained by any of the gaming machines B1 to B9. That is, the operation on the operation means is detected by the detection means. The variable unit is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching unit based on detection of an operation on the operating unit by the detection unit.

  This allows the player to switch whether or not the game ball that has flowed down to the specific flow path to the first ball entry means can be switched, so that each player matches his or her own taste. There is an effect that the state can be set.

  The gaming machine B11 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, wherein the variable means is capable of holding only one gaming ball on the first flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, only one game ball is held on the first flow path by the variable means, so that the variable means is changed to the first position. When the player quits the game, the game ball remaining on the first flow path can be minimized by being held by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the player has lost when quitting the game.

<Characteristic C group> (Adjust the proportion of balls entering the holding device to change the probability of change)
A specific flow path branched at least into a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow, and a first incoming ball provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball Means, a first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and a game ball flowing down the second flow path. A second privilege different from the first privilege is provided based on the second ball entry means provided at a position where the ball can be entered and a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. A second privilege granting unit capable of adjusting the ratio of a game ball flowing down the specific flow path to flow into the first flow path and the second flow path; A gaming machine C1 comprising:

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a winning is achieved based on a gaming ball winning a specific winning opening. In addition, there are known a plurality of winning ports in which a prize ball is paid out when a ball wins, in addition to a specific winning port. Some of the conventional gaming machines can change the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to a direction in which a player ejects a game ball by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning opening. (For example, JP-A-2001-129177).

  However, since the prize balls that can be obtained by winning are generally larger than the prize balls that are paid out by winning in the winning opening, the player usually determines whether or not the prize balls are to be won. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. That is, it was common for a player to continue to launch a game ball in the same direction until a hit was achieved. Therefore, when a player plays a game on a gaming machine of the same model, as long as the player hits the ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win in the same winning opening, and the number of awarded balls to be paid out changes little. There was a case. That is, there is a risk that the game will be monotonous.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the specific flow path branches into the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game balls can flow. A first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball, and based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, the first privilege granting means sets the first ball entry means. One privilege is given. A second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and is different from the first privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The second privilege is provided by the second benefit providing means. The ratio at which the game balls flowing down the specific flow path flow into the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is adjusted by the adjustment means.

  By adjusting the adjusting means, a gaming machine to which the first privilege is easily given or a gaming machine to which the second privilege is easily given can be obtained. Therefore, different gaming properties can be realized by changing the adjustment degree by the adjustment means even for the same model. Therefore, there is an effect that a monotonous game can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C1, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and a bonus game for giving a privilege game advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. A first lottery state in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result, and a second lottery state in which the probability of the specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. Settable lottery state setting means, wherein the first privilege granting means controls the first lottery state to be set by the lottery state setting means as the first privilege. Gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, a predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game is executed when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. Privilege game advantageous to the player is provided by the privilege game providing means. The lottery state setting means sets a first lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result being the specific lottery result is high and a second lottery state in which the probability of the specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. . The first privilege providing means is controlled so that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means as the first privilege.

  This makes it possible to adjust the ease of transition to the first lottery state by the adjusting means. Therefore, the first lottery state is easily set according to the business policy of the hall, and the gaming property is easily set to the privilege gaming state, or the first lottery state is hard to be set, and the gaming property is easily given the second privilege. Can be adjusted. Therefore, there is an effect that a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall can be provided.

  The gaming machine C3, wherein in the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second privilege providing means is configured to provide a predetermined amount of game media as the second privilege.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1 or C2, a predetermined amount of game media is provided as the second privilege by the second privilege provision means, so that the predetermined amount of game media is easily provided. Can be adjusted by adjusting means. Therefore, it is possible to adjust whether the game property is such that a predetermined amount of game media is easily provided or the game property is easily provided with the first privilege according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall can be provided.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, a first position at which game balls can enter the first ball entry means, and a second position at which game balls are less likely to enter the ball entry means than at the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a position, and a variable control means that changes the variable means to the first position until a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the bonus game being provided by the bonus game providing means. , A gaming machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2 or C3. That is, the variable means changes the first position at which the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and the second position at which the game ball does not easily enter the ball entry means as compared to the first position. Is done. The variable control means changes the variable means to the first position on the basis of the bonus game provided by the bonus game providing means until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  This makes it easier to give the first privilege in the privilege gaming state, so that it is possible to increase the player's expectation of the privilege game.

  In the gaming machine C4, the variable control means changes the variable means to the second position based on a lapse of a predetermined time since at least the variable means is changed to the first position. A gaming machine C5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C4, the variable means is changed to the second position by the variable control means based on a lapse of a predetermined time since at least the variable means is changed to the first position. Since it is variable, the opportunity for the player to acquire the first privilege can be limited until the predetermined time elapses. Therefore, the scarcity value of the first privilege can be increased, and the importance of the adjustment by the adjusting means can be increased. Therefore, when the player selects a gaming machine for playing a game, the player can select the gaming machine in consideration of the adjustment degree of the adjusting means, so that there is an effect that a pleasure of selecting the gaming machine can be provided. .

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific ball entry means to which a specific game value is given based on the entry of a game ball, and the specific game value based on the entry of a game ball. A low value ball entry means to which a small game value is also provided, wherein the second flow path is a specific flow path for causing a game ball to flow down to the specific value ball entry means; A first variable position at which at least one game ball flowing into the specific flow path can be retained on the specific flow path, A gaming machine C6, comprising: a position variable device that can be changed to a second variable position in which a game ball that has flowed into the specific channel is hard to be held on the specific channel.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific game value is given based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry means, and the game machine enters the small value ball entry means. A game value smaller than a specific game value is provided based on the ball. The second flow path is branched into a specific flow path that allows the game ball to flow down to the specific ball entry means and a small value flow path that flows down to the small value ball entry means. A first variable position at which at least one game ball flowing into the specific flow path can be held on the specific flow path, and a game ball flowing into the specific flow path as compared to the first variable position is held on the specific flow path The position variable means is changed to the second variable position which is difficult to perform.

  Thereby, even if the player continues firing the game ball toward the second flow path, the ball entry means into which the game ball flowing into the second flow path enters according to the variable position of the position variable means is provided. Can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be varied according to the variable position of the position variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that a monotonous game can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine C6, further comprising: holding control means for controlling the position variable means to change to the second variable position based on the bonus game being provided by the bonus game providing means; Is arranged at a position where the game ball which has flowed into the second flow path is easier to flow as compared with the small value flow path, and the position changing means holds the game ball by holding the game ball. A gaming machine C7 for facilitating the guiding of the game ball to the small value channel by the game ball being played.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C6. In other words, the position variable means is changed to the second variable position by the holding control means based on the fact that the privilege game is given by the privilege game giving means. The specific flow path is arranged at a position where the game balls flowing into the second flow path are more likely to flow than the low value flow path. When the game ball is held by the position changing means, the game ball is guided to the small value channel by the held game ball.

  Thereby, the ball entry means into which the game ball flowing into the second flow path enters can be made different depending on the variable position of the position variable means and whether or not the game ball is held by the position variable means. . Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be varied according to the variable position of the position variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that a monotonous game can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine C9, wherein in any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, the variable means and the position variable means are constituted by one member.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C6 to C8, since the variable means and the position variable means are formed by one member, the position and the position of the variable means can be changed by one control. The position of the means can be switched simultaneously. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the adjusting means may increase the ratio of the game balls flowing down to the specific flow path to the first ball-in means when the game balls are in the second ball-in state. The ratio of game balls flowing into the second ball input means is increased when the ratio of game balls flowing into the ball input means is reduced and the ratio of game balls flowing into the first ball input means is reduced. A gaming machine C10, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the game is performed when the ratio of the game balls flowing down to the specific flow path to the first flow path is increased by the adjusting means. The ratio at which the sphere flows into the second flow path is reduced. Further, when the ratio of the game balls flowing down to the specific flow path to flow into the first flow path is reduced by the adjusting means, the ratio of game balls flowing into the second flow path is increased.

  As a result, there is an effect that the game balls can more easily flow into the flow path on the side where the ratio is increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
602 General winning opening (second ball entry means)
605 Induction channel (second channel)
650a 2nd specific winning opening (first ball entry means)
921a, 921b Nail (adjustment means)
S218 bonus game providing means S305 lottery means S1304, S1308 lottery state setting means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines perform a lottery to determine whether or not a game ball wins based on a winning of a game ball to a specific winning opening. In addition, there are known a plurality of winning ports in which a prize ball is paid out when a ball wins, in addition to a specific winning port. Some of the conventional gaming machines can change the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to the direction in which a player ejects a game ball by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning opening. is there.

JP 2001-129177 A

However, there is a risk that the game will be monotonous.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem or the like, and aims to provide a game machine that can prevent the game becomes monotonous.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided at a position where a game ball fired in a specific direction can enter, and a first variable state in which a game ball can enter, A variable ball entry means that can be changed to a second variable state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable state, a discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discrimination condition, and discrimination by the discriminating means. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is varied a predetermined number of times from the second variable state to the first variable state based on a specific determination result; a particular channel that the emitted gaming ball is provided which can be flow-down position to a first ball entrance means game balls provided in ball entrance possible positions inflows to the specific flow path, the specific The game ball that has flowed into the flow path is provided at a position where it can enter, and the first entry A different second ball entrance means and means, the game balls to the first ball entrance means based on the fact that the ball entrance, game ball to the second ball entrance means advantageous to the player than when ball entrance becomes a privilege assigning means for assigning specific benefits, game ball which has flowed into said specific flow path, a first state in which easily ball entrance to the first ball entrance means, than its first state, game And a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which the ball easily enters the second ball entry means. The variable means includes a variable ball entry means, during execution of the variable game. It is configured to be changed to the first state while being changed to the second variable state, and to be changed to the second state while the variable ball-in means is changed to the first variable state. Tei Ru.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first variable state in which the game ball fired in the specific direction is provided at a position where the game ball can enter and the game ball can enter the ball, Also, variable ball entry means capable of changing to a second variable state in which the game ball becomes difficult to enter, discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of a discrimination condition, and a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discrimination means. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball-in means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second variable state to the first variable state, based on the fact that the variable ball-taking means has been shot in the specific direction. A specific flow path provided at a position where a ball can flow down, a first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing into the specific flow path can enter, and a game flowing into the specific flow path A ball is provided at a position where the ball can enter and a third ball different from the first ball entry means. A special advantage that is more advantageous to the player than when a game ball enters the second ball entry means based on the ball entry means and the game ball entering the first ball entry means. A first state in which the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path easily enters the first ball entry means, and the second state is that the game ball is more than the first state. And a variable means that can be changed into a second state in which the variable ball means is easily changed into the second variable state during the execution of the variable game. The variable ball input means can be changed to the second state while the variable ball-in means is changed to the first variable state .

Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the Yu technique becomes monotonous.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a diagram illustrating a display screen on which a right-handed navigation is displayed, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen on which a right-handed warning image is displayed. (A) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen during a big hit, and (b) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen when a ball enters a large value winning opening during a big hit. (A), (b) is the figure which illustrated the display screen on which the warning image was displayed. It is a front view of a storage device. (A) is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball which flowed into the storage device when the storage valve is closed, and (b) which flowed into the storage device when the storage valve was opened. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a traveling direction of a sphere. It is a figure showing the upper stream side among the courses provided on the right side of the game board. It is a figure showing the lower stream side among the courses provided on the right side of the game board. (A) is a diagram showing a state where the first specific winning opening is opened, and (b) is a diagram showing a state where the second specific winning opening is opened. (A) is a figure which shows the path | route of the ball in the state in which the 1st specific winning opening was closed, and (b) is a figure which shows the path | route of the ball in the state where the 1st specific winning opening was opened. (A) is a figure which shows the path | route of the ball in the state in which the 2nd specific winning opening was closed, and (b) is a figure which shows the path | route of the ball in the state where the 2nd specific winning opening was opened. (A) is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball which entered into the 2nd variable prize-winning device in the state where the probability variation entrance was closed, and (b) is a figure which shows the probability variation entrance opening. It is a figure showing the direction of advance of the ball which entered into the 2nd variable winning device in the state where it is in. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of the state of the 2nd special winning opening and the state of the flow path in a 2nd variable winning device in the 12th round of the big hit A, and (b) is 12th of the big hit B. It is a figure which shows the time change of the state of the 2nd specific winning opening and the state of the flow path in a 2nd variable winning device in the round. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter C2 and a big hit type in a special symbol. FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a second hit random number counter C4 and a hit in an ordinary symbol. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an ending process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an abnormality process performed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the winning command setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an error notification process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the hit time alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the normal time alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 6 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display screen in case the storage valve of 2nd Embodiment is closed, (b) is the display screen in case the storage valve of 2nd Embodiment is open. FIG. It is a front view of the storage device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which illustrated the case where the ball which flowed into the storage device in the case where the storage valve in 2nd Embodiment is closed is guide | induced to a high value winning opening, (b) is a figure which showed. It is the figure which illustrated the case where the ball which flowed into the storage device in the case where the storage valve in 2nd Embodiment is closed is guided to a small value winning opening. It is the figure which illustrated the advancing direction of the ball which flowed into the storage device when the storage valve in 2nd Embodiment is open. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of RAM in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. is there. It is a flow chart which shows main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows storage control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the warning process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process at the time of storage performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process at the time of cancellation | release performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the display screen during the big hit in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the downstream in the path | route provided in the right side of the game board in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a top view of a storage device and a 2nd variable winning device in the state where the slide member of the modification of a 1st embodiment projected to the near side in front view, and (b) is a modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a top view of the storage device and the 2nd variable winning device in the state where the slide member of the example was buried in the back side in front view. It is a figure showing the regulation contents of the 1st hit type selection table in the modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning opening closing process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the modification of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit time notification process 2 performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball which flowed into the storage device in the state where the ball stored in the storage device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment was disadvantageous arrangement | positioning with respect to the player. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball which flowed into the storage device in the state where the ball stored in the storage device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment became an advantageous arrangement | positioning for the player. It is a figure showing the suggestion display image displayed on the display screen in the modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in the modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the cancellation | indication suggestion display process performed by the MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the storage state command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17) for launching a ball in the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 17) due to the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of ball guide nails (not shown) and a windmill (movable member 310 are illustrated. (Not shown), in addition to the rails 61 and 62, the general winning opening 63, the first entering opening 64, the second entering opening 640, the first variable winning arrangement 65, the second variable winning arrangement 650, the normal entrance opening ( A through-gate 67, a variable display unit 80, a storage device 600, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display unit 80, and the storage device 600 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed in response to a prize winning at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball enters the normal entrance 67. When passing, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is, the jackpot type is also determined. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 is referred to as “the lottery of the special symbol 1”, and the lottery is performed for the entrance to the second entrance 640. The special symbol lottery to be performed is referred to as “special symbol 2 lottery”.

  When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse). Alternatively, the operation of releasing (until 10 balls are won) is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). More specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won), and 12 In the round, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). As a result, a large number of balls win in the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  Also, inside the second variable winning device 650, there are two kinds of entrances for determining the added value after the end of the jackpot given after the end of the special game state (a certain variation entrance 654 and a normal entrance). Port 655) is provided (see FIG. 15). Although the details will be described later, when a ball enters the certain-variable entry ball opening 654 in the special game state, a “special symbol high probability state” is added as an added value after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, in the case where the ball has never entered the certain-variable-entrance entrance 654 during the special game state, a “normal symbol time-saving state” is given as an added value after the end of the big hit. In addition, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided as big hit types of special symbols (see FIG. 18B). Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the ease with which the ball enters the certainty changing opening 654 is varied.

  When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) elapses, the lottery result is displayed. Is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined for each type of entrance. Each of them is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1) or the number of retained balls for the second entrance 640 (special) If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the drawing is started. When both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  On the other hand, in the ordinary symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the ordinary entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ball is a normal symbol. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and a ball enters the second entrance 640. It will be in an easy state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Be started.

  In each of the "big hit A" and the "big hit B", a special game state (15R big hit) of 15 rounds is set. Also, in the special game state, when a ball enters the probability changing ball entrance 654, as a value added after the end of the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol height from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot. Move to probability state (special symbol is being changed). On the other hand, in the special game state, if the ball has never entered the probability change entrance 654, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times During that time, it shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. In addition, when it shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol after the end of the big hit, it also shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. This low probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit. In addition, although the details will be described later, in “big hit B”, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the positive change ball opening 654 during the special game state (during big hit) than in “big hit A”. That is, since the "big hit B" is more likely to shift to the special symbol change state after the big hit is completed, the big hit is likely to occur again at short intervals after the big hit is completed. Therefore, "big hit B" becomes a big hit which is more advantageous to the player than "big hit A".

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, when the so-called probability is changing (probable change), in other words, the special game state is reached. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol (while the special symbol is being changed) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is increased and the ball can easily win the second entrance 640. . On the other hand, the “low probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the special symbol is not being changed, and refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of the special symbol being changed. In addition, the normal symbol time saving state (medium time saving) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and a ball can easily win the second entrance 640. On the other hand, the normal state is a state of the game in which neither the special symbol is changed nor the normal symbol is reduced in time (the jackpot probability or the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is not increased).

  During a special symbol change or a normal symbol during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the normal symbol increase, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state is changed. A longer time is set as compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball wins in the second entrance 640 compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It is easy to do. Therefore, during a certain symbol change or during a normal symbol time reduction, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. That is, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

  It is to be noted that, while the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is shortened, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time. Alternatively, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when a normal symbol is hit may be configured to be greater than in the normal state. In addition, during the probable change of the special symbol or during the shortening of the ordinary symbol, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is not changed, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened, and At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during a certain change of the special symbol or during a shortening of the ordinary symbol, the time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the ordinary symbol ( Only the winning probability of the second symbol) may be increased as compared with the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, when the probable change state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state, the probable change state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot, but is not limited to this. The number of times may be limited. Specifically, for example, after the special game state ends, the special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends ten times, and after the special symbol lottery ends ten times. May be configured to be set to the normal state. In addition, the number of times the special symbol is changed to a certain state is not limited to ten times, and may be arbitrarily determined. Similarly, in the present embodiment, when a ball does not enter the probability changing ball entrance 654 in the special game state, it is configured to be in a normal symbol time-saving state until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times. However, the time reduction period of the normal symbol is not limited to 100 times and may be arbitrarily determined.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a seven-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate in a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning prize) into the first entrance port 64 or the second entrance port 640, is being executed. In this case, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is displayed in a lighting state as a stop symbol after the variation is completed, or a ball inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed yet, is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is performed. The number of balls is retained up to a maximum of four times for each type of entrance, and the number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. However, the number of times may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of a special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates a jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) if the jackpot is a jackpot. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) by using the ball as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large-sized 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 17). Three symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols). These third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17) is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the liquid crystal display.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are provided with an attached symbol imitating a character such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed in front of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit A”, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added are aligned. On the other hand, in the case of “big hit B”, any one of the numbers “0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9” including all odd numbers is added. A fluctuation display in which symbols are aligned is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower portions, and a lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 indicates the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the big hit is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, and sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character may perform a predetermined operation. A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), The number of entered balls is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the retained number of balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. FIG. 4B is an example in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the entry into the first entry opening 64 is four. When a reserved ball corresponding to a ball entering the second entrance 640 is generated, a reserved ball number design different from the reserved ball number design displayed in the small area Ds1 of FIG. 4A is displayed. Is done. Thereby, the player can easily determine the number of the reserved balls corresponding to the entry into the first entrance port 64 and the number of the retained balls corresponding to the entry into the second entrance port 640. You can check.

  In the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be retained up to four times, but the maximum number of retained balls is limited to four. Instead, the number may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of retained balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, referring to FIG. 5A, a display (right-hand navigation) prompting the third symbol display device 81 to launch a ball aiming at the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 is displayed. The display contents in the event of occurrence will be described.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is positively changed or the normal symbol is reduced in time, so that the ball is shifted to the right side of the game board 13. By hitting the ball (right-handed), the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. As will be described later in detail, when a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) is performed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the first entrance 64 It is more likely to be a "big hit B" than in the case of a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol (lottery of the special symbol 1) which is performed based on the ball having entered the ball. Therefore, in the state where the special symbol is given after the jackpot is completed, or in the case where the normal symbol is reduced in time, the right-handed execution is advantageous to the player. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the certain change state or the normal symbol time saving state, the ball cannot enter the second entrance 640 unless the player makes a right hit. The player will not be able to sufficiently receive the benefits of the symbol's probable change state or the normal symbol's time reduction state.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probable change state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, the image (right-hand navigation) illustrated in FIG. It is designed to ensure that the benefits of time saving of ordinary symbols are obtained.

  As illustrated in FIG. 5A, in the right-hand navigation, a character “Aim for the right!” Is displayed in the small area Ds3 in the sub-display area Ds, and rightward and downward characters are displayed above and below the character. Three arrows are displayed. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible for the player to surely obtain the benefit of being in the certain symbol change state and the normal symbol time saving state.

  Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The warning image illustrated in FIG. 5 (b) indicates that the player does not hit the ball on the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 in a period during which the player should hit the ball (right-hand). This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined to be executed. More specifically, this is displayed when it is determined that the player is right-handed in the normal state (the state in which the special symbol is not in the surely changed state and the normal symbol is not in the time saving state).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as not to be easily opened in the normal state (even if the player hits right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640). For this reason, if the player hits the ball in the normal state, the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with the case where the player hits the ball at the first entrance 64 by hitting the ball left. That is, if the player makes a right-handed hit in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to hit the jackpot, which is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting left-handed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) loss of the player.

  As illustrated in FIG. 5B, when it is determined that the player is right-handed in the normal state, a “warning” is issued to the entire small display area Ds (small areas Ds1 to Ds3). Is displayed, and the character "Please play left-handed!" Is displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that right-handing should not be performed (left-handing should be performed). Also, the clerk of the hall also checks the presence or absence of the right-handed warning screen (see FIG. 5B) to determine whether or not there is a player who is performing the irregular right-handed playing method in the normal state. It can be easily determined.

  In addition, as a method of determining whether or not the ball is right-handed, the determination is made based on whether or not the ball has entered the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) into which the ball can flow when right-handed. . More specifically, when a ball enters any of the general winning openings 601 and 602 or the out openings 603a to 603c provided inside the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) When it is determined that the ball has passed the provided ball entry switch), it is determined that the player is right-handed.

  Here, the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) is in a state in which the ball easily flows down to the general winning opening 601 (see FIG. 9A), and in a state where the ball flows down to the general winning opening 602, depending on the game state. The state is set to two types of states, that is, a state where it is easy to make it (see FIG. 9B). Then, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state) (special symbol change state, normal symbol time saving state, normal state), the ball is set to a state where the ball can easily flow down to the general winning opening 601. The general winning opening 601 is a winning opening in which a smaller number of prize balls are paid out (for example, three) than the general winning opening 602 when a ball enters. For this reason, even if right-handed in the normal state, there is little merit of making the ball enter the storage device 600 (the number of balls held cannot be increased). In other words, when right-handing is performed in the normal state, the frequency of receiving a special symbol lottery decreases and the number of balls held decreases, so that the disadvantage is increased for the player. For this reason, a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)) is displayed in order to prevent the player from continuing to perform a disadvantageous game method (a game method of right-handing in a normal state). It is configured as follows.

  In addition, as a determination factor for determining whether or not to display the right-hit warning image (see FIG. 5B), not only a general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 that is easy to win in a normal state, but also a winning. The reason why it is determined whether or not the ball has entered a general winning port (high value winning port) 602 or the like which is difficult to perform is because the possibility of an illegal game is considered. That is, in the normal state, the ball is illegally continued to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 having a large number of awarded balls to be paid out (for example, 15 payouts) without passing through a big hit. There is a possibility that a fraudulent game method for obtaining a large amount of prize balls may be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has won (entered) the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 in the normal state, the player makes a left strike on the player (right A right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) prompting not to perform beating is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the illegal game.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered one of the entrances (general winning openings 601, 602, and out exits 603a to 603c) provided in the storage device 600 in the normal state. Although a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed on the screen, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), when it is detected that a ball has won (enters a ball) to a general winning port (high value winning port) 602 where many prize balls are paid out, an unauthorized game is detected. It may be configured to determine that the operation has been performed and display a right strike warning image. Thus, the clerk of the hall can easily determine whether there is any fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right strike warning image. In addition, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), when it is detected that a ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, the illegality is performed on the hall computer. May be configured to be output. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether there is a possibility that the illegal operation is performed and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 in which the illegal operation is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the player makes a right-handed shot based on detecting a ball entering each of the entrances (general winning openings 601 and 602, and out exits 603a to 603c) provided inside the storage device 600. Although it is determined that the vehicle is performing right-hand driving, the method of determining whether or not right-handing is being performed is not limited to this. For example, when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, it may be configured to determine that the ball is right-handed, or a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 A well-known sensor capable of detecting that a ball has passed may be provided above, and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor, it may be determined that the player is right-handed.

  Next, an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special game state (during the big hit state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third round of the jackpot. As shown in the figure, when a big hit occurs, for example, an image in which the boy character 710 finds a treasure chest 715 filled with treasures is displayed. This treasure suggests a large amount of prize balls that the player obtains in the special game state (big hit state). With this display, the pleasure of acquiring the prize ball can be amplified, and therefore, a feeling of satisfaction of the jackpot can be given. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  A display area 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is provided in the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81. In the example of FIG. 6A, a character “ROUND3” is displayed in the display area 714. By confirming this display, the player can recognize that the present is the third round of the jackpot. Therefore, the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot can be easily recognized by the player.

  Further, in the upper right portion of the third symbol display device 81, a right-handed navigation image is displayed in the same manner as during the special symbol change state or during the normal symbol time reduction state. That is, the character "Aim for the right!" Is displayed in the small area Ds3, and rightward arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying this right-handed navigation image, the player is made to recognize that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the special game state (during the big hit state). be able to. If the player hits left despite the special game state (big hit state), it is provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 and is opened in the special game state (big hit state). The ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, it becomes impossible to acquire a large amount of prize balls, and the player loses. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the special game state (big hit state), the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6A) is displayed to urge the player to perform right-handed. Thereby, it is configured such that the player can obtain a prize ball at the jackpot.

  In addition, in the lower right part of the third symbol display device 81, a winning number display area MA for displaying the number of winning (ball entry) to the general winning opening 602 is formed. In the winning number display area MA, for example, characters “EXTRA BONUS × 10” are displayed as shown in FIG. The character "EXTRA BONUS" means that a prize ball is obtained by a method different from a prize ball obtained by allowing a ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. ing. Specifically, it means that a prize ball is obtained by making the ball enter the general winning opening 602. The character “× 10” indicates the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 at the jackpot. In the example of FIG. 6A, it means that the ball has been made to enter the general winning opening 602 ten times in the first to third rounds.

  In addition, a schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed above the text “EXTRA BONUS × 10”, and a text “EXTRA BONUS gate is being opened” is displayed above the storage device 600. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 604a is set to the open state (released state). In addition, in the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a balloon with the word “Aim!” Is displayed at the position of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. . This balloon allows the player to recognize that it is advantageous (a large amount of prize balls can be obtained) when the ball is put into the general winning opening 602.

  FIG. 6B is a diagram showing display contents when a ball enters the general winning opening 602 in the special game state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 6B, when a ball entering the general winning opening 602 is detected during a jackpot, the word “GET” is displayed in the portion where the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed. At the same time, an image in which a ball enters the place corresponding to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed. Furthermore, in the winning number display area MA, the display content is changed from “EXTRA BONUS × 10” to “EXTRA BONUS × 11”. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that a prize ball has been obtained by the ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602.

  In this way, by displaying the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 during the jackpot, the prize ball is different from entering the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a at the jackpot. Can be recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation of an increase in the number of “EXTRA BONUS” (the number of times of ball entry to the general winning opening 602). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, various warning images will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating an example of a left strike warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a left strike is performed in the special game state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 7A, when it is determined that the player is left-handed, a large display area 716 for displaying a warning is formed in the center of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the large display area, a character "Warning" is displayed in large size, and a character "Right-Right Aim Attacker !!" is displayed below the character "Warning". By displaying these characters in the large display area, the player can be made to recognize that the current game method (left-handed) is an incorrect game method. Therefore, in the special game state (big hit state), the player can be surely obtained a large amount of prize balls.

  The determination as to whether or not the player is making a left hit is made based on whether or not a ball has entered the first entrance 64. That is, by determining that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 in the special game state (during the big hit state), it is determined that the player is making a left-handed hit, and a left-handed warning image ( The control is performed so that FIG. 7A is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, a left strike warning image (see FIG. 7A) is displayed when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected, but the invention is not limited to this. . For example, a pass sensor that detects the passage of a ball is provided on a path (flow path) provided on the left side of the game board 13, and a left strike warning image ( 7 (a) may be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7B, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the storage device 600 is, for example, a case where a ball is detected in the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 despite the special gaming state (big hit state), or a special gaming state (big hit state). When the ball is detected to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 in spite of not being in the (state), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and a warning image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600, the word “warning” is displayed in a large size at the center of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, a character “Please call a gate error clerk” is displayed at the bottom. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and can promptly request a repair or the like to a hall clerk or the like.

  In addition, if the wiring is fixed to a general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 having a large number of awarded balls that are always paid out by improperly changing the wiring or the like, the ball is easily inserted into the hole. The store clerk can determine the possibility of fraud simply by checking the warning image (see FIG. 7B). Therefore, the ball is fixed to a state in which the ball easily enters the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602, and the ball is aimed at the storage device 600 to suppress the illegal act of increasing the ball without going through a big hit. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. The variable display for alternately lighting for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “」 ”), the electric accessory 640 a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to the predetermined symbol. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (variation time) is set to be shorter during a certain symbol change or during a normal symbol time reduction in the game state than in the normal state. As a result, during the special symbol change, and during the normal symbol time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, the chance of hitting the normal symbol increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during a certain change of the special symbol and during a time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, during a certain pattern of a special symbol or during a time reduction of a normal symbol, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than that in the normal state during the special change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per one normal symbol contact may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal entrance 67 is attached to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that, of the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board can pass therethrough. ing. When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol retaining lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. This may be performed by using a part of the device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the normal entrance 67 is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). . In addition, the number of assembled normal entrances 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the mounting position of the normal entrance 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can be won is provided. When a ball wins in the first entrance opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed at 110 (see FIG. 17), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view (below the normal entrance 67), a second entrance 640 from which a ball can be won is provided. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 17), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  Each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 may be different. For example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 is set to three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 is set to five. Is also good.

  The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball is unlikely to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. (Enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher during the special symbol change and during the normal symbol time reduction, and the time required for the normal symbol change display is shorter than during the normal state. In the display, the symbol “○” is easily displayed. Therefore, the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Further, during the special symbol change and the normal symbol time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than in the normal state. Therefore, a state in which a ball can be more easily won in the second entrance 640 than in the normal state can be created during the special symbol change and during the normal symbol time reduction. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have a motorized accessory as provided in the second entrance 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Here, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball has won the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball has won the second entrance 640 is the same regardless of whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state. is there. However, as the type of the jackpot selected in the case of the jackpot, the probability of becoming the jackpot (jackpot B) that allows the ball to easily enter the certain-variable entry ball port 654 during the special game state is the second entry port 640. The case where the ball wins is set higher than the case where the ball wins the first entrance opening 64.

  During normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult for the second entrance 640 to win a prize. The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (a so-called “left hit”). Therefore, it is more advantageous for a player to aim for a jackpot.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is shortened, by passing the ball through the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state. Since it is in a state where it is easy to win the ball entrance 640, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right strike”), and the normal entrance is performed. It is more advantageous for the player to pass the ball opening 67 to open the electric accessory and to aim at the jackpot B by winning the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment plays a game in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbol is being changed, whether the ordinary symbol is being shortened, or the normal state). Can change the way the ball is fired between "left strike" and "right strike". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first entrance 64 (the lower left side of the second entrance 640), and a substantially rectangular first specific winning opening is provided substantially in the center thereof. (Large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when a special symbol lottery performed due to a winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the first specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The first specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 14 times (14 rounds). More specifically, in the first to eleventh rounds and the thirteenth to fifteenth rounds in the special game state, the opening and closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a is executed. The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening / closing front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis ( (Not shown)). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot win or hardly wins. At the time of a big hit, the large open mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the front lower side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state where it is easy to win the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates to alternately repeat the state with the closed state.

  A second variable winning device 650 is provided on the lower left side of the first variable winning device 65, and a horizontally long rectangular second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is provided on an upper portion thereof. . The opening / closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 650a forms a closed state in which the ball projects toward the front side in front view to prevent the ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 14A). ). On the other hand, at the time of the twelfth round, the opening / closing plate covering the second specific winning opening 650a slides toward the back side in front view, and is buried in the back side of the game board 13 at the twelfth round. An open state in which the ball can enter the two-variable winning device 650 is formed (see FIG. 14B).

  As described above, in the special gaming state (during the big hit), the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a enters the certain variable entering ball opening 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650 based on the ball. After the end of the jackpot, the state shifts to the special symbol change state. On the other hand, even if the ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the special game state, or if the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, all the balls enter the normal entrance 655. In this case, after the end of the jackpot, the state shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. In addition to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, another winning opening may be provided as a winning opening opened in the special game state. Conversely, the winning opening may be only the first specific winning opening 65a. The arrangement position is not limited to the arrangement of the present embodiment, and may be arranged at an arbitrary position.

  On the right side of the first variable winning device 65, a storage device 600 is provided. The storage device 600 has a plurality of entrances (general winning openings 601 and 602, and out exits 603a to 603c) provided therein, and allows the entered ball to flow down to one of the entrances. be able to. Further, the storage device 600 can store only one ball that has entered the inside thereof (stop flowing down). Further, the storage device 600 is covered with a transparent cover body on the front side in front view, and into which ball entry hole the ball that the player has flowed (entered) into the storage device 600 enters. Is configured to be easily confirmed. Details of the storage device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an outline of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. 8, the storage device 600 is configured so that a sphere can enter the inside thereof through the guide channel 605. It should be noted that the storage device 600 is configured such that when a player makes a right hit, one out of three hit balls hits. The ball that has not entered the guiding flow path 605 flows down the upper left side of the storage device 600 and flows down in the direction of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, in the special game state, a part of the ball fired toward the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a by the player enters the storage device 600 via the guide channel 605. Is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 8, inside the storage device 600, two types of flow paths branched by the branch member 604 are provided downstream of the guide flow path 605. Specifically, inside the storage device 600, a guide channel 606 is provided on the left side when viewed from the front. Most of the balls flowing down the guide flow path 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is provided with a detection switch 601a (not shown) that can detect that the ball has entered (passed). When the detection switch 601a detects that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small winning opening) 601, three prize balls are paid out. It should be noted that, to the left and right of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, the balls which have not flowed into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 despite flowing down the guiding flow path 606 are discharged. Outlets 603a and 603b are provided. These out ports prevent (suppress) the accumulation of spheres inside the storage device 600, and can reliably discharge the spheres flowing down the guiding flow path 606. Further, similarly to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, these out openings 603a and 603b are provided with detection switches 603a1 and 603b1, respectively, not shown. With these detection switches 603a1 and 603b1, the number of ejected balls can be accurately determined.

  Inside the storage device 600, on the right side when viewed from the front, there is provided an induction flow path 607 through which a ball can flow. Most of the game balls flowing down the guiding flow path 607 enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is provided with a detection switch 602a (not shown) which can detect that the ball has entered (passed). When the detection switch 602a detects that a ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, 15 prize balls are paid out. That is, it is possible to obtain more prize balls when the ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 than when the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. it can. Out ports 603b and 603c are provided on the left and right of the general winning port (high value winning port) 602, respectively. These out ports prevent (suppress) the balls that have not entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 from accumulating inside the storage device 600, and prevent the balls flowing down the guiding flow path 607. It can be discharged reliably. The out port 603c is provided with a detection switch 603c1 (not shown), similarly to the out ports 603a and 603b. The number of ejected balls can be accurately determined by the detection switch 603c1.

  Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special game state (big hit state) is set, the pachinko machine 10 is set so as to be easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. In a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the ball is set to be easily entered into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. That is, in the special game state, in addition to the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained, and the general winning opening (high value winning) in the storage device 600. It is configured such that a prize ball can be obtained by a ball winning to the mouth 602. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the merit of the player due to the big hit can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with more pleasure to be a big hit, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 having a relatively large number of award balls to be paid out is closed by the storage valve 607a, and the number of award balls relatively paid out. Is set in a state in which the ball easily enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number. That is, in a state other than the special game state, there is little merit of making a ball enter the storage device 600. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, a large amount of payout is attempted by always aiming at the storage device 600. An irregular game method can be prevented (suppressed). As described above, the storage device 600 is configured so that one out of every three right-hit balls hits. Then, when the ball enters the general winning opening (small winning opening) 601, the number of award balls to be paid out is 3 balls. In other words, even if right-handed is executed in the normal state, it is difficult to perform a lottery of a special symbol, and it is not possible to increase the number of balls by paying out based on the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Therefore, during the normal state, it is possible to make the player want to make a left-handed hit.

  The induction flow path 607 is provided with a storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a can block the guide channel 607 by protruding toward the near side in front view, and can prevent the sphere that has proceeded to the guide channel 607 from flowing down. That is, the ball can be stopped (stored) at the upper portion of the storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a is configured to be driven by a storage device solenoid 610 (see FIG. 17). More specifically, by driving the storage device solenoid 610, the state in which the storage valve 607a protrudes to the near side in front view (the state in which the induction flow path 607 is closed) and the state in which the storage valve 607a moves to the back side in front view. It is configured to be switchable between a buried state (a state in which a ball can flow down the guide channel 607). The sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a is prevented (suppressed) from flowing out to the guide flow channel 606 side by being surrounded by the inner wall of the guide flow channel 607 and the branch member 604. . That is, the protruding portion 604a provided on the branch member 604 is set to be sufficiently high so that the ball stored above the storage valve 607a does not flow out.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the operation of the ball that has entered the storage device 600 will be described for each of the two possible states of the storage valve 607a described above. FIG. 9A is a diagram illustrating the operation of a ball that has entered the storage device 600 in a state where the storage valve 607a protrudes to the near side, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement of the ball which entered into the storage apparatus 600 in the state buried in.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, at least the lower end of the guide channel 605 overlaps the upper end of the guide channel 607. On the other hand, the upper end portion of the guide flow channel 606 is located on the left side of the center axis 605a of the guide flow channel 605, and hardly overlaps the lower end portion of the guide flow channel 605. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guiding flow path 605 easily advances to the guiding flow path 607.

  The sphere that has proceeded to the guiding flow path 607 is prevented from flowing down by the storage valve 607a, and stops above the storage valve 607a (the sphere is stored). When another sphere newly flows down the guiding flow path 605 while the sphere is stopped at the upper part of the storage valve 607a (the sphere is stored), it flows down the guiding flow path 605 newly. The contacted ball and the ball stored on the storage valve 607a come into contact (interference). Due to this contact (interference), the trajectory (flowing direction) of the sphere newly flowing down the guiding flow path 605 changes.

  Note that the guide flow path 607 is provided slightly to the right of the guide flow path 605 (see FIG. 9A), and the sphere stored on the storage valve 607a is newly added to the guide flow path 605. In most cases, the ball is stopped on the right side of the ball flowing down. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing down the guide flow path 605 collides with the left side of the sphere stored above the storage valve 607a, and repels to the left in front view. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing down the guiding flow path 605 proceeds to the guiding flow path 606 provided on the left side in front view. As described above, most of the balls flowing down the guiding flow path 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 having a relatively small number of awarded balls (three awarded balls). That is, in a state in which the storage valve 607a protrudes toward the near side in front view and the sphere cannot flow down the guiding flow path 607 (a state in which the guiding flow path 607 is closed), most of the spheres that have entered the storage device 600 are generally used. The ball enters the winning opening (small winning opening) 601.

  On the other hand, when the storage valve 607a is buried on the back side in front view (see FIG. 9B), there is nothing to prevent the flow of the sphere that has proceeded to the guiding flow path 607, so that the guiding flow path 607 The ball that has proceeded to the bottom flows down the guiding channel 607 as it is and enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. As described above, the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 has a relatively large number of award balls to be paid out (15).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a ball can flow down the guide channel 607 when a big hit occurs (see FIG. 9B). Therefore, in the special game state, by performing a right-handed operation, a ball is made to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, so that a large amount of prize balls are obtained, and the right-handed injection is performed. When a part of the drawn ball wins the ball to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the storage device 600, a winning ball can be obtained. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the merit of the player due to the big hit can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with more pleasure to be a big hit, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the general prize port (high value prize port) 602 having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out is closed by the storage valve 607a, and the payout rate is relatively high. The ball is set in a state where the ball easily enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 having a small number of winning balls. That is, in a state other than the special game state, there is little merit of making a ball enter the storage device 600. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, a large amount of payout is attempted by always aiming at the storage device 600. The game method can be prevented (suppressed).

  In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the guiding flow path 606 enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, and the ball flowing down the guiding flow path 607 enters the general entrance opening 602. , But is not limited to this. For example, on the downstream side of each guide flow path, a known clune means provided with a plurality of winning ports is provided, and different payout balls are paid out according to the winning ports to enter. Is also good. As a result, even if it flows down the guiding flow path 606, many prize balls can be obtained by entering the prize port having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, the player can be watched with interest until the ball that has entered the storage device 600 enters any of the winning ports. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more enjoyed.

  In the present embodiment, the guide valve 607 is closed by the storage valve 607a, so that the sphere can be stored on the way of the guide flow path 607. The sphere may be stored on the way of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the guide flow path 607, and magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than during the special game state (during the big hit state). Thus, the sphere that first flows into the guiding flow path 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the sphere can be stopped from flowing down (the sphere can be stored at the position of the electromagnet). With this configuration, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one ball is stored above the storage valve 607a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that two or more balls can be stored. Further, when storing a plurality of spheres, the spheres may be stored vertically or may be arranged side by side.

  In the present embodiment, the out port is provided inside the storage device 600, but a winning port for paying out prize balls may be provided instead of the out port. Further, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the winning opening may be made different. More specifically, for example, six winning balls are provided in place of the out mouth 603a, ten winning balls are provided in place of the out mouth 603b, and a winning ball is provided in place of the out mouth 603c. May have twelve winning ports. Accordingly, it is possible to more interestingly observe the case where the ball flows down the guiding flow path 606 or into which winning opening the ball enters the guiding flow path 607. Further, a member such as a nail, which can change the flowing direction of a ball, may be provided downstream of the guide channel 606 or the guide channel 607 so that a winning hole into which any ball enters becomes more random. . Thereby, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the whereabouts of the ball can be more interestingly observed until the ball enters one of the winning openings. In addition, by providing nails or the like, it is possible to set a ball entrance through which a clerk of the hall easily enters a ball. Therefore, the pitching rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hall side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, a path when the player has ejected a ball to the right side of the game board 13 (when hit right) will be described. First, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a part of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the upstream side of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. 10, a normal entrance 67 is provided in the upper part of the flow path (path) on the right side of the game board 13. As described above, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, a lottery of a normal symbol is executed. Then, when a normal symbol is hit, the second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol “O” indicating a normal symbol hit after a variable effect for indicating a result of the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. Then, based on the "O" symbol being displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 provided downstream of the normal entrance 67 is activated. It is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds × 1 time or 1 second × 2 times). While the electric accessory 640 is open, a right-hit ball easily enters the second entrance 640. As described above, during the special change of the special symbol or during the reduction of the time of the ordinary symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, and the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and the opening period of the electric accessory is increased. 2 It is in a state where the ball easily enters the ball entrance 640. Therefore, by performing a right-handed hit, a special symbol lottery can be received without reducing the number of balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 downstream of the second entrance 640 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, a storage device 600 is provided downstream of a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. A first variable winning device 65 is provided downstream of the entrance of the storage device 600, and a second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable winning device 65. (See FIG. 11). That is, when the player makes a right hit, among the balls that have flowed downstream in the right path (flow path), the ball that has flowed downstream without flowing (entering) into the storage device 600 is the second ball. 1 It flows down in the direction of the variable winning device 65. Further, the ball that flows down toward the first variable winning device 65 and does not enter the first specific winning opening 65a flows down toward the second variable winning device 650.

  In this manner, the ball can flow down in the direction of the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 only by the player making a right hit. Therefore, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the player can cause the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a only by making a right hit, and a large amount of balls can be obtained. You can get prize balls. In addition, a part of the ball launched aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a enters the storage device 600. As described above, in the special gaming state (big hit state), most of the balls that have entered the storage device 600 enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (see FIG. 9B). ), The player can acquire more prize balls during the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with more pleasure to be a big hit, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, specific operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, the first specific prize port 65a of the first variable prize device 65 is configured to be openable in the frontward direction when viewed from the front. When the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, a game ball flowing down a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter the first specific winning opening 65a. Note that, as described above, the first specific winning opening 65a is used for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls) in rounds 1 to 11 and rounds 13 to 15 in the special game state (big hit state). Open until winning). Then, when a ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a, 15 prize balls are paid out for one entered ball. Therefore, the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the second specific winning opening 650 of the second variable winning device 650 can be buried inside the gaming board 13 by sliding to the back side in front view. It is configured to be possible. As a result, the upper portion of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and a game ball flowing down a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter. As described above, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won) in the 12 rounds of the special gaming state (big hit state). Then, when a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, 15 prize balls are paid out for one entered ball. Therefore, the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the operation of a ball that has flowed down the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 and reached the first specific winning opening 65a by right-handing will be described. First, FIG. 13A is a diagram illustrating a case where the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the first specific winning opening 65a is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the first specific winning opening 65a is closed, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the player falls into a space in front of the first specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 13A). Then, the ball that has fallen to the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a flows down a flow path provided below the first specific winning opening 65a. Since the flow path below the first specific winning opening 65a is inclined toward the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball flows down toward the second specific winning opening 650a.

  On the other hand, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, as shown in FIG. 13B, the ball is placed on the extension of the flow path from which the ball flows down. The opening of one specific winning opening 65a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. As shown in FIG. 13B, a ball discharge port 65c for discharging a ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the first variable winning device 65. When the ball enters the ball discharge port 65c, the winning of the ball is detected, the prize ball is paid out, and the ball that enters the first variable winning device 65 from the first specific winning port 65a. Can be discharged. Since the bottom portion 65b of the first variable winning device 65 is inclined in the direction of the ball outlet 65c, all the balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a enter the ball outlet 65c. Can be ball. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a description will be given of the operation of the ball that has reached the second specific winning opening 650a by flowing down the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 by right-handing. First, FIG. 14A is a diagram illustrating a case where the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, it flows down above the second specific winning opening 650a and falls to the left side of the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 14A). Then, the ball that has dropped to the left of the second specific winning opening 650a flows down to the out opening 66 (see FIG. 2) provided to the left of the second specific winning opening 650.

  On the other hand, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, as shown in FIG. The opening of the 2 specific winning opening 650a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. As shown in FIG. 14B, a ball discharge port 650c for discharging a ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650. By entering the ball discharge port 650c, the winning of the ball is detected and the prize ball is paid out, and the ball entering the second variable winning device 650 from the second specific winning port 650a. Can be discharged. Since the bottom portion 650b of the second variable winning device 650 is inclined in the direction of the ball outlet 650c, all the balls that have entered the second specific winning opening 650a enter the ball outlet 650c. Can be ball. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

  Next, the structure of the second variable winning device 650 downstream of the ball outlet 650c will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the special game state (big hit state), when a ball enters the certain variable ball entrance 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650, After the end of the jackpot, it is configured to shift to a certain symbol change state. This positive change ball inlet 654 is provided in one of the two channels (the guide channel 652 and the guide channel 653) provided downstream of the ball outlet 650c (the guide channel 652). Have been. At the upper ends of the two flow paths, a flow path switching valve 650d for setting a flow path through which the ball flows is provided. The flow path switching valve 650d is provided to close one of the two flow paths so that the ball cannot travel and open the other flow path so that the ball can travel. Have been. The flow path switching valve 650d can rotate the switching shaft 650e as a rotation axis by driving the flow path solenoid 611 (see FIG. 17). To switch the placement.

  FIG. 15A and FIG. 15B are diagrams showing the movement of the sphere for each arrangement of the flow path switching valve 650d. First, FIG. 15A is a diagram illustrating a case where the flow path switching valve 650d is arranged to close the induction flow path 652. In the case of the arrangement in which the guide flow path 652 is closed, the ball that has entered the ball discharge port 650c is unable to proceed to the guide flow path 652 by being blocked by the flow path switching valve 650d. Therefore, the sphere advances to the guiding channel 653 (see FIG. 15A). A normal ball entrance 655 is provided downstream of the guidance channel 653. That is, during the arrangement shown in FIG. 15A, the ball cannot enter the certain-variable-entrance ball opening 654. In this embodiment, by turning off the flow path solenoid 611, the flow path switching valve 650d is configured to have the arrangement shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, FIG. 15B is a diagram illustrating a case where the flow path switching valve 650d is arranged to close the induction flow path 653. This arrangement can be realized by turning on (exciting) the flow path solenoid 611. In the case of the arrangement in which the guiding flow path 653 is closed, the ball that has entered the ball discharge port 650c can proceed to the guiding flow path 652 without being blocked by the flow path switching valve 650d. Therefore, the sphere advances to the guiding flow path 653 and enters the positive change entrance 654 provided downstream thereof.

  When the ball enters the certainty changing ball entrance 654, it is set to shift to the specially changing state of the special symbol at the end of the jackpot (at the start of the ending effect). In addition, when the twelfth round in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened ends, a suggestion effect for indicating to the player the game state after the end of the big hit is performed in the subsequent rounds. In other words, if a ball has entered the probable changing ball entrance 654 in the 12th round, a display effect indicating that a transition to the probable changing state of the special symbol is made in the 13th to 15th rounds is made in the third design display device 81. Executed in On the other hand, if the ball has not entered the probable entry opening 654 in the 12th round, the third symbol display device 81 displays a display effect indicating that the normal symbol shifts to the time saving state in the 13th to 15th rounds. Executed in In this way, by setting the round in which the large 2 specific winning opening 650a is opened to the twelfth round, a sufficient period for executing a suggestive effect indicating the game state after the end of the jackpot in the remaining rounds of the jackpot is secured. be able to.

  As described above, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, since the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream from the entrance of the storage device 600, the ball is transferred to the storage device 600. The easier it is for the ball to flow, the more difficult it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650. If it is difficult for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650, it is difficult for the ball to enter the certain-variable ball entrance 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot B. Conversely, as the ball is less likely to flow into the storage device 600, the ball is more likely to reach the second variable prize device 650, so that the ball is more likely to enter the positively variable ball opening 654 in round 12 of the jackpot B. Become. Therefore, by adjusting the ease with which the ball flows into the storage device 600, the proportion of the ball entering the positive change ball opening 654 can be changed. Here, as a method of adjusting the ease of inflow into the storage device 600, for example, adjusting a nail (see FIG. 11) provided at an entrance portion of the storage device 600 can be mentioned. That is, the more the two nails provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 are adjusted to be closer to each other, the more difficult it is for the ball to pass between the two nails, so that the more difficult it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600. . Therefore, in the twelve rounds of the jackpot B, the ball easily enters the certainty changing ball entrance 654, so that it is easy to shift to the specially changing state of the special symbol. On the other hand, the more the two nails provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 are adjusted to move away from each other, the more easily the ball passes between these two nails, so that the ball easily flows into the storage device 600. . Therefore, in the twelve rounds of the jackpot B, the ball easily flows into the certainty changing ball opening 654, and it is difficult to shift to the certainty changing state of the special symbol. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided at the entrance of the storage device 600, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 (the ratio of the state of the special symbol being changed) can be varied. The specifications of the machine 10 can be changed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the operation of the flow path switching valve 650d has the same pattern regardless of the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is different between the jackpot A and the jackpot B. Thereby, the big hit B is configured to be easier to enter the ball into the certainty changing ball opening 654 in the special game state (big hit state) than the big hit A. The relationship between the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d and the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path switching valve 650d in the twelfth round of the jackpot A. The upper graph of FIG. 16A shows the time change (whether in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and FIG. The lower diagram shows the time change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the left induction flow path 652 downstream of the ball discharge port 650c is open or the right induction flow path 653 is open). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time After a lapse of (for example, 0.2 seconds), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, the closed state is maintained until seven seconds elapse from the start of the twelfth round, and is set to the open state based on elapse of seven seconds. This open state continues until the twelfth round ends. Specifically, ten balls enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, or the opening state is set until 30 seconds elapse from the start of the twelfth round. Is done. When the twelfth round ends, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. This closed state is continued until the special gaming state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits.

  Further, in the twelfth round of the jackpot A, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so as to close the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side thereof and allow the ball to flow down the induction flow path 652 on the left side (FIG. 15). (B)). This state continues for 6.5 seconds after the start of the twelfth round, and based on the lapse of 6.5 seconds, the flow path switching valve 650d switches in the opposite direction. That is, the guide flow path 652 is closed by the flow path switching valve 650d, and a state is set in which a ball can flow down the guide flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15A). Since this switching operation is completed in a period of 0.5 seconds or less, the flow path can be switched before the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened.

  After the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (a state in which a ball can flow down the guide flow path 653) is maintained. The state in which the ball can flow down the guiding flow path 653 is the next big hit, and continues until the eleventh round ends. Then, based on the completion of the eleventh round and the three-second interval, a state is set in which a ball can flow down the guiding flow path 652 (the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on). That is, during most of the period in which the player plays the game, the ball can pass through the guiding flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d, and is provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d. The state in which the ball can pass through the guiding flow path 652 is limited from an interval period (3 seconds) set before the start of the 12th round to 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round. Only the period (9.5 seconds). Therefore, even if a fraudulent act of entering the ball into the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is performed except in the twelfth round of the special game state, the ball enters the certain-variable entering ball opening 654. Since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from hitting, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the illegal acquisition of the specially changed state of the special symbol.

  The timing for switching the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to this. For example, the guide channel 652 may be switched to the open state at the start of the 12th round, or in the middle of an interval period set after the 11th round is completed (for example, after the start of the interval). (When 0.5 seconds have elapsed). As a result, the period during which the guiding flow path 652 is opened can be reduced to a shorter time, so that the ball illegally enters the inside of the second variable winning device 650 while the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. Even if it is performed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the certain-variable entry port 654. That is, fraudulent acts can be prevented.

  As described above, in the twelfth round of the jackpot A, the period in which the guiding flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is open, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open. The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (the second large opening) 650a is set so that the period of the second winning opening (the second large opening) 650a does not substantially overlap with the period of time (only 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the 12th round). Therefore, in many cases when the jackpot A is reached, the ball does not enter the certain-change ball entrance 654 during the special game state (during the big hit), so that it is difficult to set the special symbol to the certain change state after the end of the big hit.

  The reason why the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the 12th round is to make it difficult to understand that it is a jackpot A immediately after the start of the 12th round. It is. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (b), at the jackpot B where the ball easily enters the certain-variable entry port 654, the second specific winning port (the second large opening port) immediately after the start of the 12th round. ) 650a is released. Therefore, by sharing the operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a immediately after the start of the 12th round with the jackpot A and the jackpot B, it is expected that the current jackpot is the jackpot B. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16B, a description will be given of a time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650 a and the flow path switching valve 650 d in the twelfth round of the jackpot B. The upper graph in FIG. 16B shows the time change (whether in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and FIG. 16B. The lower diagram shows the time change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the left induction flow path 652 downstream of the ball discharge port 650c is open or the right induction flow path 653 is open). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set to the open state. The open state is maintained until 5 seconds elapse from the start of the twelfth round, and the closed state is set based on the elapse of 5 seconds. In addition, even if ten balls enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a before the lapse of 5 seconds, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not used. Will be closed. This closed state is continued until the special gaming state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits.

  As described above, the flow path switching valve 650d is set to perform the same operation as the jackpot A in the twelfth round of the jackpot B. That is, based on the start of the interval period set at the end of the eleventh round, the guiding flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d is closed, and the ball can flow down the guiding flow path 652 on the left side. (See FIG. 15B). When 6.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the twelfth round, the flow path switching valve 650d switches in the opposite direction. That is, the guide flow path 652 is closed by the flow path switching valve 650d, and a state is set in which a ball can flow down the guide flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15A). After the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (a state in which a ball can flow down the guide flow path 653) is maintained.

  As described above, in the twelfth round of the jackpot B, the period in which the guiding flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is opened, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened. The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set so that the period for which the opening is performed overlaps at most 5 seconds. Therefore, in many cases when the jackpot B is reached, the ball can be made to enter the certainty changing ball entrance 654 during the special game state (during the big hit), and the special symbol is set to the certainty changing state after the end of the big hit. It will be easier.

  Note that the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to this, and a pattern in which a ball can easily enter the certain-variable entering ball opening 654 and a certain-variable entering ball opening 654 are provided. The pattern may be arbitrarily determined as long as a pattern in which the ball does not easily enter the ball can be set. Further, the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d can be arbitrarily determined without being limited to the embodiment. For example, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so that the sphere can flow down the guiding flow path 653 at the start of the 12th round (see FIG. 15A), and a predetermined time (for example, 6.D) from the start of the 12th round. After 5 seconds have elapsed, the flow path switching valve 650d may be set so that the ball can flow down the guide flow path 652 (see FIG. 15B).

Further, the number of rounds in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened is not limited to the twelfth round, and may be set to an arbitrary round. Further, the second specific winning opening (650a) may be opened in a plurality of rounds. For example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the 15th round. May be set. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the certainty changing ball entrance 654, so that after the end of the jackpot B, the special symbol can be more easily changed to the certainty changing state. Therefore, even though the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, which lowers the motivation of the player for the game. It can be prevented (suppressed).

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first entrance port 64.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 601, 602, and 650a and the out ports 603a to 603c is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box are closed. Cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c are stored. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

  The first random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a large hit determination value of a first random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1. However, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning start is one of the determination values specified in the first random number table 202a. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18 (b)) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the big hit types are stored. , And the type of the entrance that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”. Is associated with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 18B). As described above, in the case of the jackpot A, most of the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the twelfth round is the guidance provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d. The flow path 653 is configured to be open (see FIG. 16A). Therefore, it is difficult to cause the sphere to flow down to the guiding flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d, so that the sphere is transferred to the positive change ball opening 654 provided downstream of the guiding flow path 652. It becomes difficult to enter the ball. That is, when the big hit A is reached, it is difficult to shift to the special symbol change state after the big hit is completed.

  The jackpot B is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 99” (see 202b2 in FIG. 18B). As described above, in the case of the jackpot B, the entire period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the twelfth round is the guidance provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d. It is configured to overlap with the period when the flow path 652 is open (see FIG. 16B). Therefore, while the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open, the ball is simply inserted into the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and the flow path switching valve 650d is provided. Can flow down to the guiding flow path 652 provided on the left side of the sphere. Further, as described above, the positive change ball opening 654 is provided downstream of the guiding flow path 652. Therefore, in the case of the big hit B, it is easy to shift to the special symbol change state after the big hit is completed.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”. The jackpot A is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 18B). The jackpot B is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “20 to 99”. That is, as compared with the case where the special symbol 1 has been hit by a lottery, the number of the judgment values that become the big hit B when the special symbol 2 has been hit by a lottery is larger. Therefore, it is configured such that a large hit is more likely to be a large hit B when the special symbol 2 is selected by the lottery.

  As described above, during the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of the hit of the normal symbol is reduced. It is set to be longer (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the special symbol probable change state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and if the jackpot is obtained, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot B, and the special symbol is changed after the jackpot ends. Since the jackpot B, which tends to be in the state, is likely to be repeated, the player can easily acquire a large amount of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C). In addition, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, referring to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal entrance 67 and the second random number table 202c, It is determined whether it is a hit or not.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to winning in the first entrance opening 64 composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) and a second received ball A special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to a prize at the mouth 640 is provided, and these areas are provided with timings for entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, respectively. In addition, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a ball normally holds a ball. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing when the ball has passed through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once every timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is set by a first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is When it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a higher probability of being a big hit than the low probability. And the number of random hits included in each of them is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. Specifically, when the special symbol is in the probable change state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is any one of “0 to 9”. If it is determined that it is any of “0 to 9”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 of "0 to 399", the judgment value to be a big hit is 10 of "0 to 9". Is 1/40 (10/400). When the special symbol is in the low-probability state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "200". If the value is "200", it is determined that the winning is a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 from "0 to 399", the judgment value to be the big hit is only one of "200". The probability of a jackpot is 1/400.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability and the random number of the jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability are calculated. Therefore, a random number value for each jackpot is set so as not to be a duplicate value. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a big hit is changed depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value which is a special symbol jackpot to be predicted, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a special symbol big hit, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is out of the range, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol big hit, the first symbol display device is used. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at 37 is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, the winning of the special symbol 1 results in a big hit, and in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is any of “0 to 49” is “big hit A”. In addition, a jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol 1, and the jackpot type when the random number value is any of “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”. Furthermore, a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, and the big hit type when the random value is any one of “0 to 19” in the first hit type counter C2 is “big hit A”. In addition, a jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, and the jackpot type when the random number value is any one of “20 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  In the present embodiment, two types of jackpots are used. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and one type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. In addition, a configuration in which the same jackpot type is selected with the same value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case where a large hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1 and in the case where a large jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2 May be. With such a configuration, the data amount of the first hit type selection table 202b can be reduced, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, super reach, and the like. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d that stores a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 as described above. ing.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, “variation (for a long time)”, “variation (for a short time)”, various types of “normal reach”, and various “variance of super reach” are defined as variation patterns for deviation. In addition, various types of “normal reach” and various “super reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns for jackpots. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected in accordance with the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. Are stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that is a hit for the symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. Is equal to the winning random number set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. The second winning random number table 202c is used for the low probability of the ordinary symbol (the period in which the ordinary symbol is in the normal state) (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C). High-probability time period (a period in which the symbol is normally reduced in time and a period in which the special symbol is in a probable change state) (see 202c2 in FIG. 18 (c)). The number of jackpot random numbers is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning at the time of a low probability of a normal symbol (the normal state of the normal symbol) and the high probability of the normal symbol (the time saving state of the ordinary symbol) Is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 18C, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers that are hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28” (202c1 in FIG. 18C). reference). As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 24 out of 240 in the total number of random numbers, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol hits, The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the reduction of the time of the ordinary symbol and during the probable change of the special symbol), there are 200 random numbers which are the big hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5-204". . These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The fluctuation display is executed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short, such as “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further reduced. Since it is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is "1 second × 2 times" when a normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 34).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 19, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 34), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 33). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Here, details of various flags and counters stored in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability change flag 203g, probability change setting flag 203h, probability change pass counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, probability variable enable flag 203o , A positive change valid timer 203p, a discharge number counter 203q, a medium time counter 203r, and a memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a first entrance port. The respective values of the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 acquired based on the winning of 64 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second entrance 640 are stored, respectively. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

  Like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area). Of the vacant areas, the areas are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 202b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prize stored in the other reserved areas is the same as in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is a variable display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter that counts the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the three symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the counter value increases to a maximum value of 4. One is added (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 26).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1 is held) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 26 and S405 in FIG. 28). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 holds the variable display retained by the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of change display reserved balls managed by the special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is increased by the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The sound lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls retained and stored in the second entrance 640 is stored. Only the difference is described, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f sets the maximum number of retained balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the ordinary entrance 67. This is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S704 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 30).

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is increased. The acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (FIG. 31). S703: No).

  The probable change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state of a special symbol (probably changing a special symbol). When the certainty change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the gaming state is a certainty change state of a special symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in a low probability state. In the present embodiment, when the probability change setting flag 203h described later is set to ON at the end of the big hit game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (see S1304 in FIG. 37). Further, the probability change flag 203g is set to be a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to off when the start of the big hit is set. In the initialized state (that is, the state where the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erasing switch 122 pressed down), the probable change flag 203g is reset to off, and a normal power-off occurs. In this case, the state immediately before the power-off occurs is backed up.

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the special symbol probability change state after the end of the big hit. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probable change game state is determined by whether or not a game ball has entered the probable change entrance port 654 during the special game state (big hit state). . When a game ball enters the certainty change ball entrance 654, the incoming ball is detected by a certainty change switch (not shown), and the certainty change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, the probability change setting flag 203h is set off based on the probability change flag 203g being set on (see S1305 in FIG. 37). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probability change setting flag 202h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the power has been passed through the probability change switch before the power is turned off. May be configured to be officially set to ON and return. In this case, whether or not the power has passed through the probability change switch before the power is turned off can be determined based on whether or not a later-described probability variation counter 203i has a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to judge whether or not the power is turned off and the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203h in a state where the power is turned off, thereby reducing damage to the game store. it can.

  The probability change passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability change switch in one round (in the present embodiment, the 12th round of the jackpot) in the jackpot state. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have flowed into the second variable winning device 650 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probability-change passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203q described later. The probable variable passage counter 203i is incremented and updated by one each time the probable variable switch is passed (S1411 in FIG. 38). In addition, after executing a process of determining whether or not the number of game balls flowing into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of discharged balls, the number is reset to the initial value “0” (FIG. 39). S1511). It should be noted that the value of the probability change passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, its value is reset to zero.

  In each round in the jackpot game, the winning number counter 203j indicates a first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and a second specific winning opening (second large opening) of the second variable winning device 650. This is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the large opening 650a. Specifically, based on the detection of a ball entering by a winning sensor (not shown) provided in each of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, one is added and updated. Is performed (S1403 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a (the value of the winning number counter 203j) ) And the number of discharged sheets (the total value of the discharged number counter 203q and the probable variable passage counter 203i) are determined, and then reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is reset to zero.

  As described above, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, only the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened. Specifically, the number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is counted. On the other hand, in the twelfth round, only the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened. Therefore, in the twelfth round, the winning number counter 203j is substantially equal to the second specific winning opening (second large opening). The number of balls that have entered the (large open mouth) 650a is counted.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered one of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, a winning is achieved. Although the configuration is such that 1 is added to the value of the number counter 203j, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are respectively entered. A separate counter for counting the number of spheres may be provided.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting the time elapsed since the guide flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d was set to the open state (see FIG. 15B). . That is, the operation counter 203k counts the elapsed time from when the flow path solenoid 611 is set to ON and the ball is set in a state in which the ball can enter the certain-variable entry port 654. In this pachinko machine 10, when the eleventh round of the jackpot is completed, the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on (excited), whereby the flow path switching valve 650d rotates clockwise about the switching shaft 650e as a rotation axis, The guide channel 652 is opened.

  In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to a period during which the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on (excited) is set at the end of the eleventh round. That is, a counter value corresponding to an interval period of 3 seconds before the start of the twelfth round and a total of 9.5 seconds of 6.5 seconds after the start of the twelfth round is set. On the other hand, in the processing of S1409 of the winning processing (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110, it is updated by being subtracted by one. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 611 is turned off. The value of the operation counter 203k is backed up even when the power is shut off. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is reset to 0, which is an initial value, by being initialized.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a have been closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the first round. From the closed state. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203m to ON, the remaining ball timer 203n described later is incremented by one and updated (see S1505 in FIG. 39). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time since the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed, This is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the game balls flowing into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 has elapsed.

  The remaining ball timer 203n determines whether the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed after one preset round is completed (1st to 11th round, 13 to 15th round) or the second round. When the specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed (12 rounds), it is necessary for the game balls flowing into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to be discharged. This is a counter for determining whether time has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 81 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and thus corresponds to 3 seconds (2 seconds + 1 second) with a margin of 1 second added. The counter value is set as the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203n. The value of the remaining ball timer 203n is updated, and when the value reaches the upper limit (3 seconds), the first variable prize device 65 (1 to 11 rounds and 13 to 15 rounds) or the second variable prize device 650. It is determined whether or not the number of winnings in (12 rounds) matches the number of discharged coins (S1507 in FIG. 39). If it is determined that the winning number does not match the number of discharged pieces, an error command is set and the effect is notified. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the ball is clogged inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, the ball is left in the second variable prize winning device 650 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, and an impact is applied at the start timing of the next 12 rounds of the jackpot to cause the ball to enter the probability changing ball opening 654. Fraud can be suppressed.

  If the winning number does not match the discharge number, a special flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, a certain change is set even if the ball enters the certain change ball opening 654. The flag 203h may not be set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improper provision of the certain game state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that either the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a has been switched from the open state to the closed state. When the detection is detected, updating of the counter value by the remaining ball timer 203n is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, separate counters may be provided for the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

  The certainty change valid flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the entering ball is valid when a game ball enters the certainty changing ball opening 654 after the flow path solenoid 611 is set to off. It is. When the probability change enable flag 203o is set to ON, the ball that has flowed into the guiding flow path 652 (see FIG. 15B) is based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 611 is ON. This indicates that the time is shorter than the time required to enter the ball into the mouth 654. In other words, it indicates that the ball entering the certain variation ball entrance 654 is a normal operation.

  The probable change valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time since the above-described probable change valid flag 203o was set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 611 is turned off, the period required for normal entry into the entry port 654 can be determined by the probability change valid timer 203p. In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball that has flowed into the guiding flow path 652 to enter the positively changing ball opening 654 is one second. The upper limit of the probability change valid timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds with a margin of 0.2 seconds added. When the ball enters the certainty changing ball entrance 654 after the elapse of 1.2 seconds, there is a high possibility that some kind of wrongdoing has been performed, so that the certainty setting flag 203h is controlled so as not to be updated. .

  Thus, in a state where the flow path switching valve 650d closes the guiding flow path 652 (a state in which the ball is not guided to the certain-variable entry ball port 654), the sphere is inserted into the certain-variable entry port 654, or the certain-variable entry ball is inserted. From the downstream of the mouth 654, a game ball is pushed up by a piano wire or the like to pass through the certain-variable entry port 654, or a radio wave or the like is erroneously detected as a ball having entered the certain-variable entry port 654. Can be suppressed.

  The discharged number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 in one round. The first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are each provided with a ball discharge port switch (not shown) for detecting the discharge of the ball. Each time the discharge of the ball is detected by the discharge port switch, 1 is added to the discharge number counter 203q (see S1503 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, after it is determined whether or not the number of balls that have entered the first variable prize device 65 or the second variable prize device 650 matches the number of ejected balls, the value of the ejected number counter 203q is set to the initial value. Is reset to 0 (S1511 in FIG. 39).

  The time reduction counter 203r is a counter for counting the remaining time reduction period (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates) in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the probable change setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot, 100 is set in the time reduction counter 203r (see S1307 in FIG. 37). That is, in the present embodiment, when the probability change game state is not set after the big hit game, the time saving state of the normal symbol of 100 times is given.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, and various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation patterns of the types of the variation patterns (completely out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed change pattern based on the change pattern type indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various kinds of change modes while strictly observing rough information such as the change time and the type of the change pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a change start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e are provided. , A probability change state flag 223f, a time reduction state counter 223g, a large hit flag 223h, and an allowable time counter 223i.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the result of the lottery of the reserved ball before the start of the change.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ) Is a counter for counting up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, the main control device 110 adds the number of pending balls of the variable display due to the entry into the first entrance 64 (start winning), or the main controller 110 displays a variable display in a special symbol. Is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1908 in FIG. 43). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball count after the storage. In order to notify the value of the counter 223 b to the display control device 114, a display pending ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball count command, the reserved ball count value indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball count corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is used. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol on the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. However, the detailed description is omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 43), and turned off when fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 43). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 43), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2007 in FIG. 47). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The probable change state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a probable change state of a special symbol. When the probability change state flag 223f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability change state, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. The probability change state flag 223f is updated in accordance with the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). It is determined whether or not the current state is the special symbol probable state according to the state of the probable state flag 223f, and a corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5A) displayed in the special symbol probable change state, or a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B). Or not to be displayed.

  The time reduction state counter 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a normal symbol time reduction state. When the time reduction state counter 223g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state, and when it is off, it indicates that the normal pattern is in the normal state (low probability state). The time saving state counter 223g is updated in accordance with the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). In accordance with the state of the time reduction state counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the current time is the normal symbol time reduction state, and a corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5A) displayed in a time-saving state of a normal symbol, or a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B). Or not to be displayed.

  The big hit flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a special gaming state (big hit state). If the big hit flag 223h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special game state (big hit state), and if it is off, it is in a state other than the special game state (big hit state) (special change state of special symbol, normal The symbol is in the time reduction state or the normal state). The big hit flag 223h is set to ON when an opening command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1914 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to ON when the special game state (big hit state) is started. On the other hand, the big hit flag 223h is set off when an ending command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to off when the special game state (big hit state) ends. The corresponding effect is set according to the state of the big hit flag 223h. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6A) displayed in the special game state (big hit state), or the left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A). ) Is displayed or not.

  The permissible time counter 223i indicates that the ball that has flowed into the guiding flow path 606 or the guiding flow path 607 immediately before the state of the storage valve 607a is switched to one of the entrances (general winning opening 601 or general winning opening 602). This is a counter for counting the time until the ball enters (ball flush time). By counting the ball ejection periods, when a ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is more accurately determined whether or not the entering is a normal operation. be able to. Each time an opening command or an ending command is received, a counter value corresponding to one second is set in the permissible time counter 233i (see S1914 and S1917 in FIG. 43). Each time the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 42), is decremented by one (see S2015 in FIG. 47).

  As described above, when the storage valve 607a is closed, a ball enters the general winning opening 602 provided downstream of the storage valve 607a, or when the storage valve 607a is opened, the general winning opening 601 is opened. When the ball has entered, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) is displayed. However, if the ball flows into the guide channel 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball enters the general winning opening 602 after the storage valve 607a switches to the closed state. May be. Similarly, when a ball flows into the guide channel 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the closed state to the open state, the ball enters the general winning opening 601 after the storage valve 607a switches to the open state. May ball. In order to treat these as normal entering balls (not to display a warning image), in the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 607a is switched, the allowable time counter 233i is set to a predetermined period (1 second). Set the corresponding counter value. Until the one second set as the counter value elapses, if the ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is determined that the operation is normal (warning image is not displayed). It is configured as follows.

  The winning number counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of times a ball has hit the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 in a jackpot. The value of the winning number counter 223j is reset to 0 at the start of the jackpot, and the value thereof becomes 1 each time a winning information command corresponding to the ball entry to the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 is received at the jackpot. (See S1944 in FIG. 45). As described above, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the special gaming state (big hit state). (See FIG. 6A). The winning number counter 223j is referred to for accurately updating the number of entering balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, displays a variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a notice effect.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as the images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a long time from the address designation to the data output in reading the first page of data, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 49) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S2201 in FIG. 49) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 24) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and generates one of the frames of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  Note that drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  When drawing an image using nonresident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data reside in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance are provided. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays a result of a lottery performed in the main control device 110 by a fluctuation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2103 and S2104 in FIG. 48).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the “X” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp Judging the result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", display "○" symbol for a fixed period after stopping the variable effect, and if "missing special symbol", display "X" symbol after stopping the variable effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user must wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and it is detected that the first entrance ball 64 or the second entrance 640 has entered the ball. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the power-on fluctuation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Are instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed on the screen. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the power is turned on. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and displays, for example, a city, the sea, the sky, and the like. Further, a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5A) and the like are also stored in the back image area 235c as a back image.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, or the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  Note that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Accordingly, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of FIG. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, an opening data transfer flag. 223i, a stored image data determination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demo effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on and the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a which are normally closed will be opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) has been notified to the player.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed with being enlarged from a standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced with respect to the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image in the image are defined as one frame of rendering content defined corresponding to each address. For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, the “sky stage”, and the “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  When it is specified to display any of the backs A to C by this back type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numeral of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the discontinuity of the continuity of the numeral. be able to.

  The “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 22) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, The image list to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident one of the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 23 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 23 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list described later (see FIG. 24) is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. At the same time as setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2105 in FIG. 48). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S3705 in FIG. 59 (b)).

  This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 50B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50B) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 50) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 50 (b) S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3601 in FIG. 59A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 59 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 24) described below, which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d while adding the pointer 233f to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 24) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. ), The pointer update process (see S3305 in FIG. 58) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 24), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by an image controller to draw an image for one frame, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 24, the back image used for the one-frame image, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source top address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination top address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 50 (b) Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3307 in FIG. 56). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3813 in FIG. 60). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3814 in FIG. 60). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information already developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process (see FIG. 50B) is executed, it is performed (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of FIG. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interruption process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 399, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) of the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, a normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol changing process (S106) is performed. A gate passing process is performed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, respectively. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and, on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol changing process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are stored.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is obtained (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the obtained special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is 0 by the processing of S209 (S209: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command is set by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the processing shifts to S213.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S214 that the fluctuating time has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Will be More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be jackpot A or jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on. In the case of the jackpot B, the red LED is turned on, and when it is off, the green LED is turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening a special winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). Note that the opening scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. That is, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening (first opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). The second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set to be opened in a pattern (see FIG. 16) according to the type of big hit in the 12th round. When the process of S218 ends, a notification counter corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S219), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is off (S216: No),
It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203r during time saving is 1 or more (S220). If it is determined that the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S220: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time-saving medium-time counter 203r is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time-saving medium time counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S221), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol change start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol departure” is performed (determination of success or failure), and the first This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of a variable effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, the respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are obtained (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302). If it is on (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the value for the high probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained from the first random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random number values defined in the first per-random number table 202a. As described above, as the random number value of the special symbol which is a big hit, ten “0 to 9” are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these hits. If so, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 share the judgment value of the jackpot, but depending on whether the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the lottery of the special symbol 2 A different random value may be used. With such a configuration, the random number value determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, so that the bias of the big hit can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the determination value of the big hit is set to the same number in the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2, but the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 And the number of judgment values to be a big hit may be changed. With this configuration, the probability of the jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to give expectations to the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S302 that the probability change flag 203g is not on (that is, it is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low-probability game state), Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value of the special symbol jackpot, one of "200" is set. When the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of the special symbol, the special symbol jackpot is obtained. Is determined. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained in the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (S305: Yes) The display mode at the time of the big hit indicating the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots) are compared. A, jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is.

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S308). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S308, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third time until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol is set. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Note that, as described above, the relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in the variation pattern selection table 20d.

  The variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, various types of “variation” for “out (for a long time)”, “off (for a short time)”, “out of normal reach”, Various types of "super-reach" and "special reach" are specified. In addition, various types of variation of “common normal reach”, various types of “common super reach”, and various types of “common special reach” are defined as variation patterns of jackpot A and jackpot B, and various “special reach” variations of jackpot B are defined. Various types of “shared normal reach”, various types of “common super reach”, and various types of “shared special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns of the hit / miss common use.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S305 that the special symbol has been removed (S305: No), a display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, or completely out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the certain state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than departure before and after is set, and "98" , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete departure is set, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than departure is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To determine.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 34). Sent. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing in S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and determines whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters when a winning start occurs, and executing a holding process of the values.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is held) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is 4 If not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing are updated. Then, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first of the available reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in each processing of S407 to S412, the same processing as each processing of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. The processing of S407 to S412 is different from the processing of S401 to S406 only in that the processing of retaining the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 640 is executed. Since they are the same, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the processes of S407 to S412 are completed, a pre-read process is executed (S413), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the prefetch processing (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the prefetch processing (S413). This look-ahead process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 28).

  In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501), and any one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is determined. If there is no new winning (S501: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new prize at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state at the start of the fluctuation is the special symbol change state. It is determined (S502), if the special symbol is in the probable change state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

  In the processing of S502, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the special symbol change state (S502: No), a lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for low probability (S504), and the processing is S505. Move to. In the process of S505, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the results of the jackpot determination, are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the control for opening / closing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display is held on the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S608). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S608: Yes), the current symbol is the special symbol jackpot. It is determined whether it is in the middle (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be hard to win. This is to make it easier for the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state). In other words, if it is easy to hit a normal symbol, a right-hit ball will easily enter the second entrance 640, so that the ball goes to the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. And it becomes difficult for the ball to reach. Therefore, during the special gaming state (during the big hit state), the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is prevented from increasing, and the ball is configured to easily reach the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. I have.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the second random number table 202c for a high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C).

  In the processing of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S608: No), the processing shifts to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 is set to the low value. Based on the probability random second hit random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and when it is determined that the lottery result is the hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S614). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S614: Yes), the special symbol is now being hit. It is determined whether or not it is (S615). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, when hitting the normal symbol, like the low probability state of the normal symbol, The number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not in the special jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with 640 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the processing of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time reduction state (S614: No), the processing shifts to S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set. At 0.2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to one (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the processing of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S619). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is performed. Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the second entrance 640 is very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602). S622). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or S621 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed on the second symbol display device). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is a hit of the ordinary symbol. A determination is made (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and the process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S624: No), the processing of S625 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 25), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the process is to acquire and hold the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times of change display holding M in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is stored in the free reserved area (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the first area (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power of the main control device 110 is turned on. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not, the RAM 203 is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also shifts to S912 in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S912 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S911, S911).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Similarly, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S911, S912) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the closing of the storage valve 607a is set (S913), and the process proceeds to S914.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S904: Yes), S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S914. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S914, a command (state command) for notifying the gaming state at the time of power return to the sound lamp control device 113 is output (S914). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in a probable change state, whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state, the number of times of ordinary symbol saving, and the like. A state command is generated in accordance with the value of the counter 203r during time reduction and the state of the probability change flag 203g, and is output to the sound lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 can match the recognition of the game state. Therefore, despite the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-handed navigator (see FIG. 5A) is displayed, and conversely, the player is in spite of the special symbol change state. Can be prevented (suppressed) from displaying a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) when right-handed. That is, the game state and the effect to be executed can be matched.

  When the process of S914 is completed, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S915). Next, an interrupt is permitted (S916), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 25), and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 is corresponded to the number of acquired balls. Send a prize ball command. In addition, a command for the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 26) and the start winning process (see FIG. 28) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). Big hit control for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a of the second variable winning device 650. The processing is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for each round of the jackpot state in accordance with the opening scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol changing process (see FIG. 26). And set the closure. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30). The opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the ordinary symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) ends, the first symbol display device 37 displays The currently executed variation display is terminated, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27). Display (lit display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. I do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately lit. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 30). Lights up).

  Next, based on the stored winning detection information, a winning information command setting process for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the winning information is executed (S1008). Based on the winning information command set by the winning information command setting process (S1008), the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a failure in the storage valve 607a. Further, it is also determined whether or not the player is playing an irregular game (left-handed during the big hit state, left-handed in the special symbol surely changed state, and the like).

  When the processing of S1008 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252, the power failure signal SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1010: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). More specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1009, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 32 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the information of the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is not initialized in the initialization process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). The jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects corresponding to the jackpot and a first specific prize are performed. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when a special symbol big hit is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102).

  The opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1102 is completed, next, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 is set to be opened (S1103), and the process ends. As described above, by opening the storage valve 607a, the sphere that has entered the storage device 600 can flow down the guiding flow path 607, and therefore, a general entrance port with a large number of prize balls to be paid out (15). The ball can enter the ball 602 (see FIG. 9B).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the storage device 600, the first variable prize device 65, and the second variable prize device 650 are provided on a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, during the special game state, the target is shot at the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a in order to obtain a prize ball. A part of the hit ball enters the storage device 600. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to the prize ball based on the ball entering the first specific prize port 65a or the second specific prize port 650a, the general prize provided in the storage device 600. A prize ball based on the ball entering the mouth (high value winning port) 602 can be obtained by the player. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained from the start of the jackpot to the end thereof can be increased, so that the player can play the game with more pleasure of becoming the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a special symbol positive change state or a normal symbol time reduction state is given after the end of the big hit. As described above, in these states, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, so that the player attempts to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by right-handing. (We are going to receive lottery of special symbol 2). Thereby, in many cases, the ball can be caused to flow into the storage device 600 before the next big hit is started. Then, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state, so that the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a until the next big hit. Therefore, when the next big hit occurs and the storage valve 607a is opened, the stored balls flow down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. That is, the player can acquire a large number (15) of prize balls immediately after the start of the jackpot. Therefore, in a situation where the jackpot has been won but the possession ball has run out, it is possible to secure a possession ball for performing the jackpot game without newly requesting the lending of the ball.

  In the process of S1101, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1104, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1104: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1104 that a special symbol is being hit (S1104: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the big hit operation for setting the operation of the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, the flow path switching valve 650d, and the like. The setting process is executed (S1105), and this process ends.

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process (S1105) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the jackpot operation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the newly started is the twelfth round of the jackpot (S1201). If it is determined (S1201: No), then the opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the round is the twelfth round (S1201: Yes), the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a according to the jackpot type is read (S1203). Thus, in the case of the big hit A, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16A is executed, and in the case of the big hit B, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16B is controlled. Next, an opening operation of the flow path solenoid 611 is set (S1202). That is, it is set so that the guide channel 652 is closed 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round. Next, the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a read by the processing of S1203 is set (S1205), and the processing shifts to S1206.

  In the processing of S1206 executed after the processing of S1202 or S1205 is completed, a round number command indicating a newly started round is set (S1206), and this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio lamp in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  In this manner, each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power-off occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such defects can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the process of S1105, if it is determined that the timing is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined that the timing is the operation timing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path solenoid 611. It is determined (S1107). If it is determined in the processing of S1107 that it is the operation timing (S1107: Yes), the corresponding solenoid is set to ON (S1108).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1108). More specifically, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed based on the end of the last 15 rounds of the jackpot, and the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. When the standby time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) for discharging the ball that has flowed into the inside has elapsed, it is determined that the ending effect start timing is reached. If it is determined by the processing of S1108 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the ending processing is executed (S1109), and this processing ends.

  Here, the ending process (S1110) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S1110). In the ending process (S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set (S1301). The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects an ending effect display mode based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1301 ends, the storage valve 607a set to the open state at the start of the jackpot is set to the closed state (S1302). As described above, the closed state of the storage valve 607a continues until the next big hit. Thus, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), even if the ball flows into the storage device 600, the ball is blocked by the storage valve 607a, so that the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is reached. The ball cannot flow down. In other words, the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 having a small number of winning balls, so that the merit of entering the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state (normal game state), an irregular game method of increasing the number of balls by paying out the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 by always aiming at the storage device 600 is fundamentally adopted. And in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), a lottery of a special symbol can be performed to expect a big hit to be played.

  As described above, the storage device 600 is configured so that one out of every three right-hit balls hits. Then, when the ball enters the general winning opening (small winning opening) 601, the number of award balls to be paid out is 3 balls. In other words, even if right-handed is executed in the normal state, it is difficult to perform a lottery of a special symbol, and it is not possible to increase the number of balls by paying out based on the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. This eliminates the merit of right-handing in the normal state, and makes it possible for the player to play a game with the aim of achieving a big win by lottery of special symbols.

  Also, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), a part of the right-handed ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, so that the special symbol is in a stable state or a normal symbol. (That is, in a state where the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 provided on the right side path of the game board 13 is easily opened), the ball holding is further improved by right-handing. Can be done. Therefore, despite the fact that the special symbol changed state and the normal symbol became shorter, and the player shifted to an advantageous state, the number of possessed balls decreased rapidly, and it was an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent (suppress) that the player does not feel real. Therefore, the game can be continued without reducing the number of holding balls in the special symbol change state or the normal symbol time saving state.

  Note that the number of prize balls for entering the general prize port (small value prize port) 601 may be reduced (for example, one prize ball may be used). This makes it possible to more reliably prevent the payout from becoming too large and the number of possessed balls from being too large in the special symbol change state or the normal symbol time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall. Further, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the ordinary symbol (that is, a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640), the merit of right-handing can be further reduced.

  When the processing of S1302 ends, it is next determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203h is on (S1303). Since it means that the ball has been entered, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S1304). Thereby, after the end of the big hit, it shifts to the specially changed state of the special symbol. After the processing of S1304, the probable change setting flag 203h is set to off (S1305), a state command including information indicating that the probable change state of the special symbol is set is set (S1306), and the present processing ends. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1303 that the probability change setting flag 203h is OFF (S1303: No), it means that the ball did not enter the probability change entrance 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot. Then, in order to set the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol 100 times after the end of the jackpot, the value of the time reduction counter 203r is set to 100 (S1307). Then, a state command including information indicating that the time saving state has been set is set (S1308), and the process ends. The status command set in the processing of S1306 or S1308 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the state command is received by the sound ramp control device 113, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, an effect can be appropriately executed according to the game state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit game, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203h is on. If it is on, the probable change flag 203g is set on. In other words, the timing at which the probability change flag 203g is turned on can be matched regardless of the timing at which the ball enters the probability variation entrance opening 654. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probable change game state until the big hit game ends. Furthermore, if a ball can be made to enter the certainty changing ball entrance 654 during the special game state (during the big hit state), a special symbol certain change state is given after the big hit is completed. (During the state), it is possible to take an interest in whether or not the ball enters the certain-variable entrance port 654.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1109, if it is determined that the timing is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then, the ball enters (wins) into the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, and the probability changes. A prize-winning process is performed to monitor the entry (winning) of a ball into the entrance 654 (S1111). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning process (S1111).

  In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a period in which a round game is set (round valid period) (S1401). That is, it is determined whether or not the period from when the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is set to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the current time is outside the round validity period (S1401: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether a ball has entered one of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a (S1401: Yes). S1402). In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: Yes), the winning counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1403). Then, the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1404. And migrate.

  In the processing of S1404, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the closing of the winning port set to the open state among the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a. Is set (S1406). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it is determined that the ball for discharging the ball remaining inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in the elapse time. it can.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1404, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), the round time (30 in the present embodiment) which is a period until each round of the jackpot ends. Second) has elapsed (S1405). If it is determined in step S1405 that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1406. On the other hand, in the process of S1405, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  In the processing of S1408, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408: Yes), The value of the operation counter 203k is updated by subtracting 1 (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the certain-variable-entrance ball opening 654 (whether or not the ball has passed a certain-variable switch (not shown)) (S1410). ). If it is determined that the ball has passed the probability change switch (S1410: Yes), the value of the probability change passage counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1411), the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412), and The process shifts to S1413. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, if it is determined that the ball has not passed the probability change switch (S1410: No), the processes of S1411 and S1412 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1413.

  In the processing of S1413 executed after the processing of S1410 or S1412, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is not 0 (S1413: No), the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1413, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413: Yes), the guide flow path 652 is closed by setting the flow path solenoid 611 to OFF (S1414), and the positive change is enabled. The flag 203o is set to ON (S1415), and the process ends. By setting the probable change valid flag 203o to ON by the processing of S1415, even after the flow path switching valve 650d is switched and the guide flow path 652 is closed, the ball remaining in the guide flow path 652 is switched to the probable change switch. , It is possible to control so that the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (that is, the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the big hit).

  In the processing of S1408, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability change valid flag 203o is on (S1416). If it is determined that the probability change valid flag 203o is not on (that is, it is off) (S1416: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probable change valid flag 203o is ON (S1416: Yes), the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the probable change valid timer 203p (S1417). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probable change valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present embodiment) (S1418). If the value is determined to be the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), The flag 203o is set to off (S1419). As a result, even if the passage of the probability change switch is detected, control is performed so as not to update the value of the probability change setting flag 203h. As described above, when the passage of the probability change switch is detected after the value of the probability change valid timer 203p reaches the upper limit value, it is highly likely that the detection is due to some kind of fraud. Therefore, by turning off the probable change enable flag 203o, the update of the probable change setting flag 203h is prohibited, thereby suppressing improper behavior.

  When the processing in S1419 ends, the value of the probability change valid timer 203p is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1420), and the processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1418, if it is determined that the value of the probable change valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value (less than the upper limit value) (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1410 described above.

  Thus, if the probability change valid timer 203p is not at the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability change state of the special symbol in consideration of the time of ball ejection. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time when it is determined that the passing of the probability change switch is valid, it is possible to prevent a ball from being illegally passed through the probability change switch and the special symbol's probability change state being given.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. When the prize-winning process (S1111) is executed, then, an abnormality process for detecting an abnormality that has occurred during the special game state (big hit state) is executed (S1112), and this process ends. Here, details of the abnormal processing (S1112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this abnormal processing (S1112).

  In the abnormal process (S1112), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is within the round validity period (S1501). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round validity period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the ball has passed the ball outlet switch provided in the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650. It is determined (S1502). If it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball discharge switch (S1502: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is updated by adding 1 to the value (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1504.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504). If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1504: No), this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball is being thrown, so 1 is added to the remaining ball timer 203n that measures the ball throwing period. And update (S1505). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (that is, whether three seconds have elapsed since the closing of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (3 seconds have not elapsed) (S1506: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1505, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of discharged balls (the total value of the positive variable passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203q) is determined. It is determined whether or not the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203j) matches (S1507).

  In the process of S1507, if it is determined that the number of discharged balls and the number of winnings match (S1507: Yes), the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of discharged balls and the number of winnings do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201 in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is set, and an output of an error signal is set to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from remaining illegally in the first variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of passing the balls through the probability change switch.

  In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1510). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203q, and the probability change counter 203i are reset to the initial values, respectively (S1511), and the process ends.

  Next, the winning information command setting process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The winning information command setting process (S1008) is a process for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the passing status of a ball to various winning ports (ball entrances) as described above.

  In the winning information command setting processing, first, the winning detection information stored in the switch reading processing (S101) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is read (S1601). Then, it is determined whether there is new winning detection information (whether any entrance has a new ball) (S1602), and if there is no new winning detecting information (S1603), This processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1602, when it is determined that new winning detection information is present (S1602: Yes), a winning opening (winning opening) that detects a ball (winning) according to the new winning detection information. Is set (S1603). The winning information command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes, and each winning bit or out port is associated with each bit of the 2 bytes. Then, the bit corresponding to the winning opening (ball entrance) that detects the ball entry (winning) is set to 1, and the bit corresponding to the winning opening (ball entrance) where the ball has not entered is set to 0. After being set, it is output as a winning information command. When the processing in S1603 ends, the stored winning detection information is cleared (S1604), and the processing ends.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether there is a problem in the intellectual storage device 600 and whether or not the player is playing an irregular game in accordance with the winning information command. If a failure or the like has occurred, a display error command corresponding to the type of the failure is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display error command is received by the display control device 114, an error is notified in the third symbol display device 81.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 41, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current start-up processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1816 (see FIG. 42) ) Are determined to be started during execution (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, upon receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S1813 in FIG. 42), audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1816. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1816 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1702: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off processing in S1816 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1703).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1704. On the other hand, this start-up process is started after a momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1516 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the processing is started by the user, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the process proceeds to S1708.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1702: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1816, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1704, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1706). By confirming the keyword of “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S1708, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when executing the power-off process in S1816 (see S1815 in FIG. 42). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1816 is executed, the process of S1708 in the state where the power-off flag is on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1816 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1709), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason that the process of step S1708 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of step S1708 proceeds from step S1704 to step S1706. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), the process skips S1709, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1710, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1710). Next, the probable change state flag 223f and the probable change state counter 223g are updated according to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S1711), interruption permission is set (S1712), and the process proceeds to the main processing. Transition. By updating the probable state flag 223f and the probable state counter 223g based on the state command, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, an effect can be appropriately executed according to the game state.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1709 is skipped is that when the process from S1704 to S1708 is performed via the process of S1706, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1704. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1801 was executed (S1801). If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1811 without performing the processes of S1802 to S1810. In the processing of S1801, whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly determined in S1802 to S1810, which is processing relating to display (effect), whereas editing is not necessary in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , S1811 and the variable display setting process in S1812 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1811 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1812 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1803 to S1812 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1802). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1804). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1805 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1805, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect, and responds when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

  Upon completion of the frame button input monitoring / production process, a lamp editing process is executed (S1808), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1809, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1809 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1811). The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S1812. In the process of S1812, a variable display setting process is executed (S1812). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1813). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1813 (S1813: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1815), and the power-off processing is executed (S1816). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1817), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1813 (S1813: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1814), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1814: No), the process returns to S1801, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1814: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination processing (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1811). This command determination process (S1811) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing for.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S1901). When the variation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1903). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 47) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906). Return to processing. The extracted stop type is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 47) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1907). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of times N1 of the variable display is held in the special symbol) or the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the main control device 110. The value of the number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol is suspended) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). In the process of S1908, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the updated special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set. After the end of the process in S1908, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the audio lamp control device 113 are processed by the processing of S1908. The value of the number counter 223c can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is detected when detecting a winning start or a special symbol lottery. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1908 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. Is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1907, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S1907: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1909). Then, when the status command is received (S1909: Yes), the probable change status flag 203f and the time saving status counter 203g are updated according to the gaming status notified by the status command (S1910), and the process ends. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1909 that no status command has been received (S1909: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1911). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball was a normal one based on the winning information command, and an error is reported if there is a possibility of malfunction or impropriety. An error notification process is performed (S1912), and the process ends.

  on the other hand. In the process of S1911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), then it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S1913), and if the opening command has been received (S1913). (S1913: Yes), the big hit flag 223h is set to ON, and a counter value (1000) corresponding to one second is set to the value of the allowable time counter 223i (S1914). Then, a display opening command is set (S1915), and the process ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When receiving the opening command for display, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1913 that the opening command has not been received (S1913: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1916). When it is determined that the ending command has been received by the processing of S1916 (S1916: Yes), the big hit flag 223h is set to OFF, and the counter value (1000) corresponding to 1 second to the value of the allowable time counter 223i is set. Is set (S1917), an ending command for display is set (S1918), and the process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the ending command for display, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the process of S1916 (S1911: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1919). ), And return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, a processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the error notification process (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. As described above, this error notification process is a process for notifying an error when there is a possibility of malfunction or fraud. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the error notification processing (S1912).

  In the error notification process (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 223h is on (S1931). If it is on (S1931: Yes), the winning information notified by the received winning information command is received. It is determined whether or not winning information to the first entrance 64 is included (S1932). Then, when it is determined that the winning information to the first entrance 64 is included (S1932: Yes), the player makes a left-handed shot despite the big hit, and as a result, the first entrance 64 Means that the ball has entered. In other words, despite the special game state (big hit state), the player is performing a game method (how to hit) in which the ball is unlikely to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. Means that the person is losing. Therefore, in order to cause the player to obtain a prize ball in the special game state (big hit state), a display error command corresponding to the left strike warning image (see FIG. 7A) is set (S1933), and the processing is performed. Is shifted to S1934.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. The display control device 114 displays the left strike warning image (FIG. 7A) on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display back image change command. The left-hitting warning image (FIG. 7A) can prompt a player who has left-handed in the special game state (big hit state) to perform right-handing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing, and to more reliably acquire the prize ball.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1932 that the winning information command does not include the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the first entrance 64 (S1932: No), the processing of S1933 is skipped and the processing is skipped. Is shifted to S1934.

  In the process of S1934, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S1934). If the counter value is 0 (S1934: Yes), a problem occurs in the storage valve 607a during the big hit. If so, a hit time notification process for performing notification is executed (S1935), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S1934: No), the ball ejection period (1 second) after the storage valve 607a is set to the open state. Since it has not elapsed, the process of S1935 is skipped, and this process ends. That is, if the ball that has flowed (progressed) into the guiding flow path 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a is opened enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 during the ball ejection period, a problem occurs. Is prevented from being determined.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1931 that the big hit flag 223h is not on (is off) (S1931: No), it is determined whether the value of the allowable time counter 233i is 0 (S1936). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S1936: Yes), it is notified when a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a during normal times (any of the special symbol change state, the normal symbol time saving state, and the normal state). (S1937), and terminates the present process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S1936: No), the ball is thrown after the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state based on the end of the big hit. Since this means that the period (1 second) has not elapsed, the process of S1937 is skipped, and this process ends. That is, if the ball that has flowed (progressed) into the guiding flow path 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a is closed enters the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 during the ball ejection period, a problem occurs. Is prevented from being determined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the hit time notification process (S1935) for notifying when a failure occurs in the storage valve 607a during a big hit will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the hit time notification processing (S1935).

  In the hit time notification processing (S1935), first, the winning information command determined to be received in the processing of S1911 in the command determination processing (see FIG. 43) is added to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is determined whether or not the corresponding winning information is included (S1941). If the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1941: Yes), even during the jackpot that the storage valve 607a should be set to the open state. Regardless, it means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided downstream of the guiding flow path 606. That is, the storage valve 607a cannot be opened due to a failure of the storage valve 607a, and the state in which the sphere is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a can be continued. There is. Therefore, in this case, a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1942), and the process ends.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display error command, the display control device 114 generates a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a failure in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  Note that the ball that has flowed into the guiding flow path 606 may also enter the out port 603a disposed on the left side of the general winning opening 601 in the storage device 600, but may enter the out port 603a. The corresponding prize information is not a target for determining whether or not a failure has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because, among the balls flowing into the guiding flow path 606, a small percentage of the balls flow down to the out port 603a, most of the balls flow into the general winning port (small value winning port) 601 and the large hit. Because a large amount of balls flow into the storage device 600 during monitoring, it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a malfunction has occurred by monitoring the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Further, by determining only winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning port (small value winning port) 601, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining whether or not the ball has entered the out port 603 a. Thus, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the process of S1941, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entry to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1941: No), then the received winning information command includes It is determined whether or not winning information corresponding to the ball entry to the winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1943), and the winning corresponding to the ball entry to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is determined. If the information is included (S1943: Yes), it is updated by adding 1 to the value of the winning number counter 223j (S1944). Then, a display rear image change command is set in order to update the big hit image in accordance with the value of the updated winning number counter 233j (S1945).

  The display back image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. , To the display control device 114. The display control device 114 updates the display content of the winning number display area MA in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display back image change command. More specifically, after an image in which the number of times of ball entry (number of EXTRA BONUS) to the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 shown in FIG. The image shown in FIG. 6A corresponding to the number of subsequent ball entry is displayed. By displaying the number of hits to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the jackpot in the winning count display area MA, the number of hits to the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a in the jackpot is determined. In addition, the player can recognize the number of times the prize ball has been acquired. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation that the number of times of ball entry to the general winning opening (high winning opening) 602 will increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the present embodiment, when the ball entry information corresponding to the ball entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included, it is determined that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 604a. However, the display error command may be set even when the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the out exit 603a. This makes it possible to more quickly and reliably determine that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

  Next, referring to FIG. 46, a notification is made in the event that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 607a during normal times (any of the probable change state of the special symbol, the time reduction state of the normal symbol, and the normal state). The normal time notification process will be described. In the normal time notification process (S1937), first, it is determined whether or not the probable change state flag 223f is on (S1951). If it is determined that the probable change state flag 223f is not on (S1951), the present state is not the probable change state of the special symbol (S1951). This means that the special symbol is in a low probability state), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1952). In the processing of S1952, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 223g is 0 (S1952: No), it is determined that the present time is neither a special change state of the special symbol nor a time reduction state of the ordinary symbol (the normal state). means.

  In this case, in order to determine whether or not the player has made a right strike and whether or not the operation of the storage valve 607a has failed, first, the received prize information command is added to the general prize port (high value). It is determined whether or not winning information corresponding to the ball entry to the winning opening 602 is included (S1953). Then, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entry to the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 is included (S1953: Yes), the ball is not in the special gaming state (big hit state). Flows downstream from the position to be closed by the storage valve 607a. That is, there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, or that the player has thrown a ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by an unauthorized method. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1954), and the process ends.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display error command, the display control device 114 generates a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a failure in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  In the state in which the storage valve 607a is left open due to a problem, the ball that has flowed into the guiding flow path 607 is sent out from the general prize port (high value prize port) 602 to the right and left out ports 603b. , 603c, there is a possibility of entering the ball, but the prize information corresponding to the ball entry into the out ports 603b, 603c is not determined as to whether or not a failure has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because, of the balls that have flowed into the guiding flow path 607, a small percentage of the balls flow down to the out ports 603b and 603c, and most of the balls flow into the general winning port (high value winning port) 602. By monitoring the general winning opening (high winning opening) 602, it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a problem has occurred. Further, by determining only winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning port (high value winning port) 602, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining whether or not the ball has entered the out ports 603b and 603c. As a result, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Further, in the processing of S1953, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entry to the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 is not included in the winning information command (S1953: No), then the general winning is performed. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the ball entry to the mouth (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955). If it is determined that the winning information command is not included, the process ends as it is. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955: Yes), in the normal state (special change state of the special symbol, This means that the player is right-handed despite the normal symbol time reduction state and the normal state. In other words, it means that the player is playing a game by a game method in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 and the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is small. Therefore, in this case, the game is displayed by displaying a right strike warning image (see FIG. 5B) that prompts the player to play the game by aiming at the first entrance 64 by left strike. It is possible to prevent a person from losing and to receive a lottery of the special symbol 1.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1951 that the probable change state flag 223f is ON (S1951: Yes), or if it is determined in the processing of S1952 that the value of the time reduction state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1952: Yes), It is determined whether or not the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to a ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (S1957). Then, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1957: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1957 that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1957: Yes), it is not in the special gaming state (big hit state). Nevertheless, this means that the sphere is flowing downstream of the storage valve 607a. In other words, there is a possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed or the player illegally enters the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in a state where the storage valve 607a is closed. high. Therefore, in this case, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1958), and the process ends.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display error command, the display control device 114 generates a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a failure in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the ball entry information corresponding to the ball entry to the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 is included, it is determined that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 604a. However, the display error command may be set even when the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to the ball entering the out ports 603b and 603c. This makes it possible to more quickly and reliably determine that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1812). The variable display setting process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2001). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2001: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S2006. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the change start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then, in the process of S1903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43), the change pattern is set. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2004). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2005). In the process of S2005, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2006.

  In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S2006). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2006: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that steps S2007 to S2013 are performed. The processing skips the steps up to and proceeds to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2007). The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2008), and the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is used as it is for the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. It is set as a stop type (S2008). Next, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2009). The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  When the process of S2009 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter 223g is greater than 0 (S2010: No). No), the process proceeds to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 203g is larger than 0 (S2010: Yes), first, the value of the time reduction state counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S2011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 203g after the subtraction is 0 (S2012). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S2012), the normal symbol time saving state is changed from the normal symbol normal time state (Probability state), a back image change command for switching to the back image corresponding to the normal state is set (S2013), and the process proceeds to S2014.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2012, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 203g is not 0 (S2012: No), it means that the time reduction state of the normal symbol is continued, and the back corresponding to the time reduction state of the normal symbol is determined. There is no need to change from the image. Therefore, in this case, the process of S2013 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2014.

  Note that the back image displayed during the time saving state is, specifically, a back image on which a right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5A) is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the big hit is completed, the pachinko machine 10 is switched to the back type in which the right-hand navigation is displayed regardless of the big hit type. Then, when the time saving state of the ordinary symbol ends, the display is switched to the normal state rear image in which the right-handed navigation is not displayed. If the special symbol is in the probable change state after the end of the jackpot, the special symbol probable change state continues until the next jackpot is reached, so that the rear view type in which the right-handed navigation is displayed is not changed.

  In the process of S2014, it is determined whether the value of the allowable time counter 223i is greater than 0 (S2014). If the value is determined to be greater than 0 (S2014: Yes), the value of the allowable time counter 223i is set to 1 The value is subtracted and updated (S2015), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S2014: No), the process of S2015 is skipped, and the process ends. By the processing of S2014 and S2015, the value of the allowable time counter 223i can be updated periodically.

  In the present embodiment, the back type set for the probable change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol are common, but different back types may be displayed. Thereby, various effects can be realized. Further, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display the remaining time-saving period according to the value of the time-saving state counter 203g. This allows the player to easily recognize the remaining time reduction period.

  In the present embodiment, the allowable time counter 223h is updated in the variable display setting process (S1812), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the update may be performed in a process (sound editing / output process, liquid crystal effect execution management process, etc.) executed every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 42). Thereby, the permissible time counter 223h can be updated periodically.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting the execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 of the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S2101), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2101) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2201). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2202). Accordingly, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2202, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing in S2202, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data, which have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a, are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2203). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2204), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S2101 in FIG. 48). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power-up initialization process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) (S2205), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S2201) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 49, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1902. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2203 to S2205 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2201 transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2201. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S2202 and S2202, the processing of S2203 to S2205 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2203 to S2205 without performing the processes of S2201 and S2202. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2102). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2103). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2103, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2104). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller responds to this transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2104, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2105). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 59A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 59A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50 (b)), the simple command determination processing (FIG. 50 (b) (see S2408) and simple display setting processing (see S2409 in FIG. 50 (b)).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. Since the player has started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued. If the main controller 110 has received the display variation pattern command via the audio lamp controller 113, that is, if the display variation pattern command has been received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and the simple variation is performed. You can make a production. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S2105, interruption permission is set (S2106), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S2106, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2301), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 50B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S2402) is executed to display on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S2403) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2402), the contents of the command from the sound ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2403), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2402) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S2404). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2403) or the simple display setting process (S2409). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2406). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2404), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S2405) are used. 24, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As the counter updated by the process of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out reach, complete) The stop type table corresponding to (miss, chance) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2401 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2401: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2408) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2409) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2404.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55, details of the above-described command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 51, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2503).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2504). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2504: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2505), and returns to the process of S2501.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2505) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2601).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2601, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2601 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2601 is turned on, and other variation table data is set. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2603). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2603, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2604), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2605). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2606), the variation pattern command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2605, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601 is updated while updating the pointer 233f. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S2602. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2604, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2504, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2506). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2507), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2507) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, complete out, and chance) indicated by the stop type command for display. Is determined (S2701), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S2702).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. Is set (S2703), and this process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2702. In the above-described task processing (S2404), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2702 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S2703, and the specification is performed. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the main control device 110 always determines the start of the change at a distance of several seconds or more, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of step S2701, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S2702.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present embodiment, in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete departure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Referring back to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the process of S2506, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2506: No), then it is determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2508), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S2508: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2509) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S2801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2803). S2804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2805), the opening command processing is completed, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2804, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801 is updated. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. As will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the newly started round number is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting time is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a possibility that time will be generated and the player will feel uneasy as to whether or not the operation has stopped, or give the player a sense of discomfort.

  Also, since the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when all of the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (15 rounds) are completed, If the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, a long waiting time is required between the end of the round effect and the start of the ending effect. This may cause the player to feel uneasy as to whether or not the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that time, and until the change display of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 ends. , The transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is controlled to end. Thus, when the opening effect is completed on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and all of the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds). ) When the game is finished, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not have anxiety as to whether or not the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Referring back to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2508, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2510). If there is a round number command for use (S2510: Yes), a round number command process is executed (S2511), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the round number command processing (S2511) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2905), the round number command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2510, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2512), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S2512: Yes), the ending command processing is executed (S2513), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the ending command processing (S2513) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3003). S3004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3006), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2512, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2514). If there is a change command (S2514: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S2515), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2515) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3603) of the change of the rear image accompanying the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). . Then, among the rear image determination flags provided for each of the rear image types, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and the rear image corresponding to the other rear image type is turned on. The discrimination flag is set to off (S3102), the back image change command processing ends, and the flow returns to the command judgment processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S3101 is turned on, the back image type after the change is identified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S3102. . When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task process, if it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S3102 is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2514, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2516). If it is (S2516: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2517), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3202). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S3201, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S3202 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2516 that there is no error command (S2516: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2518), and the processing returns to S2501.

  In the processing of S2501 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S2502 to S2518 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S2501 to S2518 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S2501 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. The extracted and executed variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 52 (b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, are executed. A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2601. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on which are set and required in this case are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the fluctuation image area at power-on 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S2602, processing of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S2403), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S3302 to S3304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S3302), and then S3303 to S3304. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3304).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3401).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Various parameters are determined.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3304) or in the process of S3303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3303: No), the process proceeds to S3305.

  In S3305, a pointer update process is performed (S3305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3501). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3501, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S3502). As a result, if it is End information (S3502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3503: Yes), the display data table buffer is determined. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3505), and the present processing is terminated and the display is completed. Return to the setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the rendering contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S3506). ), End this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Thus, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the address immediately before the End information is described. Since the drawing content is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3502: No), the process ends and returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3306 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S3309).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3309: Yes), the effect of the confirmed display has not yet been performed, and the effect of the confirmed display has been performed. The setting is made (S3310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3313). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3314), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3315), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2404), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3309, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S3309: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S3316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3316: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and the demonstration display data table is stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S3317), and then write Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3318). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3321), and the process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, if the display variation pattern command or the opening command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S3316: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended. Therefore, the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, the power-on fluctuation image corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that defines display in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2405), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S3602), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3603), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3602).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S3701). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S3701: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3702). In the process of S3702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3702 (S3702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3702: Yes), the process moves to S3703. Also, as a result of the process of S3701, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3701: No), the process proceeds to S3703.

  In the processing of S3703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3703). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3703, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S2408 in FIG. 50 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S2409 in FIG. 50 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are performed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 60) (see S3601: No in FIG. 59A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3603), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3603).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3305) of the previously executed display setting process (S2403). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S3801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3802). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S3802: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. , The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3804), and the flow shifts to the processing of S3805.

  Also, in the process of S3802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3802: No), the process of S3803 and S3804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3805. In the process of S3805, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3805), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been performed (S3805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3806).

  In the process of S3806, after setting a transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3806 (S3806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to S3807. Also, as a result of the processing in S3805, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing has been completed (S3805: No), the processing moves to S3807.

  In the processing of S3807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3807). If the transfer start flag is on (S3807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S3808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various types of information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S3803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S3813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3807: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S3809). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3809: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3810), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image indicated by the back image determination flag, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. The start address is obtained (S3812), and the flow shifts to the process of S3813.

  In the processing of S3813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813). The determination in the process of S3813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3813 (S3813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3813, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3814). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S3814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3815), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, details of the above-described drawing processing (S2406), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2404) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information The drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405) (S3901). That is, in the process of S3901, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2404). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image rendered on one frame buffer is developed, so that the rendering process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 50B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, two types of prize ports (the first specific prize port 65a and the second specific prize port 650a) are set as the prize ports opened in the special game state (big hit state). ), So that either winning opening is opened according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each of these two types of winning ports is configured as a winning port in which a large amount (15) of winning balls are paid out when a ball enters. Further, the two types of winning ports (first specific winning port 65a and second specific winning port 650a) are both provided on the right path (flow path) of the game board 13. Thereby, the ball can be made to enter even if any winning opening is opened only by launching the ball to the right side of the game board 13 during the special game state (big hit state). Therefore, the number of prize balls paid out in the special game state (big hit state) can be made hard to be influenced by the skill of the player, so that the player can enjoy the game with confidence even if he is a beginner.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, two types of winning ports (a first specific winning port 65a and a second specific winning port 650a) are provided on a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. A storage device 600 provided with a plurality of winning ports on the upstream side is provided. This storage device 600 is configured such that when the player makes a right-handed hit, a part of the hit ball is allowed to flow into the inside thereof, and the hit ball is transferred to a different winning opening. A plurality of flow paths for flowing down are provided. Specifically, the number of award balls is compared with the guide channel 606 for letting the ball flow down to a general winning port (small value winning port) 601 having a relatively small number of award balls (three award balls). A guiding flow path 607 for letting a ball flow down to a general winning port (a large value winning port) 602 having many targets (15 prize balls) is provided. The number of award balls that can be obtained can be made different depending on the type of the guiding flow path that flows down. Therefore, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the flow path of the flow path where the ball flows down to the player. The type can be observed interestingly.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the storage that can close the guiding flow path 607 for letting the ball flow down to the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 having a relatively large number of prize balls (the number of prize balls is 15). A valve 607a is provided in the guide channel 607. The storage valve 607a is set to an open state during a special game state (during a big hit state), and is set to a closed state during other game states. In addition, the respective guiding channels are arranged such that the game balls flowing into the inside of the storage device 600 are basically easier to flow into the guiding channel 607 than the guiding channel 606 (FIG. 9 ( b)). Therefore, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to being able to obtain a prize ball by allowing the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, it is provided downstream of the guiding flow path 607. A prize ball can be obtained by allowing the ball to enter the general prize port (high value prize port) 602 that has been set. The storage device 600 is provided on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, and the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, This is because the ball can enter both the storage device 600 and the storage device 600. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the merit of the player due to the big hit can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with more pleasure to be a big hit, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a win is made, and if the lottery result is a winning lottery result, a specific winning opening is opened and the specific winning opening is opened. There is one that gives a large amount of prize balls based on the entry of a ball (for example, JP-A-2001-129177). In this conventional gaming machine, a plurality of prize holes are provided in addition to the specific prize hole, and a specific prize hole is provided by adjoining the specific prize hole with another prize hole. There is a configuration in which a ball hit and aimed can enter both a specific winning opening and another winning opening. Here, as one of the triggers when a specific number of balls enter the specific winning opening, it is common to control so that the specific winning opening is closed. The number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player per hit increases as the ball enters another winning port before the number of prize balls reaches the specific number. Therefore, by placing a specific winning opening adjacent to another winning opening, the number of prize balls per hit can be increased, and the player's expectation of hitting can be further improved.

  However, in conventional gaming machines, even in a state other than winning, an irregular gaming method of acquiring a prize ball by hitting a ball aiming at another prize port adjacent to a specific prize port may be performed. Was.

  On the other hand, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the guide valve 607 is closed by the storage valve 607a. In this state, one ball can be stored in the space defined by the upper part of the storage valve 607a and the upstream part of the guide flow path 607. Therefore, the storage device 600 is first closed after the storage valve 607a is closed. The ball that has flowed into the inside is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. When the ball flows into the storage device 600 in a state where the ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, the ball flows into the guiding flow path 602 by colliding with the stored ball and changing the flowing direction. (See FIG. 9B). Therefore, even if the ball enters the storage device 600 in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with few prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the merit of making the ball enter the storage device 600. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, by constantly aiming at the storage device 600, the irregular game method of increasing the number of balls by paying out only the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 is not fundamentally established. In a state other than the gaming state (big hit state), a game can be played in the expectation of a big hit by performing a special symbol lottery.

  The storage device 600 is configured such that one out of every three right-hit balls hits. Then, when the ball enters the general winning opening (small winning opening) 601, the number of award balls to be paid out is 3 balls. That is, even if a right-handed game is performed in a game state other than the special game state (big hit state), it is difficult to perform a lottery of a special symbol, and the payout based on the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Nor can you increase the sphere. This eliminates the merit of right-handing in the normal state, and makes it possible for the player to play a game with the aim of achieving a big win by lottery of special symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the guiding flow path 606 enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, and the ball flowing down the guiding flow path 607 enters the general entrance opening 602. , But is not limited to this. For example, on the downstream side of each guide flow path, a known clune means provided with a plurality of winning ports is provided, and different payout balls are paid out according to the winning ports to enter. Is also good. As a result, even if it flows down the guiding flow path 606, many prize balls can be obtained by entering the prize port having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, the player can be watched with interest until the ball that has entered the storage device 600 enters any of the winning ports. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more enjoyed.

  In the present embodiment, the guide valve 607 is closed by the storage valve 607a, so that the sphere can be stored on the way of the guide flow path 607. The sphere may be stored on the way of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the guide flow path 607, and magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than during the special game state (during the big hit state). Thus, the sphere that first flows into the guiding flow path 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the sphere can be stopped from flowing down (the sphere can be stored at the position of the electromagnet). With this configuration, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact. In this case, the width of the guide channel 607 is increased (for example, in FIG. 8, the branch member 604 and the storage valve 607a are omitted), and the guide channel 605 of the guide channel 607 is removed. An electromagnet may be embedded only in a portion directly below the electromagnet, and a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 may be provided immediately below the portion in which the electromagnet is embedded. Furthermore, if there is a ball that has been attracted by the electromagnet and has stopped flowing down, the stopped ball and other spheres come into contact with the electromagnet portion and the flowing direction is changed, so that the electromagnet is not embedded. The portion may flow down and flow down in a direction different from the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Then, a general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 may be provided below a portion of the induction flow path 607 where the electromagnet is not embedded. Thereby, since the branching member 604 can be eliminated, the number of components of the storage device 600 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one ball is stored above the storage valve 607a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that two or more balls can be stored. Further, when storing a plurality of spheres, the spheres may be stored vertically or may be arranged side by side.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the sphere can be stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be provided at the upper end portion of the guide flow path 607 so that when the storage valve 607a is closed, the sphere cannot flow into the guide flow path 607. With the configuration in which the ball is not stored, the ball can be discharged without remaining in the storage device 600 even if the ball is hit right in a state other than the special game state (big hit state).

  In particular, in the first embodiment, the second entrance 640 is easily opened in the high probability state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot or in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Further, in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the start winning to the second entrance 640), the game is compared with the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the starting winning to the first entrance 64). Jackpot B, which is advantageous to the elderly. Therefore, when the jackpot ends, the player launches a ball in an attempt to make the ball enter the second entrance 640 by right-handing. Therefore, for example, when the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol ends, the ball is stored in the storage device 600 with a high probability. This may cause the player to feel that the ball has been damaged. On the other hand, by providing the storage valve 607a at the upper end of the guide channel 607 and not storing the ball in the storage device 600, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball has been completely used up. . Therefore, the satisfaction can be given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 and 602 and the out openings 603a to 603c are provided inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this structure. For example, the second winning opening 640 may be provided at a position where the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is provided. That is, in the first embodiment, the second entrance 640 provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 is moved to the inside of the storage device 600. You may. Further, in this case, the opening condition of the storage valve 607a is set, for example, such that the storage valve 607a is opened when a special symbol lottery is executed 1000 times without a big hit after the big hit is completed. You may.

  Thereby, when the special symbol lottery is executed 1000 times after the jackpot has been completed, the ball can be made to enter the second entrance 640 by right-handing, so that the special symbol 2 Can be executed. In the first embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second entrance 640 is configured to be five, but in the case of the present modification, the number of payouts is three. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may become. That is, since the number of balls that can enter the storage device 600 when right-handed is one out of three balls, by performing right-handed after the storage valve 607a is opened, One ball per three balls can enter the second entrance 640. In other words, it is possible to receive the lottery of the special symbol 2 while maintaining the holding ball. With such a configuration, even if a lottery of a special symbol is repeated without a big hit (so-called a large spike occurs), a game is expected with the expectation that the storage valve 607a will be opened. Can be performed. Therefore, even if the period during which the jackpot does not become large is increased, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation for the game. In addition, by increasing the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second entrance 640 (for example, to 10), after the storage valve 607a is opened, the ball can be hit only by right-handing. You may comprise so that it may increase. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the merit in a case where the lottery of the special symbol is missed continuously 1000 times or more. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot, we hope that you will win again with a small number of special symbol lotteries, and if you continue to lose the special symbol lottery, continue to miss the special symbol lottery more than 1000 times continuously I can make you wish. Further, after the storage valve 607a is opened, the number of balls increases only by right-handing, so that the ball is increased by paying out for the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 by continuing to depart from the special symbol lottery. It can be hoped that the state of increasing will last for a long time. Therefore, depending on the number of special symbol lotteries, it is possible to make the player want to win a special symbol lottery or to continue to deviate from the special symbol lottery. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, the storage device 600 has a configuration in which only one storage valve 604a is provided, but a plurality of storage valves 604a may be provided. Specifically, the downstream side of the guide channel 606 may be configured to branch in two directions, and one of the channels may be provided with a storage valve that is opened only during the special game state (during the big hit state). That is, the same configuration as the guide channels 606 and 607 and the branch member 604 may be further provided downstream of the guide channel 606. A general winning port with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15) is provided downstream of the flow path on the side where the storage valve is provided, and a small number of prize balls is provided on a flow path without the storage valve (for example, 15). (3) General winning openings may be provided. With this configuration, a larger number of balls can be stored in the storage device 600, so that a special game state (big hit state) is started, and each storage valve is opened to store the balls. The balls that have been played can be simultaneously flowed down to a general winning port having a large number of prize balls (for example, 15). Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit can be increased. Also, instead of providing a plurality of storage valves inside the storage device 600, a plurality of storage devices 600 may be provided in a path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13. Also in the case of such a configuration, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit can be increased as in the case of providing a plurality of storage valves.

  In the present embodiment, a storage device 600 is provided downstream of the second entrance 640 in a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, and a first variable prize device is provided downstream of the storage device 600. Although the second variable prize device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable prize device 65, the arrangement is not limited to this arrangement and may be an arbitrary arrangement. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 may be arranged upstream of the second ball entrance 640. In the arrangement of the first embodiment, in the special game state (big hit state), a ball that has been launched to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650 is first set in the second entrance opening. There is a case where it is difficult to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a when the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. By arranging it on the upstream side, a prize ball can be more smoothly acquired during the special game state (during the big hit state).

  Further, by arranging the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a on the upstream side, and by arranging the first specific winning opening 650a on the upstream side with respect to the storage device 600, the storage device during the special game state (during the big hit state). It can be prevented (suppressed) that the ball enters only at 600 and the ball does not easily reach the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, each round in the special game state (during the big hit state) can be advanced more smoothly.

  In the present embodiment, the first entry port 64 and the second specific entry port 640 are provided as entry ports serving as a chance to win a special symbol lottery, but either one may be omitted. For example, the configuration may be such that the second entrance 640 is eliminated and the motorized accessory 640 is provided for the first entrance 64. Thereby, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the merit of launching the ball on the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 is further reduced. It is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) a natural game method.

  In the present embodiment, in the special game state (big hit state), when a ball flows into the storage device 600 (enters a ball), the ball enters the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 where many prize balls are paid out. In addition, the number of balls that have entered the general entrance 602 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in one special game state (big hit state). May be configured. Thereby, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to obtaining a prize ball by making a prize to the first specific prize port 65a or the second specific prize port 650a, how much extra prize ball is obtained. Can be recognized by the player. Therefore, since it is possible to make the general prize port (high value prize port) 602 seem to be made to enter more balls, it is possible to have a target of the number of balls entered. The number of winnings in the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 does not necessarily need to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a dedicated display device may be separately provided. Thereby, in the third symbol display device 81, the effect during the big hit state can be executed in a wider display area.

  In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering (winning) the first specific winning opening 65a, and the ball entering (winning) the second specific winning opening 650a. The number of prize balls paid out based on the same number (15) as the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering (winning) into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is assumed. , But is not limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering (prize) into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is changed to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. May be configured to be smaller (for example, 10) than the number of prize balls paid out based on entering (prize). As a result, even if the ball only flows into the storage device 600 as a result of the ball being deviated in the special game state (big hit state), the disadvantage to the hole can be reduced.

  On the contrary, the number of award balls to be paid out based on the ball entering (general winning) a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is determined by the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 65a. The configuration may be such that the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering (winning) into the winning opening 650a is larger than the number of award balls. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls paid out by entering (winning) the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a is set to 10, and a general winning opening (high value winning opening). The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters (wins) the ball 602 may be set to 15. Thereby, the profit that the player can enjoy by flowing the ball into the storage device 600 in the special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the player's interest in the big hit game can be further improved. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is opened based on the start of the jackpot, and the storage valve 607a is closed based on the end of the jackpot. Is not limited to this. It may be set to be opened only for a shorter period than in the present embodiment, or may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state a plurality of times in a big hit. For example, the storage valve 607a may be opened based on the interval period set between the jackpot rounds, and the storage valve 607a may be closed based on the end of the interval period. By limiting the period during which the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (release state) to the interval period, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of prize balls paid out in one big hit from becoming too large. That is, it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in a single jackpot, so that the sales of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily predicted. Further, by opening the storage valve 607a during the interval period, the storage valve 607a is provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the interval period (that is, the state in which the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are closed). Part of the sphere that has reached the downstream of the path (flow path) can flow into the storage device 600. In other words, even during the interval period, a prize ball can be obtained by making the ball enter the general winning opening 602. Therefore, the ball can be prevented from being wasted even during the interval period.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is configured to be closed at the start of the jackpot ending effect, but may be configured to be closed at the end of the ending effect. This allows a part of the ball remaining on the board at the start of the ending effect to flow into the storage device 600. That is, a prize ball can be obtained by entering a ball into the general winning opening 602 during the ending effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted during the ending effect. Further, the storage valve 607a is kept open until a certain period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the ending effect ends, and the storage valve 607a is closed after a certain period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. It may be configured to switch to the state. This allows a part of the ball remaining on the board at the end of the ending effect to flow into the storage device 600. In other words, a prize ball can be obtained by entering a ball into the general winning opening 602 after the end of the ending effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the ball less likely to be wasted after the ending effect ends.

  Further, the storage valve 607a is opened when a game state different from the special game state (big hit state) is set, and the storage valve 607a is opened when the set game state is changed to another game state. May be closed. For example, the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened during a period in which the special symbol change state is set. Accordingly, in the special symbol change state, the ball is moved to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 having a large number of award balls to be paid out while receiving the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is likely to be a big hit B by right-handing. Can be entered. Therefore, it is possible to make the special symbol sure change state more advantageous for the player. Further, the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened when the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Basically, the time-saving state of a normal symbol is a state in which the player has less merit than the positively changing state of the special symbol, but the storage valve 607a can be configured to be opened during the time-saving state of the normal symbol. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the time is reduced to the normal symbol.

  In addition, instead of switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the game state or the like, or in addition to switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the game state or the like, the storage valve 607a is switched at an arbitrary timing of the player. You may comprise so that a state can be switched. This allows each player to play a game in the state of the storage valve 607a according to his / her taste.

  In the present embodiment, the out port is provided inside the storage device 600, but a winning port for paying out prize balls may be provided instead of the out port. Further, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the winning opening may be made different. More specifically, for example, six winning balls are provided in place of the out mouth 603a, ten winning balls are provided in place of the out mouth 603b, and a winning ball is provided in place of the out mouth 603c. May have twelve winning ports. Accordingly, it is possible to more interestingly observe the case where the ball flows down the guiding flow path 606 or into which winning opening the ball enters the guiding flow path 607. Further, a member such as a nail, which can change the flowing direction of a ball, may be provided downstream of the guide channel 606 or the guide channel 607 so that a winning hole into which any ball enters becomes more random. . Thereby, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the whereabouts of the ball can be more interestingly observed until the ball enters one of the winning openings. In addition, by providing nails or the like, it is possible to set a ball entrance through which a clerk of the hall easily enters a ball. Therefore, the pitching rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hall side.

  In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the storage valve 607a are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. Then, control may be performed such that the storage valve 607a is switched to the open state when the opening command is received from the main controller 110, and the storage valve 607a is switched to the closed state when the ending command is received. Thus, the processing load on MPU 201 of main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute a variable effect selection process, a special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are main processes related to the game, without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (release state) in the special game state (big hit state), and the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state) in a state other than the special game state (big hit state). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 604a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. Further, it may be configured to switch based on a result of a lottery performed regularly or irregularly. For example, the storage 607a is basically configured to be in a closed state (storage state), and a lottery is performed once a minute to determine whether or not to switch to an open state (released state). Is also good. Further, when the lottery is won, for example, the storage valve 607a may be opened for 10 seconds. As a result, if the lottery is won and the ball can flow into the storage device 600 with the storage valve 607a set to the open state (released state), the ball is moved to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Can be made to enter the ball, so that the player can play the game in hope of winning more lotteries. Furthermore, the lottery probability of the lottery for determining whether or not to set the storage valve 607a to the open state (canceled state) may be configured so that a clerk of the hall or the like can adjust the lottery probability. Accordingly, when the player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict a table having a good lottery probability and select a table. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit and the like when setting the lottery probability of the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting the platform before starting the game. .

  In the present embodiment, according to the jackpot type, the jackpot (jackpot B) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at the timing when it is easy to enter the certainty changing ball opening 654 in the twelfth round of the big hit and the certainty changing ball There is provided a big hit (big hit A) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at a timing when it is difficult to enter the mouth 654, and either of the effects is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit. You may be comprised so that it may indicate a jackpot type. For example, in each of the 1st to 11th rounds of the jackpot, an effect in which a friend of justice and a monster fight may be performed. Then, if the ally of justice wins by the 11th round, it is notified that it is the jackpot B, and if the ally of justice is defeated, it is notified that it is the jackpot A. That is, when the ally of justice wins, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a chance to shift to the state of special symbol change. This allows the player to more interestingly observe the result of the effect performed at the jackpot.

  In addition, a variation is provided in the production contents, and the production contents with high expectation that the ally of justice wins (they are easily selected in the case of the jackpot B) and the possibility that the ally of justice will be defeated (in the case of the big hit A) Effect contents that are easily selected). For example, if the ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special attack, or if the ally of the enemy evades the attack of the enemy, the expectation of winning will be increased, and the attack of the justice will fall off, If an enemy attacks with a special technique, the possibility of defeat may be increased. As a result, it is possible to predict not only the result of whether or not the ally of justice wins, but also the result of the production flow up to victory or defeat. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  In addition, the content of the production performed up to the 11th round is not limited to the production in which the ally of justice and the monster fight as described above, but can suggest an advantageous jackpot B and a jackpot A which is more disadvantageous than the jackpot B. Any mode may be used. For example, if the boy character 710 performs an effect of searching for a treasure, and if the treasure can be found by the eleventh round, it may be configured so that the jackpot B is notified. It may be configured such that an effect of eating a large glutton is displayed, and that the jackpot B is notified when the user finishes eating all the provided food.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the storage device 600 having a unique configuration not provided in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 600 is provided. It may be. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and the conditions under which the storage valve 607a is opened, the advantages when the storage valve 607a is opened, and the disadvantages when the ball is right-hit in the closed state. May be configured to display an image (explanatory image) that explains. Thereby, the player can easily understand the gaming properties. Further, the back type on which the explanation image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. Thereby, a player who is accustomed to the game with the pachinko machine 10 and sufficiently understands the game characteristics can change to the back type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, a right strike is performed in the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the ordinary symbol), and when it is detected that the ball has entered the storage device 600, a right strike warning image is displayed. (See FIG. 5 (b)) is displayed, but a right-handed warning image may not be displayed under predetermined conditions. For example, if the player is making a right-handed hit in a state where no ball is stored above the storage valve 607a, a right-handed warning image is displayed until a ball is stored above the storage valve 607a (FIG. 5B). ) May not be displayed. When the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a in the normal state, a special symbol jackpot is thereafter formed, and when the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state), the upper part of the storage valve 607a The ball stored in can be immediately entered into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Therefore, the ball paid out by entering the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 can be used as a ball used in the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the possessed ball runs out despite the jackpot, the jackpot game can be performed without newly borrowing a ball.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650, and is disposed inside the storage device 600 in the special game state (big hit state). A prize ball can be obtained by making the ball enter the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 that has been set. That is, in the special gaming state (big hit state), in addition to the prize ball being paid out by allowing the ball to enter the first specific prize port 65a or the second specific prize port 650a, the ball is transferred to the storage device 600. The prize ball was paid out by entering the ball. Thereby, the payout of more prize balls is performed at the jackpot, and the player's interest in the jackpot game is further improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in a state (normal gaming state) other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the upstream of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is closed by the storage valve 607a, so that the ball is closed. Is configured such that it is difficult to enter the ball into the general winning port (high value winning port) 602, and the ball can be stored above the storage valve 607a. Then, when there is a ball stored inside the storage device 600 in the normal gaming state, the stored ball and another ball newly flowing into the storage device 600 can interfere (contact). Was configured as follows. Then, when interference (contact) with the stored ball occurs, the flowing direction of the ball newly flowing into the storage device 600 is the direction of the general winning port (small value winning port) 601 having a small number of prize balls. (In the direction of the guide channel 606). Thus, in the normal game state, the ball is struck right to aim at the general prize port (high value prize port) 602 of the storage device 600, so that the number of balls to be held is increased without passing through the jackpot. The game method was configured so that it could not be fundamentally established.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600 in the first embodiment. Then, whether or not to store the ball in the storage device 700 can be switched by an operation of the player. Further, when the balls are stored in the storage device 700, two flow paths through which the balls can flow down are provided. The configuration is such that a sphere can flow into both flow paths.

  Further, in the second embodiment, a winning port that easily enters the ball when the ball is not stored (the state where the storage valve 704a is opened), and two flow paths that easily flow in the state where the ball is stored in the storage valve 704a. The two types of winning ports provided respectively downstream of are configured so that the number of award balls to be paid out is different. That is, two types of winning ports that can be won when the ball is stored in the storage valve 704a are winning ports with a large number of award balls to be paid out, and winning ports with a small number of award balls to be paid out. It is configured as follows. In addition, the winning opening where a ball can win when the storage valve 704a is open is configured to be intermediate between the two types of payout numbers. That is, switching between a state in which the ball can enter the winning port with a large number of winning balls and a small winning port, and a state in which the ball can be stably received by flowing the ball into the storage device 700. Can be. Therefore, the game property when the ball flows into the storage device 700 can be switched according to the preference of the player, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that the arrangement of the first variable winning device 65 is below the first entrance 64, 2 The variable variable winning device 650 is eliminated, the storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600, and a release button 800 for changing the state of the storage valve 704a to the open state by the operation of the player is provided. That the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control unit 113 is partially changed, and that the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes A point that a part of processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and a part of processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 A point that has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first entrance 64. In the first embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 provided on the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 is eliminated. The first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is configured to be opened in all rounds of the jackpot. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), the ball can be made to enter the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a by performing a left hit.

  In the second embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided on a path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13. In the storage device 700, the number of nails around the entrance is smaller than that around the entrance of the storage device 600 of the first embodiment, and the ratio of the sphere that flows in when the ball is right-handed is reduced. The number is set to be smaller than 600 (for example, one ball per 10 balls). Details of the storage device 700 according to the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 shows an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a special symbol probable state or a normal symbol time reduction state (a period in which the player does not lose even if the player hits right). FIG. FIG. 63A shows the display contents when the release button 800 is not pressed (the storage valve 704a is not opened), and FIG. 63B shows the display when the release button 800 is pressed. The display contents in a state (a state in which the storage valve 704a is open) are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), when the release button 800 is not pressed (operated) by the player, the boy character 710 (FIG. 5 (1) in the first embodiment is placed in the small area Ds2 in the sub display area Ds. In place of Ds2 of a)), a character string "Gate is open when button is pressed!" is displayed. By displaying these characters, the release button 800 (button) is pressed for the player, whereby the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 can be set to the open state. It can be easily recognized. Since the display contents in the display area other than the small area Ds2 are the same as those in the special symbol positive change state and the normal symbol time saving state in the first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, the words "Gate Opening" are displayed in the small area Ds2. Thereby, it can be easily recognized that the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 is in the open state.

  Next, the details of the storage device 700 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 64 is a front view of the storage device 700 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the storage device 700 is provided with a guide channel 707 that allows the sphere flowing from above to flow down, and three flow channels are provided downstream of the guide channel 707. (The downstream of the guiding flow path 707 branches in three directions). Specifically, the guiding flow path 706 for flowing the flowing sphere downward and to the left in a front view, the guiding flow path 704 for flowing downward in a front view and a lower right direction in a front view. And an induction flow path 708 for the purpose. As shown in FIG. 64, the nail 709a and the nail 709b are provided downstream of the guide flow path 705, so that the sphere is rightward or leftward while flowing down the guide flow path 705. Also, by passing between the nails 709a and 709b, the downward direction of the ball can be corrected toward the center. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guiding flow path 705 easily flows into the guiding flow path 704 provided on the central side downstream of the guiding flow path 705.

  Downstream of the guide channel 706, there is provided a general winning port (high value winning port) 702 from which the number of prize balls to be paid out is relatively large (for example, six). In addition, a general winning port (medium value winning port) 701 having a smaller number of prize balls paid out (for example, three pieces) 701 than the general winning port (high value winning port) 702 is located downstream of the guide channel 704. Is provided. Further, as entrances other than the general winning opening (medium winning opening) 701 and the general winning opening (large winning opening) 702, out openings 703a to 703e from which a prize ball is not paid out even if a ball enters. Is provided. Then, the game ball flowing down the guiding flow path 708 enters the out port (small value winning port) 703d or the out port (small value winning port) 703e. Then, there is no merit for the player. A ball that has flowed down the guide channel 706 but has not entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703a or the out opening 703b. Is done. Also, a ball that has flowed down the guiding flow path 704 but has not entered the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703b or the out opening 703c. Is done. By these out ports 703a to 703c, even if the ball moves irregularly due to vibration or the like, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from accumulating below the storage device 700 and to reliably discharge the ball. Can be.

  The induction flow path 704 is provided with a storage valve 704a. Like the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment, the storage valve 704a closes the guide flow path 704, and stores one ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 after the closing, in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a. be able to. This storage valve 704a is different from the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment in that the closed state can be released (set to the open state) by the player operating the release button 800 (see FIG. 67). Have been. In a state where the spheres are stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704, the downflow direction is changed by an impact caused by interference (contact) of the spheres flowing into the storage device 700 with the stored spheres. This change (switching) in the flowing direction will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating a trajectory (downflow direction) of a sphere when a sphere that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 flows down in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed. First, with reference to FIG. 65 (a), a case will be described in which a ball that has interfered (contacted) with a stored ball repels to the left in front view due to the impact of the interference.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), when a ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 repels leftward in front view due to interference (contact) with the ball stored above the storage valve 704a, The sphere flows into the guide channel 706 and flows down the guide channel 706. Here, since a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the guiding flow path 706, a relatively large amount of balls enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. (For example, six) prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when the ball rebounds to the right, it is advantageous for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65 (b), a case will be described in which a ball that has interfered (contacted) with a stored ball repels to the right in front view due to the impact of the interference. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the sphere that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a and repels to the right in frontal view, The sphere flows into the guide channel 708 and flows down the guide channel 708. Here, since out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guide channel 708, the ball enters one of the out ports. That is, when the ball rebounds to the right in frontal view, no prize ball is paid out, and there is no merit for the player.

  As described above, when the storage valve 704a is closed, the number of prize balls (game value) obtained by the player varies depending on the direction in which the ball flowing (entering) into the storage device 700 repels. Therefore, when a ball flows into (enters) the storage device 700, it is expected that the ball will repel leftward in front view due to interference (contact) with the ball stored above the storage valve 704a. A game can be played. That is, the downward direction (rebound direction) of the ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 can be more interestingly confirmed, so that the interest of the player in playing the game can be improved. In addition, the direction in which the ball tends to repel changes depending on the momentum of the ball, the angle of entry into the storage device 700, and the degree of adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b. It is possible to devise the way of hitting. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when selecting the pachinko machine 10 for playing a game, the pachinko machine 10 in which the ball easily enters the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702 is selected in consideration of the degree of adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b. Can be. Therefore, at the stage of selecting the pachinko machine 10 before starting the game, it is possible to give a pleasure to find the pachinko machine 10 which is likely to be advantageous to oneself.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an operation when a ball flows (enters) into the storage device 700 with the storage valve 704a set to the open state will be described. When the sphere flows into the storage device 700, the sphere first flows down the guiding flow path 705. Since the nail 709a and the nail 709b are provided on the left and right, respectively, on the downstream side of the guide channel 705 (see FIG. 66), the sphere is rightward or leftward while flowing down the guide channel 705. Also, by passing between the nails 709a and 709b, the downward direction of the ball can be corrected toward the center. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guiding flow path 705 flows into the guiding flow path 704 provided at the center downstream of the guiding flow path 705.

  In the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the sphere can flow down the guiding flow path 704, so that the sphere that has flowed into the guiding flow path 704 flows down the guiding flow path 704 to the general winning opening (medium). (Value winning opening) 701. As a result, a smaller number (for example, three) of prize balls than the prize balls for entering the general prize port (high value prize port) 702 is paid out.

  As described above, when the storage valve 704a is open, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. That is, the downflow direction does not change due to the repulsion, and does not flow into the guide channel 706 or the guide channel 708. That is, instead of the ball being able to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 having a large number of obtained award balls, the ball enters the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. It does not mean that the prize ball cannot be obtained. Therefore, when a ball is inserted into the storage device 700, a prize ball can be obtained stably, and a sense of security can be given to the player.

  In this embodiment, when the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67), the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by keeping the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that the ball enters both the general winning opening (large winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small winning opening) 703d and 703e. The state (high gambling state in which there is a possibility that a large number of prize balls can be obtained but there is a possibility that no prize ball can be obtained) can be set. In addition, by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 can enter the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (small but stable). Prize balls can be obtained). Therefore, depending on whether or not the release button 800 (refer to FIG. 67) is operated, the player can switch the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, so that each player can select a game characteristic that matches his / her own taste. You can play games.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67 and FIG. The electrical configuration according to the second embodiment is different from the electrical configuration according to the first embodiment in that the contents of the first random number table 202b of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the configuration of the RAM 203 is one. Parts, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed. They differ in the point. The other electrical configurations are the same as the electrical configurations in the first embodiment, and thus detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205. The release button 800 is provided at a position where the player can arbitrarily press (operate) (for example, around the frame button 22). When the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, a signal (press detection signal) for notifying the MPU 201 that the press is detected is output to the input / output port 205. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 controls the storage device solenoid 610 to open the storage valve 704a based on the press detection signal. That is, the storage device solenoid 610 is turned on.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which determination values for determining the big hit type are stored, like the first hit type selection table 202b in the first embodiment.

  Note that, in the first hit type selection table 202b in the present embodiment, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with only each big hit type. That is, unlike the first embodiment, the same value for the first hit type counter C2 is the same regardless of whether the special symbol 1 is a big hit or the special symbol 2 is a big hit. The jackpot type is associated.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in a range of “0 to 49”, and the jackpot C is defined in association with the value (FIG. 68 (a)). )) 202b1). The big hit C is a big hit in which the special game state (big hit state) continues for 15 rounds. After the end of the jackpot C, a normal symbol time saving state is given as an added value (the state shifts to a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol time saving state). In addition, the time saving state of the ordinary symbol given after the end of the big hit C continues until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times.

  On the other hand, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from “50 to 99” is defined in association with the big hit D (see 202b2 in FIG. 68A). The big hit D is a big hit where the special game state (big hit state) continues for 15 rounds. After the end of the jackpot D, a special symbol probable change state of the special symbol is given as an added value (transition to a special symbol probable change state). In addition, the certain symbol change state given after the end of the jackpot D continues until the next jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is predetermined according to the type of the jackpot that has been won. That is, a more general configuration than the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is employed. Accordingly, in the second embodiment, the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68 (b), a description will be given of the specified contents of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the RAM 203 in the second embodiment includes a probability change setting flag 203h, a probability variation pass counter 203i, a winning number counter 203j, an operation counter 203k, and a remaining ball provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The timer flag 203m, the remaining ball timer 203n, the probability change enable flag 203o, the probability change enable timer 203p, and the discharge number counter 203q are deleted. This is because these configurations are provided in connection with determining whether or not to shift to the special symbol change state after the end of the big hit in the second specific winning device 650. That is, in the present embodiment, a game state to be set at the end of the big hit is determined in advance according to the big hit type, and it is determined whether or not to shift to the special symbol change state during the special game state (during the big hit state). Since no determination is made, there is no need to use each of the above configurations in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 68B, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is provided with a release flag 203s. The release flag 203s indicates whether or not the player presses (operates) the release button 800 and the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (whether or not the state in which the ball can be stored above the storage valve 704a is released). ?). This release flag 203s is set to ON when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the closed state to the open state (see S4008 in FIG. 71). On the other hand, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is set to off (see S4004 in FIG. 71).

  Next, returning to FIG. 67, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the RAM 223 of the present embodiment, the winning number counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 of the first embodiment is abolished, and a storage state flag 223k and a flowing down time counter 223k are added. I have.

  The storage state flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the storage valve 704a is set to the open (released) state. If the storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is closed, and the ball can be stored above the storage valve 704a. On the other hand, if the storage state flag 223k is off, the storage valve 704a is set to the open (released) state, indicating that the ball can flow down the guidance flow path 704. Each time a storage state command is received from main controller 110, storage state flag 223k is updated to a value corresponding to the storage state indicated by the command (see S1922 in FIG. 72). The sound lamp control device 113 determines the setting of the storage valve 704a based on the storage state flag 223k, and determines whether an abnormality has occurred in the storage valve 704a.

  The flow-down time counter 223k detects whether a ball that has flowed into the guiding flow path 704, the guiding flow path 706, or the guiding flow path 708 immediately before switching the state of the storage valve 704a is in any one of the entrances (general winning opening 701, general winning). This is a counter for counting the time (balling time) until the ball enters the mouth 702, the out mouth 703d, or the out mouth 703e). By counting the ball ejection periods, a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, an out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or an out opening (small value winning opening) When a ball enters the (winning opening) 703e, it can be more accurately determined whether or not the entering ball is a normal operation. Each time the storage state command is received from the main controller 110, a counter value corresponding to one second is set in the falling time counter 233k (see S1923 in FIG. 72). Each time the main process (see FIG. 42) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the value is decremented by one.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed, a ball enters a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the storage valve 704a, or the storage valve 704a is opened. When a ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e in the state, a warning image (FIG. 7 ( b) is displayed. However, if the ball flows into the guiding flow path 704 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball will not move to the general winning opening (medium value) after the storage valve 704a switches to the closed state. (Winning opening) 701 in some cases. Similarly, if a sphere flows into the guiding flow path 706 or the guiding flow path 708 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the closed state to the open state, the sphere generally moves after the storage valve 704a switches to the open state. The ball may enter the winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e. In order to treat these as normal entering balls (not to display a warning image), in the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched, the falling time counter 233k is controlled for a predetermined period (1 second). Set the corresponding counter value. Until the one second set as the counter value elapses, the ball is a general winning opening (medium winning opening) 701, a general winning opening (high winning opening) 702, an out opening (small winning opening) 703d, or When the ball enters the out port (small value winning port) 703e, it is determined that the operation is normal (warning image is not displayed).

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the contents of the main processing (see FIG. 69) are changed from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, only various processes executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) will be described, and detailed description of other processes which have not been changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the main processing. As in the first embodiment, main processing of the game is executed in the main processing.

  In the main process (see FIG. 69) in the present embodiment, a jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) is used instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the main process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. Is executed. Another difference is that a storage control process (S1022) for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a is performed after the second symbol display update process (S1007) ends. Further, the difference is that error command processing 2 (S1023) is executed instead of the error command processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1021). This jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 69), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state (jackpot state), execution of various effects according to the jackpot, This is a process for opening or closing the 1 specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a.

  In the big hit control process 2 (S1021), in each of S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109, the big hit control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35) is S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109. The same processing as the above processing is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 2 of the present embodiment, the process of S1103 (the process of setting the opening of the storage valve) in the first embodiment is abolished. In the second embodiment, the storage valve 704a is set to the open state based on the operation of the release button 800 by the player. Is switched.

  In the jackpot control process 2 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the start timing of a new round is determined by the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is opened. Release is set (S1121), a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1122), and the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123). ). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, or the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls have been won after the game is released, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1123, when it is determined that the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set. The process is closed (S1124) and the process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1123: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when 15 rounds in the special game state (big hit state) are completed, it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect.

  In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing (S1109: Yes), first, an ending command is set (S1125). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the sound ramp control in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits an ending command for display to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1125 ends, it is then determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot D (probably variable jackpot) (S1126). No), 100 is set to the value of the counter 203r during time saving (S1127), and this processing ends. By setting 100 in the time reduction counter 203r, it is possible to set the normal symbol time reduction period until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the end of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1126, if it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot D (probable change jackpot), the probable change flag 203g is set to ON in order to give a probable change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot ( (S1128), this process ends. If it is not the ending start timing in the processing of S1109 (S1109: No), this processing ends. That is, the winning process (S1111, see FIG. 38) and the abnormal process (S1112, see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are not executed in the big hit control process 2 of the present embodiment.

  By making the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) different from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment as described above, only one winning port opened during the jackpot is provided. The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine in which the state after the end of the jackpot is predetermined according to the jackpot type (that is, a more general pachinko machine).

  Next, the storage control process (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the storage control process (S1022). This storage control process (S1022) is a process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a as described above.

  In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether or not the release flag 203s is on (S4001). If it is determined that the release flag 203s is on (S4001: Yes), the storage valve 704a is open (the storage device 700). Means that the state in which the ball can be stored has been released), and then it is determined whether or not the player has pressed (operated) the release button 800 (S4002). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

  In the process of S4002, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 has been detected (that is, the pressing detection signal has been detected) (S4002: Yes), the storage valve 704a is kept open. This processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 has not been detected (ie, the pressing detection signal has not been detected) (S4002: No), the storage device 704a is closed to close the storage valve 704a. The solenoid 610 is turned off (S4003). Then, in order to indicate that the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, the release flag 203s is set to OFF (S4004), and the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the closed state. For this purpose, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4005), and the process ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the closed state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display back image change command for setting the back type corresponding to the closed state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the mode is set such that the character "Press the button to open the gate!" Is displayed for the small area Ds2. Thus, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state by pressing the release button 800.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4001 that the release flag 203s is off (S4001: No), the storage valve 704a is closed (a state where a ball can be stored in the storage device 700 is set). Then, it is determined whether or not the player has pressed (operated) the release button 800 (S4006). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

  In the process of S4006, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S4006: No), the storage valve 704a is kept closed. For this reason, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that pressing (operation) of the release button 800 has been detected (that is, a pressing detection signal has been detected) (S4006: Yes), the storage device solenoid 610 is turned on to open the storage valve 704a. (S4007). Then, in order to indicate that the opening of the storage valve 704a has been set, the release flag 203s is set to ON (S4008), and the audio lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a has been opened. For this purpose, a storage state command corresponding to the open state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4009), and this processing ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output from the audio lamp in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the release state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display back image change command for setting the back type corresponding to the release state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the mode is set such that the character "Gate Opening" is displayed for the small area Ds2. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 704a is in the open state.

  By executing the storage control process, the opening or closing of the storage valve 704a can be set according to the operation state of the release button 800. As a result, the ball is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a at an arbitrary timing of the player, so that the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. It is possible to switch between a state in which a crab ball enters and a state in which a ball flowing (entering) into the storage device 700 flows down to a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the content of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) is partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. In the following, only the command determination process (see FIG. 72) will be described, and other processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will not be described in detail.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing (1811) in the present embodiment. In this command determination process, in each process of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919, the same processes as the respective processes of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment are respectively performed. Each is executed.

  In the command determination process of this embodiment (see FIG. 72), when it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the process of S1911 (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a failure or the like in the storage valve 704a. Then, a warning process for giving a warning when a problem has occurred is executed (S1921), and this process ends.

  In the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of S1916 (S1916: No), next, it is determined whether or not the storage state command has been received. It is determined (S1922). When it is determined that the storage state command has been received (S1922: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is updated according to the state of the storage valve 704a notified by the storage state command (S1923). Specifically, when the closed state (storage state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a, the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the open state (released state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a. In this case, the storage state flag 223k is set to off. When the storage state flag 223k is updated, a back image (see FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b)) corresponding to the storage state after the update is set, so that the display on the third symbol display device 81 is performed. Update the content.

  When the processing in S1923 is completed, a counter value corresponding to one second is set to the falling time counter 223l (S1924), and this processing ends. By using the ball flushing time set for the falling time counter 223l, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not there is a defect in the storage valve 704a. In the process of S1922, when it is determined that the storage state command has not been received (S1922: No), the process proceeds to S1919.

  As described above, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the release state command or the closed state command from the main control device 110. A command to cause the display control device 114 can be set. This allows the player to easily recognize the state of the storage valve 704a.

  Next, the warning process (S1921) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, this warning process (S1921) is a process for determining the presence or absence of a failure such as a failure in the storage valve 704a and issuing a warning when a failure has occurred.

  In the warning process (S1921), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S4101). If the storage state flag 223k is on (S4101: Yes), then, is the value of the falling time counter 223l zero? It is determined whether or not it is (S4102). When it is determined that the value of the falling time counter 223l is 0 (S4102: Yes), the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state), which means that the ball ejection period has elapsed. Therefore, in the closed state (storage state) of the storage valve 704a, a storage-time notification process for notifying a failure is executed (S4103), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S4102 that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is not 0 (S4102: No), it means that the storage valve 704a is currently set in the closed state, and that the ball is being thrown. Therefore, the process of S4103 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Here, details of the above-described storage notification process (S4103) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the storage notification process (S4103), first, it is determined whether or not the notified prize information command includes prize information corresponding to the ball entering the general prize port (medium value prize port) 701 (S4201). If the winning information corresponding to the ball entry into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is not included (S4201: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the winning information corresponding to the ball entry to the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is included (S4201: Yes), even if the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state). Regardless, it means that the ball flows down the storage valve 704a and enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. In other words, it means that the storage valve 704a is not normally closed even though the storage valve 704a is set to be closed. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 704a is set (S4202). Then, the present process ends.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display error command, the display control device 114 generates a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 704a has a failure in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7B), it is possible to easily make the player or the clerk of the hall aware of the occurrence of the malfunction, and the malfunction can be quickly eliminated.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. In the process of S4101, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S4101: No), it is determined whether the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4104). If it is determined that the value is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S4104: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the falling time counter 223l is 0 (S4104: Yes), the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state), which means that the ball ejection period has elapsed. Therefore, in the open state (released state) of the storage valve 704a, a release notification process for notifying a failure is executed (S4105), and this processing ends. The release notification process (S4105) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the release notification process (S4105). In the release notification process (S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the received prize information command includes prize information corresponding to the ball entering the general prize port (high value prize port) 702 (S4301). If the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (high winning opening) 702 is included (S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to S4303.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4301 that the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702 is not included (S4301: No), then the outgoing information command is output. It is determined whether or not winning information corresponding to the ball entry into the mouths (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e is included (S4302), and it corresponds to the ball entry into the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e. If the winning information is not included (S4302: No), this processing is terminated.

  In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball entry to the out exit (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e is included (S4302: Yes), the process proceeds to S4303. When the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to a ball entering the general winning opening (high winning opening) 702 (S4301: Yes), or to the out opening (small winning opening) 703d, 703e. In the processing of S4303 executed when the winning information corresponding to the entry of the ball is included (S4302: Yes), a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 704a is set (S4303), and this processing is performed. finish. When the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state), the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 flows down the guiding flow path 704, so that the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or the out The balls enter the ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e because there is a high possibility that the storage valve 704a is not normally opened.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display error command, the display control device 114 generates a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 704a has a failure in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7B), it is possible to easily make the player or the clerk of the hall aware of the occurrence of the malfunction, and the malfunction can be quickly eliminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the storage device 700 that can store the ball therein is provided. The storage device 700 is provided with a plurality of flow paths (induction flow paths 704, 706, and 708) inside thereof, and is configured so that a sphere can flow down to different entrances. In addition, a storage valve 704a capable of closing the flow path is provided in the induction flow path 704. When the guide flow path 704 is closed by the storage valve 704a, one ball can be stored (held) at the upper portion thereof.

  When the storage valve 704a is open, the sphere flowing into the storage device 700 flows down the guide channel 704 (compared to the guide channel 706 and the guide channel 708, Since the ball is made to flow easily), the ball can enter a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the guiding flow path 704. Therefore, by letting the ball flow into the storage device 700, the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entering the general winning port (medium value winning port) 701 can be stably received.

  On the other hand, in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed and the sphere is stored in the upper portion thereof, the sphere flowing into the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the stored sphere, so that the guiding flow path 706, Or, it repels in any direction of the guide channel 708. That is, when the flowing direction changes due to the rebound, either the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702 having a large number of award balls to be paid out or the out-opening (small-value winning opening) 703d or 703e having no award balls paid out. Enter the crab. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a holding device for temporarily holding a ball hitting a game board. Some of the conventional gaming machines can release a held ball to a game board by a player's operation and allow the ball to enter a predetermined winning opening provided in the traveling direction thereof ( For example, JP-A-2003-190443.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player by merely causing the ball released by using the holding device to enter the predetermined winning opening.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67), the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by keeping the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that the ball enters both the general winning opening (large winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small winning opening) 703d and 703e. The state (high gambling state in which there is a possibility that a large number of prize balls can be obtained but there is a possibility that no prize ball can be obtained) can be set. In addition, by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 can enter the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (small but stable). Prize balls can be obtained). Therefore, depending on whether or not the release button 800 (refer to FIG. 67) is operated, the player can switch the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, so that each player can select a game characteristic that matches his / her own taste. You can play games. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a can be switched at an arbitrary timing by the player using the release button 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. This allows each player to start a game during a period in which the storage valve 704a is in a state that suits his / her taste. Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of a lottery that is performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is basically configured to be in a closed state (storage state), and is configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not to switch to an open state (released state) once a minute. You may.

  Further, when the lottery is won, for example, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds. By this, if the balls are easy to enter the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed due to the adjustment condition of the nails 709a and 709b, the ball is stored by lottery. The game can be played in expectation of the valve 704a being opened. On the other hand, if the ball becomes easy to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702 in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed due to the degree of adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, the ball continues to be removed by lottery. A game can be played with the expectation that the storage valve 704a will continue to be closed. Furthermore, the lottery probability of the lottery for determining whether or not to set the storage valve 607a to the open state (canceled state) may be configured so that a clerk of the hall or the like can adjust the lottery probability. Accordingly, when the player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict a table having a good lottery probability and select a table. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit and the like when setting the lottery probability of the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting the platform before starting the game. .

  In the present embodiment, the flow path through which the sphere can flow when the storage valve 704a is closed is two types, the guide flow path 706 and the guide flow path 708. However, the present invention is not limited to this. More channels and winning ports may be provided. Further, more variations may be given to the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters each winning port. Thereby, when the storage valve 704a is closed, the randomness of the number of prize balls that can be obtained can be increased, so that the player can observe the flowing direction of the ball that has entered the storage device 700 more interestingly. Can be done.

  Further, a plurality of flow paths through which the spheres can flow when the storage valve 704a is open may be provided. Then, a different number of winning balls may be paid out when the ball flows down each channel. Thereby, even if the storage valve 704a is in an open state, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be made random, so that the downward flow direction of the ball that has entered the storage device 700 for the player. Can be observed more interestingly.

  In the present embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the second entrance 640, but the arrangement may be reversed. With the configuration in which the storage device 700 is provided upstream, it is possible to make it easier for the sphere to flow into the storage device 700.

  In the present embodiment, only the first specific winning opening 65a is provided as a winning opening opened in the special game state (big hit state). However, a plurality of winning openings may be provided as in the first embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the storage valve 704a is opened only while the release button 800 is being pressed (operated), but the invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be received during the predetermined period during which the storage valve 704a is open. This eliminates the need to keep pressing the release button 800 to keep the storage valve 704a open. Further, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), it may be configured to switch between the closed state (reserved state) and the open state (released state). With such a configuration, the release button 800 may be operated only when the state is to be switched, so that the number of times of operation by the player can be reduced. Further, an operation means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating the release button 800 may be provided opposite to the release button 800. Even with such a configuration, similarly to the present embodiment, it is possible for each player to select a game characteristic that suits his / her taste.

  In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed in characters on the small area Ds2 in the sub display area Ds, but the state of notifying the player of the state of the storage valve 704a is limited to this. Not something. For example, according to the state of the storage valve 704a, the storage valve 704a may be configured to display either a real image in an open state or a real image in a closed state. The display indicating the state of the storage valve 704a may be displayed in a display area other than the small area Ds2. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display indicating the state of the storage valve 704a is configured to be displayed as a rear image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that it may display on the near side rather than a 3rd symbol. Further, the mode of the third symbol may be changed according to the state of the storage valve 704a, and the state of the storage valve 704a may be recognized according to the mode of the third symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 704a may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. Then, control may be performed such that the storage valve 704a is switched to the open state when the release state command is received from the main control device 110, and the storage valve 704a is switched to the closed state when the closed state command is received. Thus, the processing load on MPU 201 of main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute a variable effect selection process, a special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are main processes related to the game, without delay.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the storage device 700 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 700 is provided. May be. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 700 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (explanatory image) that describes conditions under which the storage valve 704a is opened, and advantages and disadvantages when the storage valve 704a is opened is displayed. It may be configured as follows. Thereby, the player can easily understand the gaming properties. Further, the back type on which the explanation image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. Thereby, a player who is accustomed to the game with the pachinko machine 10 and sufficiently understands the game characteristics can change to the back type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a is provided below the first entrance opening 64 so that the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a by left-handing. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. It is not something that can be done. For example, similarly to the first embodiment, a first specific winning opening 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700. This allows the ball to flow into the first specific winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 simply by right-handing in the special game state (big hit state), so that the prize ball in the special game state (big hit state) can be obtained. You can do more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, when the sphere stored above the storage valve 704a and the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 interfere (contact), the flow path through which the newly flown sphere flows down is formed. It was configured to be random. That is, in a state where the sphere is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, the ratio of the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 to the guiding channel 706 and the guiding channel 708 is substantially the same. Although it constituted, it is not limited to this. For example, by increasing the width of the storage valve 704a (for example, assuming a width 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere), the sphere stored at the top of the storage valve 704a is positioned rightward in front view or leftward in front view. It may be configured to obtain. When the ball is disposed above the storage valve 704a on the left side when viewed from the front, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to collide with the right side surface of the stored ball. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to be repelled to the right side in front view, so that the sphere easily flows down the guiding flow path 708. As described above, since the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guide flow path 708, the player cannot obtain the prize ball (it is disadvantageous for the player). . On the other hand, when the ball is disposed on the right side of the storage valve 704a in front view, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to collide with the left side surface of the stored ball. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to be repelled to the left side when viewed from the front, so that the sphere easily flows down the guiding flow path 706. As described above, since the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the guiding flow path 708, the player can obtain a relatively large amount of prize balls (advantageous for the player). Becomes). As described above, the arrangement of the balls stored above the storage valve 704a can form an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state for the player, and thus the storage valve 704a can be formed in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed. You can be conscious of the arrangement of the spheres stored at the top of the. Therefore, if the arrangement of the spheres is disadvantageous (that is, if the spheres are stored to the left in front view), the storage valve 704a can be opened (released) by pressing (operating) the release button 800. it can. Further, if the arrangement of the balls is an advantageous arrangement (that is, if the balls are stored rightward in front view), it is possible to make the player want to continue the game while maintaining the arrangement of the balls. . Therefore, it is possible to give a pleasure of determining whether or not to press the release button 800 according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, the state of the second specific winning opening 650a (open state or closed state) and the state of the storage valve 607a provided in the storage device 600 (open state or closed state) are independent of each other. In the bonus game state (big hit state), the storage valve 607a is always controlled to be in the open state, while the second specific winning opening 650a is set for a predetermined period in 12 rounds (FIG. 16). The open state is set only during the open period specified for each jackpot type. In addition, two types of flow paths (a guide flow path 652 and a guide flow path 653) are provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and only when a ball flows down the guide flow path 652, the guiding is performed. It was configured to be able to enter the ball into the positive change entrance port 654 provided downstream of the flow path 652. In other words, even if a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot, the ball does not flow down the guiding flow path 652 so that it does not shift to the certain state of the special symbol after the jackpot. Was.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, the second specific winning opening 650a and the storage by using the slide member 900 instead of the member for opening and closing the second specific winning opening 650a of the first embodiment and the storage valve 607a. The state of the device 600 can be switched. That is, the opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening 650a and the opening / closing control of the guide channel 607 in the storage device 600 can be performed by one member, and the state is switched in conjunction with each other. That is, when the second specific winning opening 650a is in the open state, the guiding flow path 607 (general winning opening 602) is also in the open state, and when the second specific winning opening 650a is in the closed state, the guiding flow path 607 (general winning opening 602). ) Is also configured to be closed. In the case of such a configuration, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening 602 (that is, the winning opening opened during the jackpot by the slide member 900) are both winning openings for obtaining a prize ball during the jackpot. Can be treated as

  Further, inside the second variable prize device 650, only the guide flow path 652 leading to the positive change ball entrance 654 is provided, and the flow path switching valve 650d, the guide flow path 653, and the normal ball entrance 655 are provided. Has been abolished. That is, if a ball can be made to enter the second specific winning opening 650a, the state is shifted to the specially changed state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. Further, the winning opening opened in the twelfth round is changed in accordance with the type of the jackpot. In other words, in the twelfth round, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 are set in the open state, and the first specific win is performed in all rounds of the big win (V route open big win). A jackpot (V route closing jackpot) in which the winning port 65a is set to an open state (the second specific winning port 650a and the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 are not opened during the jackpot) is provided. Have been.

  With these changes from the first embodiment, the end condition of each round of the jackpot is also changed. Specifically, in rounds 1 to 11 and rounds 13 to 15 of the jackpot, the balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. Is changed to 10 in total, or when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round, the round game ends (the first specific winning opening 65a is closed). In the 12 rounds, the total number of the balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 becomes 10 in total, or Is changed so that the round game ends (the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening 602 are closed) when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the game.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the first embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that a member for switching the state of the second specific winning opening 650a and a (close portion 910) And the member (ball storage unit 920) for switching the state of the guide channel 607 is formed as one member (slide member 900), and is paid out when the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. The number of prize balls to be changed to three (15 in the first embodiment), the point that the contents of the ROM 202 are partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 Is changed from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed from the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. 0 is a point that has been changed from. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 76, an example of an image (effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the twelfth round of the V-route opening big hit (big hit F) in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example. explain. As shown in FIG. 76, when there are 12 rounds of the V route opening big hit (big hit F), the character "ROUND12" is displayed in the display area 714 for displaying the number of rounds. In addition, a display area 717 for notifying that the second specific winning opening 650a has been opened is formed at the upper center in the front view of the third symbol display device 81. In this display area 717, the characters "CHANCE !!" and the characters "Opening the probable change route !!" are displayed. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the ball is inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a and the state is shifted to the certain state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. The other display contents of the boy character 710 and the like are the same as the display contents displayed on the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6A), and therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a configuration of a downstream side of a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 77, on the downstream side of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second A variable winning device 650 is provided. In addition, a member (closing portion 910) for opening or closing the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 (a ball storing portion 920) for opening or closing the flow path of the storage device 600. Are arranged in a straight line. Although details will be described later, this is because the closing part 910 and the ball storage part 920 are both part of the slide member.

  Further, a nail 921a and a nail 921b are provided at the entrance of the storage device 600. The clerk of the hall can adjust the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600 by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b before the opening of the hall, for example. By changing the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600, the number of balls entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the storage device 600 in the twelfth round of the jackpot can be changed. it can. Therefore, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b to adjust the ball hit by right-handing so as to easily flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to increase the prize balls that can be obtained by the player at the jackpot. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot game can be further improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Conversely, when the ball is made difficult to flow into the storage device 600 by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, the first specific winning opening 65a provided downstream of the storage device 600, and the second The number of balls reaching the specific winning opening 650a can be increased. Therefore, the jackpot can be digested more quickly. Further, in the twelfth round, it is easy to enter the second specific winning opening 650a, so that in the case of the jackpot F, it is possible to easily shift to the special symbol change state. Therefore, the possibility that the jackpot is continuous for a short period of time is increased, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The configuration for adjusting the ease with which the ball flows into the storage device 600 (the ease with which the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a) is not limited to nails. For example, a windmill may be provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 to make it easy to rotate.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a description will be given of the slide member 900 including the above-described closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 in the configuration. FIGS. 78 (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views when the game board 13 is cut along the line LXXVIIb-LXXVIIb in FIG. 77, respectively. Here, the slide member 900 is configured to be slidable toward the back side or the front side with respect to the game board 13 in a front view, and is slid toward the front side in a front view to perform the second specification. The winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 can be closed. On the other hand, the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 can be respectively opened by sliding the slide member 900 to the back side in the front view with respect to the game board 13.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a view when the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 are closed by the slide member 900 when viewed from above the gaming board 13. On the other hand, FIG. 78 (b) is a diagram when the game board 13 is viewed from above when the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide channel 607 are open.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the slide member 900 has a shape in which a substantially rectangular closing part 910 and a ball storage part 920 protrude from a right end part and a left end part of a substantially rectangular base part 930 (substantially “ U-shape). The closing part 910 and the ball storage part 920 are protruded toward the near side of the game board 13 or buried in the back side of the game board 13 via the opening parts 940a and 940b opened in the base plate 60, respectively. can do.

  In the state where the slide member 900 is slid to the front side in the front view, the upper portion of the second specific winning opening 650a is closed by the closing portion 910 as shown in FIG. The ball cannot enter the winning device 650. Similarly, since the guiding flow path 607 is closed by the ball storage section 920, the ball can enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided downstream of the guiding flow path 607. become unable.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the slide member 900 is slid toward the back of the game board 13, the upper part of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and the guide channel 607 is also opened. Therefore, by hitting the ball to the right, the ball is directed to a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided downstream of the guiding channel 607 or to a second specific winning opening 650a provided downstream of the storage device 600. Can be entered.

  As described above, in the present modification, the switching of the state of the second specific winning opening 650a and the switching of the state of the guide channel 607 can be realized only by the slide member 900. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the second specific winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are separately controlled as in the first embodiment. That is, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes an important process in a game, such as a lottery of a special symbol and a determination of a fluctuating time, if the processing speed decreases due to an increase in the processing load, The effect on the game will increase. On the other hand, in the present modification, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, so that main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a first hit type selection table 202b in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the present modification, when a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball always enters the certain-variable entering opening 654. As the jackpot type, a jackpot in which the second specific winning opening 650 is opened in the twelfth round and a jackpot in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in the twelfth round are provided.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 79, the big hit E (V route closing big hit) is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of 0 to 49 (see 202b1 in FIG. 79). The jackpot E (V route closing jackpot) is a jackpot in which a special game state of 15 rounds is given, and in each round of the jackpot, the first specific winning opening 65a is set for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse, or the ball is played). It is a jackpot that is released (until 10 balls enter). In other words, in the special game state (big hit state), the ball cannot be put into the certain variable hitting ball opening 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650, so that the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is 100 after the big hit end. Granted times.

  On the other hand, the jackpot F (V route opening jackpot) is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of 50 to 99 (see 202b2 in FIG. 79). The jackpot F is a jackpot in which a special game state of 15 rounds is given, and in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 elapse a predetermined time (30 seconds elapse). Or until the ball has entered 10 balls), and in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 650a has a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have elapsed, or 10 balls have entered). It is a jackpot that is released (until the ball hits). At the jackpot F, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the twelfth round. Therefore, if the ball can be made to enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the twelfth round, the state of the special symbol after the jackpot is changed. Is given. On the other hand, in the twelfth round, as a result of the ball being thrown into the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 despite not performing a right-handed or right-handed, the ball is moved to the second specific winning opening 650a. If 12 rounds are completed without entering the ball, after the end of the jackpot F, the normal symbol time saving state is given 100 times.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the contents of the main processing (see FIG. 34) are changed from the first embodiment. Specifically, the difference is that a big hit control process 3 (see FIG. 80) is executed instead of the big hit control process (see FIG. 35) executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) of the first embodiment. ing. Hereinafter, only the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) will be described, and other processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will not be described in detail.

  First, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 3 (S1031). The jackpot control process 3 is a process for setting the opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a for each round of the jackpot state.

  In each of the jackpot control processes 3, S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112 are executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment (S1101, S1102, S1104). , S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112 are executed. In the big hit control process 3 (S1031), the processes of S1103, S1107, and S1108, which were executed in the big hit control process (FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, are eliminated.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), when it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36). Instead, the big hit operation setting process 2 is executed (S1121), and this process is ended. Details of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the above-described jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121). The jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) is a process for setting the state (open state or closed state) of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

In the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121), the processes of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 are the same as the processes of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 in the jackpot operation setting process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 36), respectively. Is performed.
In the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) according to the present modification, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the round is the twelfth round (S1201: Yes), then the current jackpot type is the jackpot F (V route open). It is determined whether it is a big hit or not (S1211).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1211 that the hit is not the jackpot F (S1211: No), it means that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is the jackpot E that is opened in all rounds of the jackpot. Then, the opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1211 that the jackpot is the jackpot F (S1211: Yes), only the twelfth round is the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened. The opening of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set (S1203). As described above, the closing part 910 that has closed the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is the same member as the ball storage part 920 that has closed the guiding flow path 607 of the lottery device 600. (A part of the slide member 900), and the closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 slide and displace in conjunction with each other. Therefore, by setting the opening of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a by the processing of S1203, the guiding flow path 607 inside the storage device 600 is also opened (that is, the general winning opening 602 is also opened). ).

  After setting the opening of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by the processing of S1203, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. , And a storage state command corresponding to the open state (released state) is set to notify the sound lamp control device 114 that the guide flow path 607 has been set to the open state (released state) (S1212). The process proceeds to S1206. The storage state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output from the audio lamp in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage status command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage status command. When the display back image change command is received by the display control device 114, a display area 717 is generated in the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "CHANCE !!" Is displayed (see FIG. 76). By displaying these characters, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that it is a chance to make a transition to the special symbol change state.

  If the state shifts to the special symbol change state, the jackpot is likely to become the jackpot again in a short period of time after the jackpot is completed, which is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, in the twelfth round of the jackpot F, the player can more seriously aim the second specific winning opening 650a and launch the ball. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming a mere operation for obtaining a prize ball, and to enjoy a game in the special game state (during the jackpot state).

  As described above, of the right-hit balls, the ratio of the balls reaching the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is determined by the nails 921a and 921b ( It can be varied by adjusting (see FIG. 77). For example, by adjusting the nail 921a to open to the right in front view, or by adjusting the nail 921b to open to the left in front view (opening the nail), the right-handed ball flows into the storage device 600 more. Easier to do. Therefore, the ratio of the ball reaching the second specific winning opening 650a is relatively low. That is, the more the nails 921a and 921b are opened, the more difficult it is for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the twelfth round of the jackpot F. In addition, if ten balls enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 while the ball cannot enter the second specific winning opening 650, the 12 rounds will end. . Therefore, it is difficult to make a transition to the special symbol change state. Note that, when the ball easily flows into the storage device 600, the ball easily enters the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 having a larger number of award balls to be paid out compared to the second specific winning opening 650a. (See FIG. 9B). As a result, the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls, so that the player's interest in the jackpot can be improved.

  Here, in many cases, in the first to eleventh rounds, the player makes a right-handed shot aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a, so that the player is disposed downstream of a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. The sphere also flows into the storage device 600 provided. Therefore, one ball is stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 before the twelfth round starts. Therefore, when the 12th round starts and the upper part of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is opened by the slide member 900 being slid and displaced, the balls stored in the upper part of the ball storing section 920 are moved to the general winning opening. (Large value winning opening) flows down to 602. As a result, of the balls that have been right-handed in the twelfth round, substantially nine balls are moved to the second specific winning opening 650a before entering the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602. If the ball cannot be entered, the twelfth round will end.

  On the other hand, by adjusting the nail 921a and the nail 921b so as to approach each other (closing the nail), it becomes difficult for the right-hit ball to flow into the storage device 600. Therefore, since the ratio of the ball reaching the second specific winning opening 650 is relatively high, the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the twelfth round of the jackpot F. Therefore, it becomes easy to shift to the special symbol change state after the big hit. This makes it easier for the player to win again in a short period of time after the end of the jackpot F, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  As described above, by changing the ease of entry of the ball into the storage device 600 when right-handed, the ball is moved to the second entrance 650a provided downstream from the entrance of the storage device 600. Can be changed easily. Therefore, only by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b by the clerk of the hall, it is possible to change the playability in the case of the jackpot F. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602, and it is easy to shift to a certain symbol change state, and it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602. It is possible to switch between game characteristics in which many prize balls can be easily obtained in the round, but in which it is difficult to shift to a certain symbol change state. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall.

  Returning to FIG. 80, the description is continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1109 of the jackpot control process 3 that the timing is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then the winning process (S1111) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. ), The winning process 2 is executed (S1122), and the process proceeds to S1112. Details of the winning process 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the prize-winning process 2 (S1122) executed by the MPU 201 in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) in this modification. In the winning process 2 (S1122), the processes of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 are the same as the processes of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 in the winning process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38), respectively. Is performed.

  In the winning process 3 (S1122) according to the present modification, the value of the winning counter 203j becomes 10 or more in the process of S1404 (that is, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, the second specifying opening). When it is determined that the total number of balls entered into the winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 becomes 10 or more (S1404: Yes), or round time If it is determined that (30 seconds from the start of the round) has elapsed (S1405: Yes), any of the open winning openings (first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or second specific opening). A winning opening closing process for setting closing of the winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602) is executed (S1431), and the process proceeds to S1408. The winning opening closing process (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the winning opening closing process (S1431). The winning opening closing process (S1431) is a process of setting the closing of the winning opening when a winning opening closing condition is satisfied in each round of the jackpot.

  In the winning opening closing process (S1431), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the twelfth round (S4401). If it is not the twelfth round (S4401: No), it means that the currently opened winning opening is the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. The closing of the (large opening port) 65a is set (S4402), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the current round is the twelfth round (S4401), the winning jackpot that is opened according to the jackpot type is different, so that the current jackpot is the jackpot F (V route It is determined whether it is an open jackpot (S4403). If it is determined that the jackpot is not the jackpot F (V route opening jackpot) (that is, it is the jackpot E (V route closing jackpot)) (S4403: No), the winning opening currently opened is the first specific winning opening ( This means that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed by shifting the processing to S4402 (S4402), and this processing is executed. finish.

  In the process of S4403, if it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot F (V route opening jackpot) (S4403: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened only in the twelfth round. This means that the second special winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are currently opened. Therefore, in this case, the closing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is set (S4404), and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is set. The storage state command corresponding to the closed state (storage state) is set in order to notify the sound lamp control device 113 that the mouth 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 have been closed ( S4405), this process ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output from the audio lamp in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage status command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage status command. When the display back image change command is received by the display control device 114, the display area 717 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is deleted. This allows the player to easily recognize that the chance to shift to the special symbol probable change state has ended.

  By executing the winning opening closing process (S1431), the winning opening that has been opened can be accurately closed.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification Example of First Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the processing content of the command determination processing is partially changed from the command determination processing (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. More specifically, in order to execute a process for receiving a storage state command output from main controller 110 in a jackpot, each of S1921 to S1923 in the command determination process (see FIG. 69) of the second embodiment is performed. Execute the process. The processing itself is the same as the command determination processing in the second embodiment (see FIG. 69), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the command determination process according to the present modification, an error notification process 2 (S1971) is executed instead of the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. The error notification process 2 (S1971) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the above-described error notification process 2 (S1971). In the error notification processing 2 (S1971), in each of steps S1931 to S1934, S1936, and S1937, the same processing as the error notification processing (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment is executed. In the error notification process 2 (S1971) according to the present modification, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 in the process of S1934 (S1981), the hit notification process (FIG. 45) in the first embodiment is performed. Instead, the hit time notification process 2 is executed (S1981), and this process ends. The hit time notification process 2 (S1981) is a process for notifying when a failure occurs in the storage valve 607a during a big hit, similarly to the hit time notification process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment. It is.

  Next, the hit time notification process 2 (S1981) described above will be described with reference to FIG. In the hit time notification process 2 (S1981), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991). If it is determined in the processing of S1991 that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S1991: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the falling time counter 223l is 0 (S1992). If not (S1992), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1992, when it is determined that the value of the falling time counter 223l is 0 (S1992: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state), and the ball ejection period has elapsed. Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information command includes the ball entry information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 (S1993).

  If it is determined that the ball entry information corresponding to the ball entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1993: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball entry information corresponding to the ball entry to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1993: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state). Despite this, it means that the sphere is flowing downstream of the storage valve 607a. Therefore, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1994), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1991 that the storage state flag 223k is not on (is off) (S1991: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the falling time counter 223l is 0 (S1995). ). Then, when it is determined that the value of the falling time counter 223l is not 0 (S1995: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1995 that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S1995: Yes), then the received winning information command is entered into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is determined whether or not winning information corresponding to the ball is included (S1996). If the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1996: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  In the processing of S1996, when winning information corresponding to the ball entering the general winning opening (small winning opening) 601 is included (S1996: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state). This means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 even though the ball evacuation period has elapsed. That is, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a has not been opened normally, the process proceeds to S1994 in order to notify a malfunction of the storage valve 607a.

  According to the hit time notification process 2 (S1981), when a malfunction occurs in the operation of the storage valve 607a, the malfunction can be promptly notified, and the malfunction can be quickly resolved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the first embodiment, the opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650 a using the slide member 900 and the guiding flow path in the storage device 600. The opening and closing operation of the 607 can be performed simultaneously. In other words, the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is configured as one of the winning openings for obtaining a prize ball during a big hit.

  Since the switching of the state of the second specific winning opening 650a and the switching of the state of the guide channel 607 can be realized only by sliding the slide member 900, the second specification as in the first embodiment. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are separately controlled. That is, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes an important process in a game, such as a lottery of a special symbol and a determination of a fluctuating time, if the processing speed decreases due to an increase in the processing load, The effect on the game will increase. On the other hand, in the present modification, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, so that main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

  Further, in the present modification, only the positive variable ball entrance 654 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and the ball flowing into the second variable winning device 650 always enters the positive variable ball opening 654. It is configured to be spherical. Thereby, if a ball can be made to enter the second specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to realize a simple playability of shifting to a state in which a special symbol is changed after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, it is easier for the player to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol change state, so that it is possible to provide a playability that even a beginner can enjoy. Further, since the flow path switching valve 650d, the guiding flow path 653, and the normal entrance 655 provided inside the second variable winning device 650 in the first embodiment are eliminated, the second variable winning device 650 is provided. Can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In this modification, the ratio of the ball that flows into the storage device 600 among the right-hit balls is adjusted by adjusting nails 921a and 921b (see FIG. 77) provided at the entrance of the storage device 600. It is configured to be variable.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is determined whether or not a hit is made based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening, and it is separately determined whether or not to shift to a probability variation state during the winning. There are things to draw. As a result, it is possible to prevent the hit from being a mere work for obtaining a large number of hit balls, to allow the player to play the game with a sense of expectation for shifting to the probability fluctuation state, and to enhance the interest of the player in the game. Is being planned.

  Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are provided with a predetermined area in which a game ball can enter only during a hit, and the probability fluctuation state after the hit by hitting the game ball into the predetermined area is provided. (For example, JP-A-2003-180999).

  However, in conventional game machines, the rate at which game balls enter a predetermined area during a hit is set in advance for each model. There was no choice but to introduce a different model. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, there is no flexibility in the ratio of shifting to the probability fluctuation state, and it has been difficult to flexibly cope with a different sales policy for each hall. Therefore, a more versatile gaming machine has been demanded.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example, the ease of entry of the ball into the storage device 600 when right-handed is performed can be easily changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. It is composed. Thereby, it is possible to change the ease of entering the second entrance 650 a provided downstream of the entrance of the storage device 600. Therefore, only by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b by the clerk of the hall, it is possible to change the playability in the case of the jackpot F. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602, it is easy to shift to the state of the special symbol change, and it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602. It is possible to switch between game characteristics in which it is difficult to shift to the symbol change state. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall, and the versatility can be improved.

  In the present modification, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is configured to be opened for a maximum of 5 seconds in 12 rounds of the jackpot F, but the opening time may be arbitrarily determined. For example, by setting the opening time to 10 seconds, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, it is easy to shift to the certain state of the special symbol, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Further, the opening time may be, for example, 2 seconds. By shortening the opening time, the pachinko machine 10 in which a variety of hitting methods are performed or the nails 921a and 921b are more closed to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a in a limited time. You can choose. Therefore, the user can be absorbed in the game by the pachinko machine 10.

  In this modification, the entrance of the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the second specific winning opening 650a, and the ease of entering the storage device 600 can be changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. However, the configuration for changing the ratio of the ball reaching the second specific winning opening 650a is not limited to this. For example, instead of the storage device 600, a prize port for simply paying out a prize ball when a ball enters the ball may be provided. Then, the second specific winning opening 650a may be configured such that the open / close state is switched by a single member. Even with this configuration, the ratio of balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a can be changed by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b to change the ease of entering the out opening or the winning opening. Can be done. In addition, by replacing the storage device 600 with an out port or a winning port, the structure can be simplified, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Further, the ease of flowing into the storage device 600 does not necessarily need to be adjustable. That is, instead of the nails 921a and 921b, a columnar member fixed to the board surface may be provided. This makes it impossible for the hall to adjust whether the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a in the twelfth round of the jackpot F, and the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Even if the ball is not balled, it is possible to suppress that discouraged person from going to the hole. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having a distrust of the hall.

  In the present modification, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are configured to be opened in the twelfth round of the jackpot F, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be opened in the first round. As a result, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not to shift to the special symbol change state, so that it is possible to play the game in the subsequent special game state (big hit state) with confidence. Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in the fifteenth round. As a result, since whether or not to shift to the special symbol probable change state is not determined until the final round of the fifteenth round, the player's expectation of the special symbol probable change state can be maintained for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the jackpot game. In addition, for example, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 may be continuously opened in a plurality of rounds when the jackpot F is reached. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to be opened on the twelfth round and the thirteenth round. As a result, the balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 by the end of the eleventh round enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the twelfth round, and in the thirteenth round, the ball storing unit. A state in which no sphere exists at the top of 920 can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance of the ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a.

  In the present modified example, as in the first embodiment, only one sphere can be stored inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of spheres can be stored. For example, the configuration may be such that four balls can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920. In this case, the end condition of the 12 rounds is changed, and for example, the 12 rounds are ended when a total of five balls enter the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening 602. May be configured. In the first to eleventh rounds of the jackpot, a game is performed in such a manner that a ball is hit into the first specific winning opening 65a by right-handing, and therefore, in many cases, a ball is placed above the storage unit 920 before the start of the 12th round. The upper limit number (4) is stored. That is, when the 12 rounds are started and the ball storage unit 920 is opened, the stored 4 balls simultaneously flow into the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602, so immediately after the start of the 12 round. Then, four balls enter the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening 65a, second specific winning opening 650a, and general winning opening 602). Therefore, the remaining one ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, thereby completing the 12 rounds (a total of five balls are the second specific winning opening). 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602), so that the opportunity to enter the second specific winning opening 650a can be limited to one ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a twelve round game with a sense of tension. In addition, in the first to eleventh rounds of the jackpot, it is hoped that the balls do not flow into the storage device 600 as much as possible (that is, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 becomes 12 instead of the upper limit number of 4). You can play a jackpot game (hoping for the round). Therefore, the game can be performed while giving a sense of tension even during the jackpot, so that the jackpot is prevented from being simply performed as a work for obtaining a prize ball (suppression), and the player's jackpot game Can be improved.

  Note that the number of balls entering the specific winning opening and the upper limit number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920, which are conditions for ending the 12 rounds, may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the end condition of the 12 rounds may be equal to or less than the number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920. Thereby, it is possible to make the player play the game by strongly requesting that the ball is not stored in the storage device 600 by the start of the 12th round. Conversely, the upper limit number of balls that can be stored in the ball storage unit 920 may be reduced. Thereby, even if the upper limit number of balls are stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 by the start of the 12th round, the opportunity to make the ball enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round is provided a plurality of times. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to shift to the special symbol change state, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In this modification, in the twelfth round of the jackpot F, the effect image shown in FIG. 76 is displayed when the ball storage unit 920 is opened, but the effect during the jackpot is limited to this. is not. For example, it may be configured to notify whether it is the jackpot E or the jackpot F based on the result of the effect performed up to the eleventh round of the jackpot. More specifically, for example, in each of the first to eleventh rounds, an effect may be performed in which the ally of justice and the monster fight. Then, if the ally of justice wins by 11 rounds, it is notified that the victory is the jackpot F, and if the ally of justice is defeated, it may be notified that the ally is the jackpot E. That is, when the ally of justice wins, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round, so that the player can be made aware that it is a chance to shift to the state in which the special symbol is definitely changed. This allows the player to more interestingly observe the result of the effect performed at the jackpot.

  It is to be noted that there is a variation in the production contents, and the production contents in which the ally of justice has a high degree of expectation of winning (easy to be selected in the case of the jackpot F) and the suspicion that the ally of justice is likely to lose (in the case of the big hit E Effect content that is easily selected). For example, if the ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special attack, or if the ally of the enemy evades the attack of the enemy, the expectation of winning will be increased, and the attack of the justice will fall off, If an enemy attacks with a special technique, the possibility of defeat may be increased. As a result, it is possible to predict not only the result of whether or not the ally of justice wins, but also the result of the production flow up to victory or defeat. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  The content of the production performed up to the eleventh round is not limited to the production in which the ally of justice and the monster fight as described above, but can suggest an advantageous jackpot F and a jackpot E which is more disadvantageous than the jackpot F. Any mode may be used. For example, if the boy character 710 performs an effect of searching for a treasure and can find the treasure by the eleventh round, it may be configured so that the jackpot F is notified. It may be configured to display an effect of eating a large gluttony, and to notify the user of the jackpot F if the user finishes eating all the provided food.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the storage device 600 having a unique configuration not provided in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the playability related to the storage device 600 is provided. It may be. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and the conditions under which the storage valve 607a is opened, the advantages when the storage valve 607a is opened, and the disadvantages when the ball is right-hit in the closed state. May be configured to display an image (explanatory image) that explains. Thereby, the player can easily understand the gaming properties. Further, the back type on which the explanation image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. Thereby, a player who is accustomed to the game with the pachinko machine 10 and sufficiently understands the game characteristics can change to the back type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In this modification, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 are both treated as winning openings for obtaining a jackpot prize ball. The winning opening 602 may be treated as a normal winning opening. That is, as a termination condition of each round of the jackpot, each of the rounds of the jackpot ends when ten or more balls enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. (The number of balls entering the winning opening 602 is not involved). Thereby, the more the ball enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the twelve rounds of the jackpot, the more profitable to the player, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the present modification, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball can easily flow into the storage device 600, the ball is hardly inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a, and the storage device 600 is moved to the storage device 600. By adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball is less likely to flow, the ball is configured to easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, the ratio of shifting to the specially-changed state of the special symbol can be changed after the end of the jackpot, but the ratio of shifting to the certainly-changed state of the special symbol is changed. The method is not limited to this. For example, instead of keeping the ratio of the ball flowing into the storage device 600 constant, the positive variable ball opening 654 and the normal ball opening 655 are provided inside the second variable winning device 650 as in the first embodiment. It may be configured. Then, the configuration may be such that the clerk of the hall can adjust the ratio of the ball that has flowed into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 to the positive changing ball opening 654 and the normal ball opening 655. More specifically, for example, the second variable prize device 650 in the present modification is replaced with the second variable prize device 650 (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment, The shaft 650e is eliminated. Then, for example, a nail may be hammered at a branch position between the guide flow path 652 and the guide flow path 653 (that is, above a position where the switching shaft 650e is provided in the first embodiment). In addition, the nailing position may be, for example, a distance about the radius of a sphere from the place where the switching shaft 650e was provided in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15). In other words, the position may be a position where the sphere flowing down the guiding flow path 651 can contact (collide), and a position where the sphere can flow down to the guiding flow path 652 and the guiding flow path 653. With such a configuration, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the right, the game ball flowing down the guiding flow path 651 can easily contact (collide) with the left side surface of the nail. Therefore, the ball is likely to be repelled leftward in front view. Therefore, the ball easily flows into the guiding flow path 652 provided on the left side in the front view in the downstream of the second variable winning device 650, so that the ball easily enters the surely changing ball opening 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right side, the special symbol can be easily changed to a certain state after the big hit. Conversely, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the left, the game ball flowing down the guiding flow path 651 can easily contact (collide) with the right side surface of the nail, so that the ball faces forward. It is easy to be repelled rightward. Therefore, the ball easily flows into the guiding flow path 653 provided on the left side in the front view in the downstream of the second variable winning device 650, so that the ball easily enters the certain-variable ball entrance 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right side, it is possible to make it difficult for the special symbol to be in a certain change state after the end of the big hit. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the ease of entering the probability changing entrance port 654 can be adjusted, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game corresponding to the business policy of each hall.

  Further, as another specific example in which the ratio of shifting to the special symbol change state after the end of the jackpot can be changed, the entrance portion of the storage device 600 is opened instead of the nails 921a and 921b in the present modification. A variable member that switches between the closed state and the closed state may be provided. Then, the variable member may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state while the power is on. In this case, the length of one cycle composed of the open state and the closed state is fixed (for example, 3 seconds), and the period between the open state and the closed state is determined. The ratio may be adjusted so that the hole can be adjusted. More specifically, for example, an operation means such as a dip switch that can be set in a plurality of states is provided. Then, for example, if the state of the switch indicates (00000000B), the configuration is such that the entrance of the storage device 600 is not set to the closed state. That is, since the entrance is always open, the game ball is set to be in a state in which it is most likely to flow into the storage device 600. Then, if the state of the switch indicates (11111111B), the entrance of the storage device 600 is always set to the closed state. That is, the state is set such that no ball flows into the storage device 600 at the jackpot, and the ball easily flows into the second specific winning opening 650a. When the dip switch is in another state (00000001B to 11111110B), the period in which the dip switch is in the closed state from (00000000B) to (11111111B) may be configured to be longer. In other words, the configuration may be such that the ball is more likely to enter the second specific winning opening 650a as heading toward (11111111B), and the probability of the special symbol being changed after the big hit is more easily set. With such a configuration, a hall where the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be used as a gaming machine having a special characteristic that is unlikely to be in a special symbol changing state is, for example, a closed state where the variable member is 0.5 seconds and a state where the variable member is 2.5 seconds. What is necessary is just to adjust the setting of the dip switch so as to repeat the open state. Conversely, in a hall where the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be used as a gaming machine having a special characteristic in which the special symbol is likely to change, for example, the variable member repeats a closed state of 2.5 seconds and an open state of 0.5 seconds. The dip switch settings can be adjusted as needed. Thereby, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the business policy of the hall, so that a highly versatile game corresponding to the business policy of each hall can be provided.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the guiding flow path 704 provided inside the storage device 700 is configured to be able to be closed by the storage valve 704a, and one ball can be stored above the storage valve 704a in the closed state. Was configured. Then, in a state where the balls are stored, the balls can easily enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702 or the out-opening (small-value winning opening) 703d, 703e having a lot of award balls to be paid out. When the storage valve 704a is opened, the ball is configured to easily enter the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 where the number of awarded balls to be paid out is small. The storage valve 704a is basically set to a closed state, and is configured to be opened when the player operates the release button 800. In other words, when the storage valve 704a is in the closed state, the ball may enter the general winning port (high value winning port) 702 and the out ports (small value winning port) 703d and 703e (prize). There is a possibility that a large number of balls can be obtained, but there is a possibility that a prize ball may not be obtained. However, if the storage valve 704a is in an open state, the ball flowing into the storage device 700 will be a general prize. A state where the ball can enter the mouth (medium value winning opening) 701 (a state in which a small amount of the prize ball can be stably obtained, though small) is obtained. Therefore, depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, the player can switch the gameplay of the pachinko machine 10, and each player selects a gameplay that suits his / her taste. It was configured to be able to play games.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, the configuration is such that up to two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. Further, when the storage valve 704a is closed, depending on the arrangement of the stored balls, the ball can easily enter the ball entrance opening (the ball can easily enter the general winning opening 702 or enter the outgoing opening). The ball is configured to change easily. That is, in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, by confirming the arrangement of the stored balls, it is easy to recognize whether or not the ball is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. It is configured to be able to.

  The only difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is that the internal structure of the storage device 700 is different. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the second embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this modification. As shown in FIG. 86, also in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the path provided on the right side of the game board 13. As described above, in this modification, up to two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. Details of the storage device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example in which the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 is closed and two balls are stored. As shown in FIG. 87, in the present modified example, the storage valve 704a is inclined so as to descend to the lower right in front view. For this reason, most of the spheres that first flow into the guide flow path 704 with the storage valve 704a closed are stationary with the inclination of the storage valve 704a biased to the right of the guide flow path 704. In addition, as shown in FIG. 87, the portion of the induction flow path 704 above the storage valve 704a is longer than in the second embodiment. In addition, the guide channel 704 does not have a width enough to arrange two balls horizontally. For this reason, when another ball flows into the guiding flow path 704 while one ball is stored on the right side inside the guiding flow path 704, in many cases, a new ball is added to the upper left side of the previously stored sphere. (A new ball is stored between the previously stored ball and the inner wall portion on the left side of the guide channel 704).

  In the storage state shown in FIG. 87 (a state in which the first stored ball is rightward and the second stored ball is leftwardly stored), the ball that subsequently flows into the storage device 700 is The second ball is likely to collide with the right side of the stored ball. Therefore, the traveling direction of the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 changes rightward due to the impact of the collision (contact) with the stored ball. That is, the ball flows into the guiding flow path 708 and enters one of the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e.

  As described above, in the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 87, even if the ball can flow into the storage device 700, the ball enters the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e. The player cannot get a prize ball because the ball is hit. That is, the storage state shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous for the player.

  Note that a ball entry sensor 704b that detects a ball when a ball is present on the near side in front view is provided on the upper left side of the storage valve 704a in the guide channel 704. The arrangement of the ball can be determined by the ball entry sensor 704b. More specifically, when the ball is continuously detected by the ball input sensor 704b for a predetermined period (for example, one minute), it is determined that the arrangement is as shown in FIG. By determining whether or not the arrangement is as shown in FIG. 87, an image prompting the player to press the release button 800 when a certain period of time has elapsed after the arrangement as shown in FIG. 87 (see FIG. 89) ) Can be displayed. As a result, an unfavorable arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 is likely to enter the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e continues for a long time, which is disadvantageous for the player. Can be suppressed.

  Next, another example in which two balls are stored will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In the example shown in FIG. 88, a game ball that first flows into the guiding flow path 704 with the storage valve 704a closed is stored leftward with respect to the guiding flow path 704, and a second guiding flow path is provided. The ball that has flowed into 704 is stored on the right side with respect to the guiding flow path 704. In the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 88, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 after that tends to collide (contact) with the left side surface of the second stored ball. Therefore, the falling direction of the sphere that collides (contacts) with the stored sphere is likely to change to the left, so that the sphere that flows down the guiding flow path 706 and has a large number of prize balls to be paid out (six out). It becomes easy to enter the winning opening (high value winning opening) 702.

  As described above, in the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 88, by causing the ball to flow into the storage device 700, the ball easily enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. This is an advantageous state for a player who can expect to obtain a prize ball every time a ball flows in.

  Note that the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is more difficult to realize than the storage state shown in FIG. 87 because the storage valve 704a is tilted downward and to the lower right. For example, when two spheres flow into the guiding flow path 704 almost simultaneously after the storage valve 704a is closed, or when the sphere first reaches the storage valve 704a, the sphere of the storage valve 704a or the guiding flow path 704 This can be realized, for example, when the second ball flows into the guide channel 704 while colliding with the inner wall portion and repelling in the upper left direction.

  Most of the cases where the storage valve 704a is closed are in the storage state shown in FIG. 87, but also in this modification, the storage valve 704a can be opened by operating the release button 800 as in the second embodiment. . That is, it is possible to reset the storage state and cause the storage device 700 to store the sphere in expectation of the storage state shown in FIG. 88 again. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with the goal of being in the storage state shown in FIG. 88, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, when the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is realized, a sense of accomplishment can be given to the player, and the prize is kept by continuing to enter the ball into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. It can give a sense of expectation that many balls can be obtained.

  In addition, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement is shifted from the ball-in sensor 704b (the ball does not block the front side of the ball-in sensor 704b). Therefore, even if the arrangement shown in FIG. In addition, it is possible to prevent (suppress) display of an image (see FIG. 89) that prompts the player to press the release button 800. Therefore, an advantageous state in which the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702 can be continued for a longer time.

  Next, an image (prompt display image) for urging the user to press the release button 800 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating an image (suggestion display image) that prompts the user to press the release button 800. The suggestion display image shown in FIG. 87 is an image displayed when it is determined that the unfavorable arrangement for the player has continued for a certain period of time (one minute). More specifically, when the ball is continuously detected by the ball input sensor 704b for one minute, it is determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is stable, and a suggestion display image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 89, when the display of the suggestion display image is set, the characters “disadvantaged” are displayed in the small area Ds2. By displaying these characters, the arrangement shown in FIG. 89 for the player is an unfavorable arrangement for the player (an arrangement in which the ball flowing into the storage device 700 is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e). Can be recognized. In addition, below the text “Unfavorable placement”, a text “Press button to reset placement !!” is displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to make the player recognize that pressing the release button 800 (operation) will eliminate the disadvantageous state.

  As described above, in the present modified example, the disadvantageous arrangement is notified to the player by the suggestion display image, and the disadvantageous arrangement is promoted by pressing (operation) of the release button 800, and the advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88). (The arrangement in which the ball shown is guided to the general winning opening 702) as shown in FIG. Therefore, the player can be more actively participated in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is configured to be displayed when a long time (1 minute) elapses in a state disadvantageous to the player (see FIG. 87). Alternatively, the storage valve 704a may be configured to switch to the open state (released state). That is, when the ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time (for example, one minute) by the ball input sensor 704b, it is determined that the ball is stable in an unfavorable state, and the arrangement of the ball stored in the storage device 700 is reset. For this purpose, the storage valve 704a may be configured to be opened. Thereby, even a beginner who does not fully understand the mechanism of the storage device 700 can be prevented from playing a game for a long time without noticing the disadvantageous state.

  In the present modification, the storage valve 704a is opened when the ball is continuously detected by the ball input sensor 704b for one minute. However, the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is reset (the storage valve 704a is opened). The time until) is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined. By shortening the time (for example, 30 seconds), the period during which the player is disadvantaged can be shortened. By increasing the time (for example, 5 minutes), the frequency at which the suggestion display image is displayed can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. The electrical configuration of the modification of the second embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the second embodiment in that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and that the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 is different. The difference is that the input ball sensor 228 is electrically connected to the input / output port 225. Other electrical configurations are the same as the electrical configurations in the second embodiment, and thus detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  The RAM 223 according to the modification of the second embodiment has at least a disadvantageous time counter 223 m and a suggestion display flag 223 n in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the second embodiment.

  The unfavorable time counter 223m is a counter used to determine the elapsed time since the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous to the player (the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e). The value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is incremented by one every time a ball is detected by the ball entry sensor 228 (S4503 in FIG. 92). In addition, in a state where the counter value is added (a state of a value larger than 0), if a ball is not detected by the ball input sensor 228, it is reset to 0 (S4508 in FIG. 92). In the present modification, when it is determined based on the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous for the player (the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e), Control is performed so that the suggestion display image described above (see FIG. 89) is displayed.

  The suggestion display flag 223n is a flag indicating whether or not the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is being displayed. If the suggestion display flag 223n is on, it indicates that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is being displayed, and if it is off, it indicates that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not being displayed. Is shown. The suggestion display flag 223n is turned on when the display of the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is set (see S4506 in FIG. 92). On the other hand, when a storage state command indicating that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state) is received, the storage valve is set to off (see S4607 in FIG. 94).

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification Example of Second Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to a modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the main processing (see FIG. 92) in this modified example, in each processing of S1801 to S1817, the same processing as each processing of S1801 to S1817 in the second embodiment is executed. Further, in the main process (see FIG. 92) in the present modification, when the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1810) ends, next, a release suggestion display process for displaying a suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is executed ( (S1821), the process proceeds to S1811. Details of the release suggestion display processing (S1821) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the release suggestion display processing (S1821). In this release suggestion display processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball entry sensor 228 is on (S4501). It is determined whether or not there is (S4502). If the suggestion display flag 223n is on (S4502: Yes), the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is already being displayed, and it is not necessary to determine whether to display the suggestion display image. This processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4502, when it is determined that the suggestion display flag 223n is off (S4502: No), the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m (S4503), and the updated disadvantageous time is updated. It is determined whether the value of the counter 223m is larger than 60000 (S4504). Here, the disadvantageous time counter 223m is updated by one (every 1 ms) each time the main processing (see FIG. 91) is performed, and therefore, the counter value 60000 corresponds to one minute.

  In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is equal to or less than 60000 (S4504: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is greater than 60000 (S4504: Yes), a suggestion for notifying the player that a long time (1 minute) has elapsed since the disadvantageous arrangement was performed. A display rear image change command for displaying a display is set (S4505), a suggestion display flag 223n is set to ON (S4506), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4501, if it is determined that the ball sensor 228 has not detected a ball (the ball sensor is off) (S4501: No), there is no disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87). Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S4507). When it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is greater than 0 as a result of the determination in S4507 (S4507: Yes), the counter value is initialized to 0 (S4508), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is 0 (S4507: No), the processing of S4508 is skipped because the disadvantageous time counter 223m has already been initialized and it is not necessary to initialize it again. Then, the present process ends.

  By executing the release suggestion display process (S1821), the player plays a game for a long time while the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 remains unfavorable to the player (see FIG. 87). Can be prevented.

  Next, a command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device according to the modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. In this command determination processing, in each processing of S1901 to S1919 and S1921, the same processing as each processing of S1901 to S1919 and S1921 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment is respectively executed. . Further, in the command determination process of this modification, in the process of S1921, if it is determined that the storage status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1921: Yes), an image corresponding to the received storage status command is displayed. Is executed (S1929), and this processing is ended.

  Details of the storage state command processing (S1929) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this storage state command processing (S1929). In the storage state command processing (S1929), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state command has notified that the storage valve 704a has been switched to the closed state (storage state) (S4601). If it is determined that the switching to the closed state (storage state) has been notified (S4601: Yes), the image corresponding to the closed state (see FIG. 63A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A display rear image change command for display is set (S4602), and the storage state flag 223k is set to ON to indicate that the storage valve 704a is closed (S4603), and the process proceeds to S4604. And migrate.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, if it is determined that the notification from the storage state command is not the closed state (storage state) (it has been notified that the state has been switched to the open state (released state)) (S4601: No) Next, a display back image change command for displaying an image (see FIG. 63 (b)) corresponding to the open state (released state) on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S4605), and the storage valve is set. The storage state flag 223k is set to off to indicate that the current state of 704a is the open state (released state) (S4606). Then, to indicate that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed, the suggestion display flag 223n is set to off (S4607), and the process shifts to S4604.

  In the processing of S4604 executed after the processing of S4603 or S4607, the flow-down time counter 223l is used to determine whether or not it is a ball ejection period from when the storage valve 704a is switched to when the ball is released. The counter value corresponding to one second is set (S4604), and the process ends. By executing the storage state command processing (S1931), the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be appropriately updated in association with the state of the storage valve 704a notified from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the second embodiment is configured so that two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. In addition, as the storage state when the ball is stored inside, at least the storage state shown in FIG. 87 and the storage state shown in FIG. 88 can be taken. These storage states differ from each other in the entrances into which the balls flowing into the storage device 700 are likely to enter. Further, since the inside of the storage device 700 is configured to be visible to the player, the storage state can be easily determined visually. Therefore, the player can be made to select whether or not it is better to reset the storage state by once setting the storage valve 704a to the open state.

  Further, an advantageous storage state (a storage state in which the ball easily enters the general winning opening 701 shown in FIG. 88) and an unfavorable storage state (a storage state in which the ball easily enters the out opening shown in FIG. 87) By providing the above, a game can be played in the expectation of an advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88). Then, even in the case of an unfavorable storage state (see FIG. 87), the storage state is reset by opening the storage valve 704a, and the game is aimed at the advantageous storage state again (see FIG. 88). Can be performed. In addition, the advantageous storage state can give the player a sense of accomplishment, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained by continuing to enter the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. You can have a sense of expectation for what you can do.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the configuration is such that two spheres can be stored inside the storage device 700, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an internal structure that can store three or more spheres may be used. . In this case, if the ball entry sensor 228 is provided near the upper end of the guide flow path 704 on the left side, it can be easily determined whether or not there is a disadvantageous arrangement in which the ball is guided to the outlet.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, by providing the incoming ball sensor 228 near the upper end of the guide channel 704 on the left side, is the arrangement of the balls stored inside the storage device 700 disadvantageous to the player? Although it was configured to be able to determine whether or not the ball was inserted, the mounting position of the ball entry sensor 228 is not limited thereto. For example, it may be disposed near the upper end of the guide channel 704 on the right side. That is, when the balls stored in the storage device 700 have the arrangement shown in FIG. 87, the stored balls are not detected by the ball input sensor 228, but when the arrangement shown in FIG. The ball entry sensor 228 may be arranged so that the upper ball among the stored balls is detected by the ball entry sensor 228. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball is arranged so as to easily enter the general winning opening 702 (see FIG. 88). Therefore, based on the detection result of the ball entry sensor 228, for example, when the ball is continuously detected by the ball entry sensor 228 for 5 seconds or more, it can be determined that the ball is stationary in the arrangement shown in FIG. . Therefore, based on the fact that the stored ball has the advantageous arrangement shown in FIG. 88, the fact that the arrangement is advantageous for the player is notified that the current state is advantageous for the player. Can be. As a notification method, for example, in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81, a character “Advantaged placement” and a character “Right-handed with a great chance!” Are displayed. May be. This allows the player to easily recognize that the present state is in an advantageous state, so that the release button 800 is erroneously pressed (operated), and the ball stored in the storage device 700 is caused to flow down. (Resetting the advantageous arrangement) can be suppressed.

  Further, the number of the incoming ball sensors 228 is not limited to one, and a plurality of them may be provided. More specifically, for example, a ball entry sensor 228 may be provided near the upper end of the guide flow path 704 on the right side and on the left side. Accordingly, when the sensor provided on the left side continuously detects a sphere for 5 seconds, for example, it can be determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is stable. In addition, when the sensor provided on the right side continuously detects a sphere for 5 seconds, for example, it can be determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 is stable. Therefore, in the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 (disadvantageous arrangement for the player whose ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e), the above-described suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed to play the game. This can encourage the user to reset the disadvantageous arrangement. In the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 (an arrangement advantageous for a player whose ball is guided to the general winning opening 702), an image indicating that the arrangement is advantageous for the player (for example, “Advantage”) An image in which the character “arranged” and the character “right-handed and have a great chance!” Are displayed in the small area Ds2) to recognize that the current state is advantageous, and Motivation can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example, the storage valve 704a is configured to be inclined downward in the lower right direction, but the inclination may be reversed. This facilitates the realization of a storage state (see FIG. 88) that is advantageous to the player, so that the player can more actively aim at the storage device 700 and launch a ball. Further, the inclination formed by the storage valve 704a may be eliminated. Thereby, it is possible to completely determine whether the storage state is an advantageous storage state or an unfavorable storage state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, the trigger for opening the storage valve 704a is only pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but another trigger may be provided. For example, the storage state may be reset periodically, such as a configuration in which the storage valve 704a is set to an open state during a big hit. If the opportunity to reset the storage state is completely left to the player, once the advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88) is reached, the game is continued while maintaining the storage state, and the player is not allowed to enter the hall. It may be profitable. On the other hand, if the storage state is periodically reset, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the advantageous storage state from continuing for a long time, and it is possible to prevent a disadvantage to the hole.

  In the present modification, the state of the storage valve 704a is switched based on pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, and the like. This allows each player to start a game during a period in which the storage valve 704a is in a state that suits his / her taste.

  Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of a lottery that is performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is basically configured to be in a closed state (storage state), and is configured to execute a lottery as to whether or not to switch to an open state (released state) once a minute. You may. Further, when the lottery is won, for example, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds. Thereby, when the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is an unfavorable arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the balls are easily guided to the out ports (small value winning ports) 703d and 703e, the lottery is won. This allows the player to play the game in the hope that the storage valve 704a is opened. On the other hand, when the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is an advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88) in which the balls are easily guided to the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702, the storage valve 704a is opened. The game can be performed in the hope that the game will not be lost in the lottery. Therefore, since different lottery results can be expected according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, novel gaming properties can be provided. Furthermore, the lottery probability of the lottery for determining whether to set the storage valve 704a to the open state (canceled state) or not may be configured so that a clerk of the hall or the like can adjust the lottery probability. Accordingly, when the player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict a table having a good lottery probability and select a table. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit and the like when setting the lottery probability of the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting the platform before starting the game. .

  In the present modification, since the storage device 700 having a unique configuration that is not mounted on a general game machine is provided, an effect explaining the playability of the storage device 700 may be provided. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (explanation image) for explaining the conditions under which the storage valve 704a is opened, the advantages and disadvantages when the storage valve 704a is opened, and the like. May be configured. Thereby, the player can easily understand the gaming properties. Further, the back type on which the explanation image is displayed may be configured so that the back type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. Thereby, a player who is accustomed to the game with the pachinko machine 10 and sufficiently understands the game characteristics can change to the back type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only during the period in which the release button 800 is pressed (operated). However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, when the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be received during the predetermined period during which the storage valve 704a is open. This eliminates the need to keep pressing the release button 800 to keep the storage valve 704a open. Further, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), it may be configured to switch between the closed state (reserved state) and the open state (released state). With such a configuration, the release button 800 may be operated only when the state is to be switched, so that the number of times of operation by the player can be reduced. Further, an operation means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating the release button 800 may be provided opposite to the release button 800. Even with such a configuration, similarly to the present embodiment, it is possible for each player to select a game characteristic that suits his / her taste.

  In this modification, when a certain period of time (one minute) has elapsed since the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous to the player, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed to release the suggestion to the player. Although the configuration is such that the pressing (operation) of the button 800 is prompted, the method of pressing (operating) the release button 800 is not limited to this. For example, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 may be integrally configured (that is, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 are collectively formed as one operation button, and the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 May be electrically connected to each other). If it is determined that the ball has been continuously detected by the ball input sensor 704b for a certain period (one minute) or more (that is, the ball has been disadvantageously arranged for the player shown in FIG. 87), the frame button 22 is pressed. May be configured to make it easier to select a variation type in which the effect develops. Thus, when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) to develop the effect, the storage valve 704a can be simultaneously set to the open state (released state). In general, the player observes the result of the variable effect that informs whether or not a jackpot is most interesting. Therefore, when the variable effect in which the effect develops by pressing the frame button 22 is executed, the pressing of the frame button 22 is surely performed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the user is being prompted. Therefore, the disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87) can be more reliably reset.

  In the present modified example, the first specific winning opening 65a is provided below the first entrance opening 64 so that the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a by left-handing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, similarly to the first embodiment, a first specific winning opening 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700. This allows the ball to flow into the first specific winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 simply by right-handing in the special game state (big hit state), so that the prize ball in the special game state (big hit state) can be obtained. You can do more. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  In each of the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 and the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 are provided with respective storage valves by sliding to the front side in front view and the back side in front view. Although the channel is closed and the sphere can be stored in the upper portion thereof, the operation of the storage valve is not limited to this. For example, in the closed state, the storage valve is configured to close the flow path by standing upright with respect to the inner wall portion of the flow path, and in the open state, the storage valve falls in the downstream direction of the flow path, The flow path may be configured to allow passage of a sphere. Further, the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a do not need to completely close the induction flow path 607 and the induction flow path 704, respectively. For example, when the width of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is reduced and the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a protrudes toward the near side in a front view, the state in which the induction flow path 607 or the induction flow path 704 is partially opened You may comprise so that it may become. Also, the width of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be set so that the width of the open portion is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. Thereby, the price of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. In addition, when the guiding flow path 607 or the guiding flow path 704 is set to the open state (release state) by the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a, it is not necessary to completely open the guiding flow path 607 or the guiding flow path 704. . That is, a part of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may protrude into the induction flow path 607 or the induction flow path 704. Further, the width of the open portion in the guide channel 607 or the guide channel 704 may be configured to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. Thereby, in the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a, the operation range between the open state and the closed state can be narrowed, so that the power consumed for switching the state of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. it can. In addition, if the width of the open portion is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the ball, the inflowing ball may come into contact with the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a, and the downward momentum may be shaved. (It can be hardly stored (held) at the position of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a). Therefore, even with this configuration, the same operation as the above embodiments can be realized. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the sphere can be stored on the guiding flow path 607 and the guiding flow path 704 and a state in which the sphere flowing into the guiding flow path 607 and the guiding flow path 704 flows down. .

  In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, both ends of the ball entrances provided in each storage device are set as out ports, but the out ports at both ends may be omitted. Even if the out port is abolished and the inner wall is used, the ball can be made to enter another entrance port. Also, by eliminating the out ports at both ends, the storage device can be made more compact.

  In each of the above embodiments, the plurality of out ports are provided inside the storage device, but instead of the out ports provided inside the storage device, the out ports 66 provided below the game board 13 in a front view are provided. (See FIG. 2). As a result, the number of the outgoing ports can be reduced to one, so that it is sufficient to detect only the number of the balls entering the out port 66 in order to grasp the number of the ejected balls. Therefore, the number of detection switches for detecting the entry of a ball can be reduced, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the number of the balls stored in the upper portion of the storage valve is one (first embodiment, a modification of the first embodiment, and the second embodiment), or two balls (a modification of the second embodiment). ), But is not limited to this, and may be configured to store three or more spheres. Further, when storing a plurality of spheres, the spheres may be stored vertically or may be arranged side by side. In this case, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve may be configured to be countable. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, five balls may be stored above the storage valve 607a, and the storage valve 607a may be opened when the fifth ball is stored. . As a result, immediately after the storage valve 607a is opened, five balls simultaneously flow down to the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602, so that a large amount (5 × 15) of the winning balls is paid out in a short time. Can receive. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball is to be stored in the storage device 600, so that the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  In the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be configured to be closed while the power is off. That is, when the cutoff of the power supply is detected, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, and when the power is turned on, the state of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a at the time of the power cutoff is returned. You may. Thus, it is possible to suppress the illegality of causing the sphere to enter the storage device 600 or the storage device 700 while the power is cut off, and immediately acquiring the prize ball when the power is restored.

  In each of the above embodiments, the entrance (the winning opening) into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device enters is fixed by the guiding flow path through which the ball has flowed (that is, the arrangement of each entrance) Is fixed), but is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the position of the entrance is changed periodically or randomly. More specifically, a well-known clune or the like may be provided on the bottom surface of the storage device, and each winning port (ball entry port) may be provided in an annular shape on the clune. Then, by rotating the clune, a winning port (ball entry port) into which the ball flowing down each guide channel flows may have randomness. Thereby, it is possible for the player to watch interestingly the entrance where the ball that has flowed into the storage device enters. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the inside of the storage device is configured to be visible, but may be configured so that the inside of the storage device is difficult to visually recognize from the front.

  In the above embodiments, the opening and closing of the storage valve are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. Thus, the processing load on MPU 201 of main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute a variable effect selection process, a special symbol lottery process, and the like, which are main processes related to the game, without delay.

  In each of the above embodiments, when a ball enters the entrance (winning opening), a number of prize balls according to the type of the entrance (winning opening) are paid out. , But is not limited to this. For example, the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine of a type in which a prize ball is not given as a game value, such as an enclosed pachinko machine, and for example, a prepaid card used for a game according to a type of a ball entrance (prize opening) into which a ball enters. You may comprise so that a balance may be increased.

  All or some of the embodiments described above may be combined.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group> (Award balls are given to the balls that enter the holding device at the time of the big hit)
A specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which game balls can flow, and ball entry means provided at a position where game balls flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball; Based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means, based on the game ball, flowing down the second flow path, a specific privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the game ball flows down, A first distribution state in which game balls flowing into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which game balls are more easily distributed to the second flow path as compared to the first distribution state. It is provided with a flow distribution means which can be changed to a distribution state, and a setting means which can set the state of the flow distribution means to at least the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to a game state. A gaming machine A1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a winning is achieved based on a gaming ball winning a specific winning opening. In addition, there are known a plurality of winning ports in which a prize ball is paid out when a ball wins, in addition to a specific winning port. Some of the conventional gaming machines can change the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to a direction in which a player ejects a game ball by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning opening. (For example, JP-A-2001-129177).

  However, since the prize balls that can be obtained by winning are generally larger than the prize balls that are paid out by winning in the winning opening, the player usually determines whether or not the prize balls are to be won. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. That is, it was common for a player to continue to launch a game ball in the same direction until a hit was achieved. Therefore, when the player launches a ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win in the same winning opening, and the number of awarded balls to be paid out may be little changed. That is, there is a risk that the game will be monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the specific flow path branches into the first flow path and the second flow path. A case where a ball is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and a game ball flows down the second flow path based on a game ball entering the ball entry means. The specific privilege which is advantageous to the player as compared with the above is provided by the predetermined privilege providing means. A first distribution state in which game balls flowing into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and a second distribution state in which game balls are more easily distributed to the second flow path as compared to the first distribution state. At this time, the flow channel distribution means is changed. The state of the flow path distribution means is changed by the setting means to at least a first distribution state and a second distribution state according to the game state.

  Thereby, in the game state in which the channel distribution means is set to the first distribution state, a specific privilege is easily given by the game balls flowing into the specific channel, and the game is set to the second distribution state. In the state, it is difficult to give a specific privilege. Therefore, even if the player launches the game ball toward the specific flow path, the privilege given according to the game state can be made different, so that the game can be prevented from being monotonous. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine A1, a predetermined ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and a predetermined ball entry based on the game ball entering the normal ball entry means A gaming machine A2, comprising: a game value providing means for providing a game value, wherein the specific privilege providing means provides a game value greater than the predetermined game value as the specific privilege.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, the normal ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and the predetermined value is given by the game value providing means based on the game ball entering the normal ball entry means. A game value is given. A game value greater than a predetermined game value is provided as a specific benefit by the specific privilege provision means.

  Thereby, in the gaming state in which the channel distribution means is set to the first distribution state, more games are played when the game balls flow into the specific flow path than in the game state in which the channel distribution means is set to the second distribution state. It's easier to get value. Therefore, the game value given according to the game state can be made different, so that there is an effect that the game can be prevented from being monotonous.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and the gaming state is changed to a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. Game state setting means for setting the state of the flow path distribution means to the first distribution state based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means. Gaming machine A3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the gaming state is changed to the specific lottery result by the lottery means, and the gaming state is set to the gaming state setting means. Is set to Based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the state of the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means.

  Thereby, when the gaming state is set to the privilege gaming state, in addition to the advantage being provided to the player by the privilege gaming state, more gaming value is given by flowing the gaming ball into the specific flow path. It is easy to be. Therefore, the privilege gaming state can be set to a more advantageous state for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's sense of expectation for the privilege game state can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A3, variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first ball entry state in which game balls can enter and a second ball entry state in which game balls are less likely to enter than in the first ball entry state. And a specific value providing means for providing a specific game value based on a game ball entering the variable ball input means, and based on the bonus game state being set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine A4 comprising: variable control means for changing the variable ball-in means to the first ball-in state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3. That is, the variable ball entry means is changed between a first ball entry state in which game balls can enter and a second ball entry state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first ball entry state. A specific game value is provided by the specific value providing means based on a game ball entering the ball entering means. Based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the variable control means changes the variable ball entry means to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  This allows the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means in the privilege game state, so that a specific game value can be obtained by launching a ball aiming at the variable ball entry means. Therefore, in the privilege game state, the player can acquire more game value, so that there is an effect that the player's expectation of the privilege game state can be further increased.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, when the game ball enters the normal ball entry means, the game value assigning means assigns a predetermined amount of game media as the predetermined game value, The gaming machine A5, wherein, when a game ball enters the ball entry means, the specific privilege provision means provides a greater amount of game media than the predetermined amount as the specific privilege.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4. That is, when a game ball enters the normal ball entry means, a predetermined amount of game media is provided as a predetermined game value by the game value provision means. When the game ball enters the ball entry means by the specific privilege provision means, a larger amount of game media than a predetermined amount is provided as a specific benefit.

  This allows the player to play the game with the provided game medium, and thus allows the player to play the game for a longer time. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the variable control means changes the variable ball-in means from the second ball-in state to the first ball-in state based on the bonus state being set by the game state setting section. The game state setting means sets the game state different from the privilege game state based on the variable control means changing the variable ball-in means by the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5. That is, based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the variable ball-in means is changed from the second ball-in state to the first ball-in state by the variable control means a predetermined number of times. A game state different from the privilege game state is set by the game state setting means based on the variable control means changing the variable ball-in means a predetermined number of times.

  In this way, in one privilege gaming state, the player is given a predetermined number of opportunities to enter the ball into the variable ball entry means, so that the player can acquire more specific game value. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's sense of expectation for the privilege game state can be further increased.

  The gaming machine A7 according to any one of the gaming machines A4 to A6, wherein the specific value assigning means assigns a specific amount of game media as the specific game value.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A4 to A6, a specific amount of game media is provided as a specific game value by the specific value providing means, so that the player is provided by the provided game medium. Can play the game. Therefore, since the player can play the game for a longer time, the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the game machine may include a guiding flow path capable of guiding a game ball to the specific flow path, and the variable ball-in means may include the specific flow A gaming machine A8 characterized by being provided at a position where a game ball that has not flowed into a road can enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the game ball is guided to the specific channel by the guide channel, and the game ball flows to the specific channel among the game balls flowing into the guide channel. Since the variable ball entry means is provided at a position where game balls that have not flowed in can enter the ball, the player simply launches the game ball into the guide channel in the privilege game state, and the specific channel and the variable ball A ball can be flowed into the means. Therefore, in the privilege game state, a specific privilege and a specific game value can be acquired, so that the merit of the player in the privilege game state can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's sense of expectation for the privilege game state can be further increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, the game machine further includes a counting means for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball-in means, and the variable control means includes a predetermined number of balls counted by the counting means. The variable ball entry means is changed to the second ball entry state based on the fact that the bonus game state has been established when a specific condition is satisfied in the bonus game state. Setting the gaming state different from the state, wherein the setting means sets the flow path allocating means in the at least a predetermined period from when the privilege gaming state is set to when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being set to one distribution state.

  According to the gaming machine A9, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A4 to A8. That is, the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means is counted by the counting means. The variable ball entry means is changed to the second ball entry state by the variable control means based on the fact that at least the number counted by the counting means has reached the predetermined number. When the specific condition is satisfied in the bonus gaming state, a gaming state different from the bonus gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. At least for a predetermined period from when the privilege gaming state is set to when the specific condition is satisfied, the setting means sets the flow path distributing means to the first distribution state.

  As a result, the opportunity for the player to acquire a specific game value can be limited to the time when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. Therefore, before the predetermined number is reached, more game balls flow into the specific channel, and a game can be performed during the privilege game state in the hope that the specific privilege will be given more times. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the privilege game state of the player can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A9, the ball entry detecting means for detecting that a game ball has entered the normal ball entry means, and the ball entry detection means causes the normal ball entry means to enter the normal ball entry state during the privilege game state. And a notifying unit for executing a predetermined notification when it is detected that a game ball has entered the game machine A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A3 to A9, it is detected by the ball entry detecting means that a game ball has entered the normal ball entry means, and the bonus game is provided by the ball entry detecting means. When it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal ball entry means during the state, a predetermined notification is executed by the notification means, so that the flow path distribution means is set despite the bonus game state being set. When a failure that is not set to the first distribution state occurs, the failure can be recognized by a player or a store clerk by a predetermined notification. Therefore, there is an effect that the malfunction can be quickly eliminated.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the first flow path is provided at a position where a game ball flowing into the specific flow path is more likely to flow than the second flow path, The flow path distributing means opens the first flow path in the first distribution state, and closes the first flow path in the second distribution state. The gaming machine A11, wherein the gaming machine A11 is provided at a position where a game ball flowing into the specific channel is easily guided in a state where the channel is closed.

  According to the gaming machine A11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10. That is, the first flow path is provided at a position where game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path are more likely to flow than the second flow path. The first flow path is opened in the first distribution state by the flow path distribution means, and the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state. The second flow path is provided at a position where game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path while the first flow path is closed are easily guided.

  This makes it possible to change the flow path through which the game balls flowing into the specific flow path flow, depending on whether or not the first flow path is closed. Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously launched toward the specific flow path, a specific privilege is given or not given, so that it is possible to suppress the game from being monotonous. .

  In the gaming machine A11, when the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state, the flow path distribution means can hold up to a predetermined upper limit number of game balls upstream of the closed position. In the second flow path, when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the held game balls contact the game balls flowing into the specific flow path. The gaming machine A12 is provided at a position where it easily flows in based on a change in the downflow direction.

  According to the gaming machine A12, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A11. That is, when the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state, the flow path distribution means holds the game balls up to a predetermined upper limit number upstream of the closed position. In a state in which a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the held game balls and the game balls flowing into the specific flow path come into contact with each other and the flowing direction changes. The second flow path is provided at a position where it can easily flow.

  As a result, even if the game ball is continuously launched toward the specific flow path, a specific privilege is given or not given, so that the effect that the game becomes monotonous can be suppressed. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, a display unit that displays an image, and a display control unit that controls the display unit to display an image according to a state of the flow path distribution unit is provided. A gaming machine A13 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the display is controlled by the display control means so that an image corresponding to the state of the flow path distributing means is displayed on the display means. In addition, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the state of the flow path distribution unit.

  In the gaming machine A13, the display control means is configured to set the specific flow path when the game ball flows into the specific flow path based on the setting of the flow path distribution means in the first distribution state by the setting means. A gaming machine A14 for displaying an image indicating that a privilege is easily given.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A13, when the game ball flows into the specific flow path, it is specified based on the setting of the flow path distribution means by the setting means to the first distribution state. An image suggesting that the privilege is easily given is displayed by the display control means. Thereby, even if the player is a beginner, there is an effect that the merits when the game ball flows into the specific flow path can be easily understood.

<Characteristic B group> (Switch the flow path of another ball with the ball held in the holding device)
A specific flow path branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow, and a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball. First ball entry means, a first provision means for providing a first game value based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and a game flowing down the second flow path A second ball entry means provided at a position where a ball can enter, and the first game provided by the first provision means based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means A second assigning means for assigning a second game value different from the value, a first position at which at least one game ball flowing into the first channel can be held on the first channel, and a first position thereof. The game ball that has flowed into the first flow path as compared to the position is variable to a second position where it is difficult for the game ball to be held on the first flow path. A step, and switching means for switching the variable means from the first position to the second position based on establishment of a predetermined condition, wherein the variable means holds a game ball by holding the game ball. A gaming machine B1 for facilitating a game ball to be guided to the second flow path by a ball.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a winning is achieved based on a gaming ball winning a specific winning opening. In addition, there are known a plurality of winning ports in which a prize ball is paid out when a ball wins, in addition to a specific winning port. Some of the conventional gaming machines can change the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to a direction in which a player ejects a game ball by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning opening. (For example, JP-A-2001-129177).

  However, since the prize balls that can be obtained by winning are generally larger than the prize balls that are paid out by winning in the winning opening, the player usually determines whether or not the prize balls are to be won. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. That is, it was common for a player to continue to launch a game ball in the same direction until a hit was achieved. Therefore, when the player launches a ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win in the same winning opening, and the number of awarded balls to be paid out may be little changed. That is, there is a risk that the game will be monotonous.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the specific flow path is branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least the first flow path and the second flow path. A first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball, and the first imparting means sets the first ball entry means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. Game value. Further, a second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, the first providing means A second game value different from the first game value to be provided is provided by the second providing means. A first position at which at least one game ball flowing into the first flow path can be held on the first flow path; and a game ball flowing into the first flow path as compared to the first position on the first flow path. The variable means is changed to the second position which is difficult to be held. The switching means switches the variable means from the first position to the second position based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. Here, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball is easily guided to the second flow path by the held game ball.

  Thereby, even if the player keeps firing the game ball toward the specific flow path, the ball entry means in which the game ball flowing into the specific flow path enters depending on whether the predetermined condition is satisfied or not. Can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be changed between the first game value and the second game value depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that a monotonous game can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first game value provided by the first providing means has a larger game value than the second game value provided by the second providing means. Gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, the first game value provided by the first provision means is configured to be larger than the second game value provided by the second provision means. In a state where the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to make the player feel that the game ball is desired to flow into the specific flow path. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from being monotonous.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and setting a bonus gaming state advantageous to a player based on a lottery result by the lottery means being a specific lottery result. Game state setting means, a variable ball entry state that can be changed to a first entry state in which game balls can enter, and a second entry state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first entry state. Means, a specific value providing means for providing a specific game value based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball input means, and based on the privilege state being set by the game state setting means. A variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, wherein the switching means is set to the privilege game state by the game state setting means. Based on the variable Gaming machine B3, characterized in that the stage from the first position in which switching to the second position.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the gaming state is changed to the specific lottery result by the lottery means, and the gaming state is set to the gaming state setting means. Is set to The variable ball entry means is changed between a first ball entry state in which game balls can enter and a second ball entry state in which game balls are less likely to enter than the first ball entry state, and the variable ball entry is made. A specific game value is provided by the specific value providing means based on the game ball entering the means. Based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the variable ball-in means is changed to the first ball-in state until the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable control means.

  Thereby, in addition to the fact that a player can acquire a specific game value by entering a game ball into the variable ball entry means in the privilege game state, a game ball enters the first ball entry means. The player can acquire the first game value. Therefore, since the merit of the player in the privilege game state can be increased, there is an effect that the player's expectation of the privilege game state can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine B3, the game ball is provided with a guiding flow path capable of guiding the game ball to the specific flow path, and the variable ball-in means means that a game ball that has flowed down the guiding flow path without flowing into the specific flow path. A gaming machine B4 provided at a position where a ball can enter.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3. That is, the game ball is guided to the specific channel by the guide channel. A variable ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the guide channel without flowing into the specific channel can enter.

  Thus, the player can cause the ball to flow into the specific channel and the variable ball entry means only by launching the game ball into the guide channel in the privilege game state. Therefore, in the privilege game state, the first game value and the specific game value can be acquired, so that the merit of the player in the privilege game state can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's sense of expectation for the privilege game state can be further increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a third flow path which is one of the plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path, and a position where a game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter the ball. A third ball entry means provided and a third game value different from the second game value given by the second giving means based on a game ball entering the third ball entry means. A third granting means for granting a game value, wherein the variable means holds a game ball and places the game ball on the second flow path and the third flow path by the game ball held by the holding means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by facilitating guidance.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4. A third flow path is provided as one of a plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path. A third ball entry means is provided at a position where game balls flowing down the third flow path can enter the ball. A third game value different from the second game value provided by the second providing means is provided by the third providing means based on the game ball entering the third ball input means. When the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball is guided to the second channel and the third channel by the held game ball.

  Thereby, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the state in which the game ball flowing into the specific flow path can enter both the second ball entry means and the third ball entry means Become. In other words, since the player can acquire one of the second game value and the third game value having different game values, the game value acquired by the player can have randomness. . On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the second position, the first providing value is provided by the first providing means by the game balls flowing into the specific flow path entering the first ball input means. Therefore, the game value obtained by the player can be stabilized. Therefore, different playability can be realized depending on whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5, the third game value provided by the third providing means has a larger game value than the first game value provided by the first providing means. Gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B5, the third gaming value provided by the third providing means has a larger gaming value than the first gaming value provided by the first providing means. Since the game ball is held by the variable means, it can be expected that the game ball flows down the third flow path. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interestingly observe the traveling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5 or B6, when the game ball is held on the first flow path, the variable means may be configured such that the game ball that has flowed into at least the specific flow path as an arrangement of the held game ball is the second ball. The first arrangement that can be easily guided to the flow path and the second arrangement that can be easily guided to the third flow path as compared to the first arrangement can be held. Gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines B5 or B6. That is, when a game ball is held on the first flow path by the variable means, at least the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided to the second flow path as an arrangement of the held game ball. 1 and the second arrangement, which is easier to be guided to the third flow path than the first arrangement.

  As a result, there is an effect that the player can determine the flow path into which the game balls easily flow by merely checking the arrangement of the game balls.

  In the gaming machine B7, a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first disposition, and an effect for executing a specific effect indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means. A gaming machine B8 comprising an execution unit.

  According to the gaming machine B8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B7. That is, the determination means determines whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement, and a specific effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination means is executed by the effect execution means. This has the effect that the player can more easily determine the flow path into which the game ball easily flows.

  In any one of the gaming machines B5 to B8, an adjusting means capable of adjusting a ratio of a game ball flowing into the specific flow path to the second flow path and the third flow path is provided. Gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, the ratio of the game balls flowing into the specific flow path flowing into the second flow path and the third flow path is adjusted by the adjusting means. Since the adjustment is performed, a gaming machine to which the second privilege is easily given or a gaming machine to which the third privilege is easily given according to the business policy of the hall can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily adjusted according to the business policy of each hall.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the game machine includes operation means operable by a player, and detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means, and the switching means controls the operation on the operation means by the detection means. A gaming machine B10 wherein the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position based on the detection.

  According to the gaming machine B10, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects obtained by any of the gaming machines B1 to B9. That is, the operation on the operation means is detected by the detection means. The variable unit is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching unit based on detection of an operation on the operating unit by the detection unit.

  This allows the player to switch whether or not the game ball that has flowed down to the specific flow path to the first ball entry means can be switched, so that each player matches his or her own taste. There is an effect that the state can be set.

  The gaming machine B11 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, wherein the variable means is capable of holding only one gaming ball on the first flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, only one game ball is held on the first flow path by the variable means, so that the variable means is changed to the first position. When the player quits the game, the game ball remaining on the first flow path can be minimized by being held by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the player has lost when quitting the game.

<Characteristic C group> (Adjust the proportion of balls entering the holding device to change the probability of change)
A specific flow path branched at least into a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow, and a first incoming ball provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball Means, a first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and a game ball flowing down the second flow path. A second privilege different from the first privilege is provided based on the second ball entry means provided at a position where the ball can be entered and a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. A second privilege granting unit capable of adjusting the ratio of a game ball flowing down the specific flow path to flow into the first flow path and the second flow path; A gaming machine C1 comprising:

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a winning is achieved based on a gaming ball winning a specific winning opening. In addition, there are known a plurality of winning ports in which a prize ball is paid out when a ball wins, in addition to a specific winning port. Some of the conventional gaming machines can change the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to a direction in which a player ejects a game ball by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning opening. (For example, JP-A-2001-129177).

  However, since the prize balls that can be obtained by winning are generally larger than the prize balls that are paid out by winning in the winning opening, the player usually determines whether or not the prize balls are to be won. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. That is, it was common for a player to continue to launch a game ball in the same direction until a hit was achieved. Therefore, when a player plays a game on a gaming machine of the same model, as long as the player hits the ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win in the same winning opening, and the number of awarded balls to be paid out changes little. There was a case. That is, there is a risk that the game will be monotonous.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the specific flow path branches into the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game balls can flow. A first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball, and based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, the first privilege granting means sets the first ball entry means. One privilege is given. A second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and is different from the first privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The second privilege is provided by the second benefit providing means. The ratio at which the game balls flowing down the specific flow path flow into the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is adjusted by the adjustment means.

  By adjusting the adjusting means, a gaming machine to which the first privilege is easily given or a gaming machine to which the second privilege is easily given can be obtained. Therefore, different gaming properties can be realized by changing the adjustment degree by the adjustment means even for the same model. Therefore, there is an effect that a monotonous game can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C1, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and a bonus game for giving a privilege game advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. A first lottery state in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result, and a second lottery state in which the probability of the specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. Settable lottery state setting means, wherein the first privilege granting means controls the first lottery state to be set by the lottery state setting means as the first privilege. Gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, a predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game is executed when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. Privilege game advantageous to the player is provided by the privilege game providing means. The lottery state setting means sets a first lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result being the specific lottery result is high and a second lottery state in which the probability of the specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. . The first privilege providing means is controlled so that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means as the first privilege.

  This makes it possible to adjust the ease of transition to the first lottery state by the adjusting means. Therefore, the first lottery state is easily set according to the business policy of the hall, and the gaming property is easily set to the privilege gaming state, or the first lottery state is hard to be set, and the gaming property is easily given the second privilege. Can be adjusted. Therefore, there is an effect that a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall can be provided.

  The gaming machine C3, wherein in the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second privilege providing means is configured to provide a predetermined amount of game media as the second privilege.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1 or C2, a predetermined amount of game media is provided as the second privilege by the second privilege provision means, so that the predetermined amount of game media is easily provided. Can be adjusted by adjusting means. Therefore, it is possible to adjust whether the game property is such that a predetermined amount of game media is easily provided or the game property is easily provided with the first privilege according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall can be provided.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, a first position at which game balls can enter the first ball entry means, and a second position at which game balls are less likely to enter the ball entry means than at the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a position, and a variable control means that changes the variable means to the first position until a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the bonus game being provided by the bonus game providing means. , A gaming machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C2 or C3. That is, the variable means changes the first position at which the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and the second position at which the game ball does not easily enter the ball entry means as compared to the first position. Is done. The variable control means changes the variable means to the first position on the basis of the bonus game provided by the bonus game providing means until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  This makes it easier to give the first privilege in the privilege gaming state, so that it is possible to increase the player's expectation of the privilege game.

  In the gaming machine C4, the variable control means changes the variable means to the second position based on a lapse of a predetermined time since at least the variable means is changed to the first position. A gaming machine C5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C4, the variable means is changed to the second position by the variable control means based on a lapse of a predetermined time since at least the variable means is changed to the first position. Since it is variable, the opportunity for the player to acquire the first privilege can be limited until the predetermined time elapses. Therefore, the scarcity value of the first privilege can be increased, and the importance of the adjustment by the adjusting means can be increased. Therefore, when the player selects a gaming machine for playing a game, the player can select the gaming machine in consideration of the adjustment degree of the adjusting means, so that there is an effect that a pleasure of selecting the gaming machine can be provided. .

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific ball entry means to which a specific game value is given based on the entry of a game ball, and the specific game value based on the entry of a game ball. A low value ball entry means to which a small game value is also provided, wherein the second flow path is a specific flow path for causing a game ball to flow down to the specific value ball entry means; A first variable position at which at least one game ball flowing into the specific flow path can be retained on the specific flow path, A gaming machine C6, comprising: a position variable device that can be changed to a second variable position in which a game ball that has flowed into the specific channel is hard to be held on the specific channel.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific game value is given based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry means, and the game machine enters the small value ball entry means. A game value smaller than a specific game value is provided based on the ball. The second flow path is branched into a specific flow path that allows the game ball to flow down to the specific ball entry means and a small value flow path that flows down to the small value ball entry means. A first variable position at which at least one game ball flowing into the specific flow path can be held on the specific flow path, and a game ball flowing into the specific flow path as compared to the first variable position is held on the specific flow path The position variable means is changed to the second variable position which is difficult to perform.

  Thereby, even if the player continues firing the game ball toward the second flow path, the ball entry means into which the game ball flowing into the second flow path enters according to the variable position of the position variable means is provided. Can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be varied according to the variable position of the position variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that a monotonous game can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine C6, further comprising: holding control means for controlling the position variable means to change to the second variable position based on the bonus game being provided by the bonus game providing means; Is arranged at a position where the game ball which has flowed into the second flow path is easier to flow as compared with the small value flow path, and the position changing means holds the game ball by holding the game ball. A gaming machine C7 for facilitating the guiding of the game ball to the small value channel by the game ball being played.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C6. In other words, the position variable means is changed to the second variable position by the holding control means based on the fact that the privilege game is given by the privilege game giving means. The specific flow path is arranged at a position where the game balls flowing into the second flow path are more likely to flow than the low value flow path. When the game ball is held by the position changing means, the game ball is guided to the small value channel by the held game ball.

  Thereby, the ball entry means into which the game ball flowing into the second flow path enters can be made different depending on the variable position of the position variable means and whether or not the game ball is held by the position variable means. . Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be varied according to the variable position of the position variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that a monotonous game can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine C9, wherein in any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, the variable means and the position variable means are constituted by one member.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C6 to C8, since the variable means and the position variable means are formed by one member, the position and the position of the variable means can be changed by one control. The position of the means can be switched simultaneously. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the adjusting means may increase the ratio of the game balls flowing down to the specific flow path to the first ball-in means when the game balls are in the second ball-in state. The ratio of game balls flowing into the second ball input means is increased when the ratio of game balls flowing into the ball input means is reduced and the ratio of game balls flowing into the first ball input means is reduced. A gaming machine C10, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the game is performed when the ratio of the game balls flowing down to the specific flow path to the first flow path is increased by the adjusting means. The ratio at which the sphere flows into the second flow path is reduced. Further, when the ratio of the game balls flowing down to the specific flow path to flow into the first flow path is reduced by the adjusting means, the ratio of game balls flowing into the second flow path is increased.

  As a result, there is an effect that the game balls can more easily flow into the flow path on the side where the ratio is increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines perform a lottery to determine whether or not a game ball wins based on a winning of a game ball to a specific winning opening. In addition, there are known a plurality of winning ports in which a prize ball is paid out when a ball wins, in addition to a specific winning port. Some of the conventional gaming machines can change the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to the direction in which a player ejects a game ball by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning opening. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2001-129177).
The prize ball that can be obtained by winning is generally larger than the prize ball paid out by winning in the winning opening, so the player usually performs a lottery to determine whether or not it is a winning. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening to be executed. That is, it was common for a player to continue to launch a game ball in the same direction until a hit was achieved. Therefore, when a player plays a game on a gaming machine of the same model, as long as the player hits the ball in the same direction, the ball continues to win in the same winning opening, and the number of awarded balls to be paid out changes little. There was a case. That is, there is a risk that the game will be monotonous.
The technical idea is made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a game from becoming monotonous.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical concept 1 comprises a specific flow path branched at least into a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow, and a game flowing down the first flow path. A first ball entry means provided at a position where a ball can enter, and a first privilege which can be given a first privilege based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means. Based on the privilege granting means, the second ball entry means provided at a position where the game balls flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and the game balls entering the second ball entry means A second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege different from the first privilege, and a game ball having flowed down the specific flow path, wherein the first flow path and the second flow path Adjusting means capable of adjusting the respective ratios of flow into the air.
In the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, in the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition, and a lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result. A bonus game providing means for providing a bonus game advantageous to a player, a first lottery state in which a lottery result obtained by the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result, and the specific lottery state being higher than the first lottery state. A lottery state setting unit that can be set to a second lottery state having a low probability of being a lottery result, wherein the first privilege granting unit sets the first lottery state by the lottery state setting unit as the first privilege. Is set to be set.
The gaming machine according to the third technical concept is the gaming machine according to the first or second technical concept, wherein the second privilege providing unit provides a predetermined amount of game media as the second privilege.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the specific flow path is branched into the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game balls can flow. A first ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball, and based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, the first privilege granting means sets the first ball entry means. One privilege is given. A second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and is different from the first privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The second privilege is provided by the second benefit providing means. The ratio at which the game balls flowing down the specific flow path flow into the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is adjusted by the adjustment means.
By adjusting the adjusting means, a gaming machine to which the first privilege is easily given or a gaming machine to which the second privilege is easily given can be obtained. Therefore, different gaming properties can be realized by changing the adjustment degree by the adjustment means even for the same model. Therefore, there is an effect that a monotonous game can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects can be obtained. That is, a predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result, a privilege game advantageous to the player is given by the privilege game granting means. You. The lottery state setting means sets a first lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result being the specific lottery result is high and a second lottery state in which the probability of the specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. . The first privilege providing means is controlled so that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means as the first privilege.
This makes it possible to adjust the ease of transition to the first lottery state by the adjusting means. Therefore, the first lottery state is easily set according to the business policy of the hall, and the gaming property is easily set to the privilege game state, or the first lottery state is hard to be set, and the second bonus is easily provided with the game property. Can be adjusted. Therefore, there is an effect that a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall can be provided.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are obtained. That is, since the predetermined amount of game media is provided as the second privilege by the second privilege providing means, the ease with which the predetermined amount of game media is provided can be adjusted by the adjusting means.
Thereby, it is possible to adjust whether the predetermined amount of game media is easily provided or the first privilege is easily provided according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that a highly versatile gaming machine that can be adapted to the business policy of each hall can be provided.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
65a first specific winning opening (variable ball entry means)
112 launch control device (launch means)
601 general winning opening (second ball entry means)
602 General winning opening ( first ball entry means)
606 guide channel (second channel)
607 guide channel (first channel)
607a storage valve (variable means)
650a 2nd specific winning opening ( variable ball entry means)
701 General winning opening (first ball entry means)
702 General winning opening (third ball entry means)
703d general winning opening (second ball entry means)
704 guide channel (first channel)
704a storage valve (variable means)
706 guide channel (third channel)
708 guide channel (second channel)
800 release button (operation means)
S218 Variable game execution means S305 determination means
S1103 switching means
S1202, S1203 variable control means
S1302 switching means
S1406 variable control means
S4003, S4007 switching means
S4402, S4404 variable control means

Claims (3)

A specific flow path branched at least into a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow,
First ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter,
A first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means;
Second ball entry means provided at a position where game balls flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball,
A second privilege granting unit capable of granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on that a game ball has entered the second ball entry unit;
A gaming machine comprising: an adjusting unit capable of adjusting a ratio of a game ball flowing down the specific flow path to flow into the first flow path and the second flow path. Lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition,
A privilege game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to the player when a lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result;
Lottery that can be set to a first lottery state where the probability of the lottery result being the specific lottery result is the specific lottery result and a second lottery state where the probability of the specific lottery result being the lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. State setting means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first privilege granting means controls the lottery state setting means to set the first lottery state as the first privilege.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second privilege granting unit grants a predetermined amount of game media as the second privilege.

Images